Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
Loading...
IMPORTANT NOTICE: PLEASE READ CAREFULLY BEFORE INSTALLING THE SOFTWARE: This licence agreement (Licence) is a legal agreement between you (Licensee or you) and Innova Drilling and Intervention Limited of Union Plaza, 1 Union Wynd, Aberdeen, AB10 1DQ (Licensor, we or us) for the software (being one or more of Well Seeker PRO or Innova Engineering) (Software) which you have selected to either trial or purchase , which includes computer software, the data supplied with it, the associated media, and electronic documentation comprising the Installation Guide, the details of the Software available from the Licensor’s website and the PDF user manual provided with the download of the Software (Documentation).
THIS SOFTWARE REQUIRES (1) A COMPUTER WITH A MINIMUM OF 2Gb RAM AND 500MB HARD DRIVE, (2) MICROSOFT WINDOWS 7, 8 OR 10 OPERATING SYSTEM AND (3) MICROSOFT EXCEL.
BY CLICKING ON THE "AGREE" BUTTON BELOW YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENCE WHICH WILL BIND YOU AND YOUR EMPLOYEES. IF YOU DO NOT AGREE TO THE TERMS OF THIS LICENCE, WE ARE UNWILLING TO LICENSE THE SOFTWARE TO YOU AND YOU MUST DISCONTINUE INSTALLATION OF THE SOFTWARE NOW BY CLICKING ON THE "I DO NOT AGREE" BUTTON BELOW. IN THIS CASE YOU MUST RETURN THE MEDIUM ON WHICH THE SOFTWARE IS STORED AND ALL ACCOMPANYING DOCUMENTATION TO US WITHIN 30 DAYS OF PURCHASE. IF YOU DO THIS YOUR LICENCE FEE WILL BE REFUNDED.
1. GRANT AND SCOPE OF LICENCE
1.1 In consideration of payment of an annual licence fee (except where the Software is downloaded on a trial basis), the Licensor hereby grants to you a non-exclusive, non-transferable licence to use the Software and the Documentation on the terms of this Licence. If you do not renew your licence fee in one year, your licence will come to an end one year from the date of download of the Software and your licence to use the Software will automatically come to an end. If you have selected the option to trial the Software, your licence to trial the Software is subject to the terms of this Licence and your licence to use the Software will come to an end thirty days from the date of download of the Software. You may only use the Software under a trial period once.
1.2 You may:
(a) install and use the Software for your internal business purposes only on one physical CPU;
(b) transfer the Software from one computer to another provided it is used on only one computer at any one time;
(c) receive and use any free supplementary critical software code or update of the Software incorporating "patches" and corrections of critical errors as may be provided by the Licensor from time to time; and
(d) use any Documentation in support of the use permitted under condition 1.1 as is reasonably necessary for its lawful use.
2. LICENSEE'S UNDERTAKINGS
2.1 Except as expressly set out in this Licence or as permitted by any local law, you undertake:
(a) not to copy the Software or Documentation except where such copying is incidental to normal use of the Software or where it is necessary for the purpose of back-up or operational security;
(b) not to rent, lease, sub-license, loan, translate, merge, adapt, vary or modify the Software or Documentation;
(c) not to make alterations to, or modifications of, the whole or any part of the Software nor permit the Software or any part of it to be combined with, or become incorporated in, any other programs;
(d) not to disassemble, de-compile, reverse engineer or create derivative works based on the whole or any part of the Software nor attempt to do any such things except to the extent that (by virtue of section 296A of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988) such actions cannot be prohibited because they are essential for the purpose of achieving inter-operability of the Software with another software program, and provided that the information obtained by you during such activities:
(i) is used only for the purpose of achieving inter-operability of the Software with another software program;
(ii) is not disclosed or communicated without the Licensor's prior written consent to any third party to whom it is not necessary to disclose or communicate it; and
(iii) is not used to create any software which is substantially similar to the Software;
(e) to keep all copies of the Software secure and to maintain accurate and up-to-date records of the number and locations of all copies of the Software;
(f) to supervise and control use of the Software and ensure that the Software is used by your employees and representatives in accordance with the terms of this Licence;
(g) to include the copyright notice of the Licensor on all entire and partial copies of the Software in any form;
(h) not to provide, or otherwise make available, the Software in any form, in whole or in part (including, but not limited to, program listings, object and source program listings, object code and source code) to any person other than your employees without prior written consent from the Licensor;
(i) not to use the Software via any communications network or by means of remote access.
2.2 You must permit the Licensor and his representatives, at all reasonable times and on reasonable advance notice, to inspect and have access to any premises, and to the computer equipment located there, at which the Software or the Documentation is being kept or used, and any records kept pursuant to this Licence, for the purpose of ensuring that you are complying with the terms of this Licence.
2.3 You confirm and warrant that you will not use or permit the use of the Software (whether through permission or act of omission) in any way which would breach (directly or indirectly) EU restrictive measures, including but not limited to financial and economic sanctions or the same as implemented by European Union member states.
2.4 You confirm and warrant that you will not use or permit the use of the Software (whether through permission or act of omission) in any way which would breach (directly or indirectly) U.S. restrictive measures, including but not limited to financial and economic sanctions or the same as implemented by the United States of America.
2.5 You shall indemnify us against any losses, liabilities, penalties, damages, costs, claims and expenses (including but not limited to legal fees and investigation expenses) incurred by, or awarded against, us as a result of any breach of the warranties set out in condition 2.3 or 2.4 by you or your associated persons, any person working for you or any third party retained by you.
3. SUPPORT
The Licensor's technical support staff will endeavour to answer by telephone any queries which you may have regarding the use or application of the Software. For telephone support please contact the support email support@innova-drilling.com between the hours of 09:00 and 17:00 Monday – Friday.
4. INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS
4.1 You acknowledge that all intellectual property rights in the Software and the Documentation throughout the world belong to the Licensor, that rights in the Software are licensed (not sold) to you, and that you have no rights in, or to, the Software or the Documentation other than the right to use them in accordance with the terms of this Licence.
4.2 You acknowledge that you have no right to have access to the Software in source code form or in unlocked coding or with comments.
5. WARRANTY
5.1 The Licensor warrants that:
(a) the medium on which the Software is stored and distributed is (at the time it is supplied), and will be for the period of 90 days after that time (Warranty Period), free from defects in design, material and workmanship under normal use. If a defect in the medium occurs during the Warranty Period, the Licensor will replace it free of charge if you return it to the Licensor with proof of purchase and (so far as you are able) a documented example of such defect or error;
(b) always subject to condition 5.2 and 5.3, during the Warranty Period, the Software will, when properly used, perform substantially in accordance with the functions described in the Documentation (provided that the Software is properly used on the computer and with the operating system for which it was designed as referred to in the accompanying documentation), and the Documentation correctly describes the operation of the Software in all material respects; and
(c) it has tested the Software for viruses using commercially available virus-checking software, consistent with current industry practice.
5.2 YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE HAS NOT BEEN DEVELOPED TO MEET YOUR INDIVIDUAL REQUIREMENTS AND THAT IT IS THEREFORE YOUR RESPONSIBILITY TO ENSURE THAT THE FACILITIES AND FUNCTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE AS DESCRIBED IN THE DOCUMENTATION MEET YOUR REQUIREMENTS.
5.3 YOU ACKNOWLEDGE THAT THE SOFTWARE MAY NOT BE FREE OF BUGS OR ERRORS AND YOU AGREE THAT THE EXISTENCE OF ERRORS SHALL NOT CONSTITUTE A BREACH OF THIS LICENCE. WE DO NOT WARRANT THAT THE CONTENT OF THE SOFTWARE IS ACCURATE, CURRENT OR ERROR-FREE AND WE EXPRESSLY DISCLAIM ANY WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION AS TO THE ACCURACY OF THE CONTENT OF THE SOFTWARE AND DUE TO THE NATURE OF THE SOFTWARE, YOU AGREE AND ACKNOWLEDGE THAT YOU WILL VERIFY ANY RESULTS OBTAINIED FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE.
5.4 If, within the Warranty Period, you notify the Licensor in writing of any defect or fault in the Software in consequence of which it fails to perform substantially in accordance with the Documentation, and such defect or fault does not result from you having amended the Software or used it in contravention of the terms of this Licence, the Licensor will, at its sole option, repair or replace the Software, provided that you make available all information that may be necessary to assist the Licensor in resolving the defect or fault, including sufficient information to enable the Licensor to recreate the defect or fault.
6. LICENSOR'S LIABILITY
6.1 This condition sets out the entire liability of the parties (including any liability for the acts or omissions of their respective employees, agents and subcontractors) to each other in respect of:
(a) any breach of this Licence however arising;
(b) any use made or resale of the Software or the Documentation by you, or of any product or service incorporating any of the Software or the Documentation; and
(c) any representation, statement or tortious act or omission (including negligence) arising under or in connection with this Licence.
This condition is always subject to the warranties set out at condition 5 above.
6.2 Nothing in this Licence shall limit or exclude the liability of either party for:
(a) death or personal injury resulting from negligence; or
(b) fraud or fraudulent misrepresentation; or
(c) breach of the terms implied by section 12 of the Sale of Goods Act 1979; or
(d) breach of section 2 of the Consumer Protection Act 1987; or
(e) the deliberate default or wilful misconduct of that party, its employees, agents or subcontractors.
6.3 Without prejudice to conditions 2.4 and 6.2, neither party shall under any circumstances whatever be liable to the other, whether in contract, delict (including negligence) or restitution, or for breach of statutory duty or misrepresentation, or otherwise, for any:
(a) loss of income;
(b) loss of business profits or contracts;
(c) business interruption;
(d) loss of the use of money or anticipated savings;
(e) loss of information;
(f) loss of opportunity, goodwill or reputation;
(g) loss or deferral of production;
(h) loss of product;
(i) loss of, damage to or corruption of data; or
(j) any indirect or consequential loss or damage of any kind howsoever arising and whether caused by tort (including negligence), breach of contract or otherwise;
provided that this condition 6.3 shall not prevent claims for loss of or damage to your tangible property that fall within the terms of condition 5 or any other claims for direct financial loss that are not excluded by any of categories (a) to (j) inclusive of this condition 6.3.
6.4 Subject to condition 6.2 and condition 6.3, the Licensor's maximum aggregate liability under or in connection with this Licence, whether in contract, delict (including negligence) or otherwise, shall in all circumstances be limited to the annual licence fee paid.
6.5 Subject to condition 6.2 and condition 6.3, the Licensor's liability for infringement of third party intellectual property rights shall be limited to breaches of rights subsisting in the UK.
6.6 This Licence sets out the full extent of the Licensor's obligations and liabilities in respect of the supply of the Software and Documentation. In particular, there are no conditions, warranties, representations or other terms, express or implied, that are binding on the Licensor except as specifically stated in this Licence. Any condition, warranty, representation or other term concerning the supply of the Software and Documentation which might otherwise be implied into, or incorporated in, this Licence, or any collateral contract, whether by statute, common law or otherwise, is hereby excluded to the fullest extent permitted by law.
7. TERMINATION
7.1 The Licensor may terminate this Licence immediately by written notice to you if:
(a) you fail to pay the any Licence fees due;
(b) you commit a material or persistent breach of this Licence which you fail to remedy (if remediable) within 14 days after the service on you of written notice requiring you to do so; or
(c) a petition for a bankruptcy order to be made against you has been presented to the court; or
(d) the Licensee (where it is a company) becomes insolvent or unable to pay its debts (within the meaning of section 123 of the Insolvency Act 1986), enters into liquidation, whether voluntary or compulsory (other than for reasons of bona fide amalgamation or reconstruction), passes a resolution for its winding-up, has a receiver or administrator manager, trustee, liquidator or similar officer appointed over the whole or any part of its assets, makes any composition or arrangement with its creditors or takes or suffers any similar action in consequence of its debt.
7.2 Upon termination for any reason:
(a) all rights granted to you under this Licence shall cease;
(b) you must cease all activities authorised by this Licence;
(c) you must immediately pay to the Licensor any sums due to the Licensor under this Licence; and
(d) you must immediately delete or remove the Software from all computer equipment in your possession and immediately destroy or return to the Licensor (at the Licensor's option) all copies of the Software then in your possession, custody or control and, in the case of destruction, certify to the Licensor that you have done so.
8. TRANSFER OF RIGHTS AND OBLIGATIONS
8.1 This Licence is binding on you and us and on our respective successors and assigns.
8.2 You may not transfer, assign, charge or otherwise dispose of this Licence, or any of your rights or obligations arising under it, without our prior written consent.
8.3 The Licensor may transfer, assign, charge, sub-contract or otherwise dispose of this Licence, or any of his rights or obligations arising under it, at any time during the term of the Licence..
9. NOTICES
All notices given by you to the Licensor must be given to Innova Drilling and Intervention Ltd at Union Plaza (6th Floor), 1 Union Wynd, Aberdeen, Scotland, AB10 1DQ. The Licensor may give notice to you at either the e-mail or postal address you provided to it when purchasing the Software. Notice will be deemed received and properly served 24 hours after an e-mail is sent, or three days after the date of posting of any letter. In proving the service of any notice, it will be sufficient to prove, in the case of a letter, that such letter was properly addressed, stamped and placed in the post and, in the case of an e-mail, that such e-mail was sent to the specified e-mail address of the addressee.
10. EVENTS OUTSIDE THE LICENSOR'S CONTROL
10.1 The Licensor will not be liable or responsible for any failure to perform, or delay in performance of, any of his obligations under this Licence that is caused by an event outside his reasonable control (Force Majeure Event).
10.2 A Force Majeure Event includes any act, event, non-happening, omission or accident beyond our reasonable control and includes in particular (without limitation) the following:
(a) strikes, lock-outs or other industrial action;
(b) civil commotion, riot, invasion, terrorist attack or threat of terrorist attack, war (whether declared or not) or threat or preparation for war;
(c) fire, explosion, storm, flood, earthquake, subsidence, epidemic or other natural disaster;
(d) impossibility of the use of railways, shipping, aircraft, motor transport or other means of public or private transport;
(e) impossibility of the use of public or private telecommunications networks;
(f) the acts, decrees, legislation, regulations or restrictions of any government.
10.3 The Licensor's performance under this Licence is deemed to be suspended for the period that the Force Majeure Event continues, and he will have an extension of time for performance for the duration of that period. We will use our reasonable endeavours to bring the Force Majeure Event to a close or to find a solution by which our obligations under this Licence may be performed despite the Force Majeure Event.
11. WAIVER
11.1 If the Licensor fails, at any time during the term of this Licence, to insist on strict performance of any of your obligations under this Licence, or if the Licensor fails to exercise any of the rights or remedies to which he is entitled under this Licence, this shall not constitute a waiver of such rights or remedies and shall not relieve you from compliance with such obligations.
11.2 A waiver by the Licensor of any default shall not constitute a waiver of any subsequent default.
11.3 No waiver by the Licensor of any of these terms and conditions shall be effective unless it is expressly stated to be a waiver and is communicated to you in writing.
12. SEVERABILITY
If any of the terms of this Licence are determined by any competent authority to be invalid, unlawful or unenforceable to any extent, such term, condition or provision will to that extent be severed from the remaining terms, conditions and provisions which will continue to be valid to the fullest extent permitted by law.
13. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
13.1 This Licence and any document expressly referred to in it constitute the whole agreement between us and supersedes any previous arrangement, understanding or agreement between us, relating to the licensing of the Software and Documentation.
13.2 We each acknowledge that, in entering into this Licence (and the documents referred to in it), neither of us relies on any statement, representation, assurance or warranty (Representation) of any person (whether a party to this Licence or not) other than as expressly set out in this Licence or those documents.
13.3 Each of us agrees that the only rights and remedies available to us arising out of or in connection with a Representation shall be for breach of contract as provided in this Licence.
13.4 Nothing in this clause shall limit or exclude any liability for fraud.
14. LAW AND JURISDICTION
This Licence, its subject matter or its formation (including non-contractual disputes or claims) shall be governed by and construed in accordance with Scots law and submitted to the non-exclusive jurisdiction of the Scottish courts.
The menu bar across the top of the main Well Seeker PRO user interface allows the user access to all Well Seeker PRO functions. A lot of the functions are also duplicated in the available toolbars.
Use the navigation tree on the left to view the page for each menu.
The full Well Seeker Pro maunal.
Well Seeker PRO recommended system requirements:
Intel i5 processor or equivalent.
4 GB of RAM.
500MB of hard disk space.
Microsoft Windows 64-bit (x64) version 10 or better.
Microsoft Excel 2007 or later.
Windows XP, Windows 7.0 and Mac OS are NOT supported.
Recommended screen resolution: 1920 x 1080.
Well Seeker Web client is compatible with the following browsers:
Desktop browser: Microsoft Edge, Google Chrome, or Firefox.
Mobile operating system: iOS or Android.
Recommended remote server setup:
Compatible with Amazon Web Services (AWS) and Microsoft Azure cloud-based servers.
Engine type: Microsoft SQL Server version 2017 14.00.2049.1.v1 or newer.
Engine Edition: SQL Server Express Edition.
DB Instance size: Minimum 2 vCPUs and 4 GB RAM.
Minimum storage: 100 GB.
Server management software e.g. Microsoft SQL Server Management Studio.
Ubuntu based ICDS Instance e.g. Amazon EC2.
Innova Well-Seeker Pro is a high performance well planning and survey management package designed for use by Operators, Well Engineering Companies and Directional Drilling Contractors. The software integrates high performance 2D & 3D graphics with a powerful database engine that allows the user to easily store and visualize their well trajectories as well as perform complex well planning and anti-collision calculations. Innova Well Seeker Pro offers exceptional performance with all the features expected of an industry leading well planning package.
Directional Well Planning Module:
Full range of easy-to-use 2D & 3D well planning methods including:
Dogleg Tool Face
Build and Turn
Optimum Align using Curve-Hold-Curve or Curve-Curve
Line up on Target at specified inc / azi,
One click S-Well and Slant Well construction
Supports multiple target geometries including:
Simple 2D circular and Elliptical
Point & Rectangular
Complex 3D multi point Polygonal
Lease Lines and Hard Lines
Create Drillers Targets based on error models, well trajectory & required confidence.
Supports advanced well planning for all applications, from simple vertical exploration wells to complex multi-laterals.
Anti-Collision Module:
Perform anti-collision scans using industry leading proximity detection algorithms.
Calculate ellipse of uncertainty (EOU) using full range of ISCWSA MWD and Gyro error models.
Error outputs and Centre to Centre distances validated against ISCWSA standard well paths to < 0.1% error.
Anti-collision scans can be run interactively during planning and drilling phases on multiple actual wells / plans.
User defined warning criteria and alerts can be set to notify of potential collision risk.
Casing and hole diameters can be included in separation factor calculation in order increase accuracy. Especially important for top hole drilling with large diameter surface casing.
Ability to create custom Instrument Performance Models (IPM).
Error output sigma level can be selected by the user.
Real Time AC feature allows monitoring of multiple offset wells and distance to lease lines
Anti-collision tools such as travelling cylinder view and ladder plot update in real time as additional surveys are entered.
Advanced anti-collision visualisation tools available including:
Ladder Plot
Separation Factor Plot
Travelling Cylinder Plot
Powerful database:
Built on a powerful database engine which allows storage and navigation for an unlimited number of actual wells and plans.
Easy navigation of database through familiar tree view.
Import and export of data allows easy transfer of wells and plans from office locations to the field.
Both local and SQL Server databases available.
Local databases can be easily set up to provide real time data exchange with the master SQL Server database, allowing surveys, daily reports, BHA’s etc to be updated on the master database in real time from the field.
Local databases can perform a remote data fetch allowing them to pull plans and offset data directly from the master SQL Server database. This permits the field engineers to quickly build a database with all the relevant data.
Wellbore Visualization:
Fully customisable, advanced, and powerful 3D plotting capability:
Plan View (Top Down) Plot
Section View (Side On) Plot
3D Plot
Fly down well 3D chart feature
Visualise closest approach to all offset wells and principal plan
Spider Plot with interactive TVD slice control
Azimuth Comparison Plot (Azimuth vs MD)
Inclination Comparison Plot (Inclination vs MD)
Dogleg Comparison Plot (Dogleg vs MD)
Live View Plot
Print directly to multiple image formats including PDF / jpg / bmp / png.
Copy directly to clipboard allowing images to be quickly added to Word, Excel & PowerPoint documents.
Wall Plot Composer (WPC) allows the user to create customisable wall plots which can include data tables.
Pre-defined plot sizes range from A0 to A7 with a user defined option also available.
Integrated Geosteering Functionality
Visualise formation top and target depths.
Customisable outputs in both 2D and 3D charts.
Update and model geological target corridor based on RT updates.
Provides clear visual updates to DD of drilling corridor.
Quickly create offset plans based on real time geosteering updates.
Geomagnetic Modelling
Includes World Magnetic Model (WMM) and International Geomagnetic Reference Field (IGRF) model as standard.
Supports British Geological Survey Global Geomagnetic Model (BGGM)*
*available only to full BGGM license holders
Supports NOAA High Definition Geomagnetic Model (HDGM)**
**available only to full HDGM license holders
Supports MagVAR High Definition Geomagnetic Model (mvHD)***
***available only to full mvHD license holders
Standard Reporting Features
User defined reports include:
Standard Survey reports
Geographic Survey reports
Anti-Collision reports
Ellipse of uncertainty (EOU) reports
Exports to fully customisable PDF and Excel reports.
Wall Plot Composer.
Import Compass Export Files
Includes the ability to import Compass Export files, including batch import, where multiple export files can be pulled in simultaneously.
Bid Sheets
Quickly populate customer and Supplier addresses and details from dropdown lists.
Print quotation including a cover letter and any relevant notes.
Cost Codes included in the bids can be quickly and easily copied to well level where they can then be selected in the Daily Reporting feature.
Bids are approved by users with the relevant user permissions.
Bids can be Archived by users with the relevant user permissions.
Integrated Daily Reporting Features
Integrated within Innova’s Well Seeker Pro are advanced custom reporting features including:
Daily Reports
Slide Sheets
Ability to populate Daily Reports directly from the slide sheet.
Ability to auto populate slide sheets via received WITS data.
Daily Cost Reports
Well Cost Reports
Cost Tracking
Tool Inventory
Tool Utilisation Reports
Personnel Utilisation Reports
Tool and Personnel Tracking
Shipping Tickets
Pipe Tally
BHA Reports
Motor and MWD Performance Reports
Motor and MWD Failure Reports
End of Well Reports
Company Man Report
KPI Tracking
Well statistics provides a detailed overview of the well data including well phases and BHA’s.
Click of a button morning report package, directly opens outlook email complete with excel morning report and copy of current database as attachments and email body populated with a synopsis of daily operations.
Generate and output detailed reports at the click of a button.
Excel and PDF output.
Easily create and output custom reports and charts.
Database Analytics Tool
Powerful search tool to find and compare wells across the entire database. Multiple search criteria options available including Date Range, Radius from a given well, Formation, Assembly type, Failures, State, Directional Company, Hole Size, Rig and LIH etc.
Plot all selected wells together on google maps. Surface locations, Plans, Surveys and Lease Lines can all be displayed.
Motor, MWD and Section KPI Reports.
Revenue Report.
Rig Days Report.
Personnel Utilisation Report.
Well Ranking Report.
Compare KPI metrics between multiple wells and well phases:
Slide & Rotation Footage
Depth Vs Time
Failure Analysis
Directional Cost per Foot
Well Cost per Foot
BHA Details
Detailed Cost Breakdown
Wells by Formation, Directional Company, Motor Make, Bit Make
ROP & Footage by Formation, Directional Company, Motor Make, Bit Make, Hole Size
Activity & Phase Comparison
Wells by Rig
ROP & Footage by Rig
Parameter Comparison
Well / Section Performance
Average Interval Cost per Quarter
Driller Performance
Well AFE Designer
The Authorization for Expenditure (AFE) Designer is a powerful well plan costing tool which includes the following features:
Build detailed AFE for any well plan from mobilisation to demobilisation.
Probabilistic & Deterministic approach.
Calculate costs for P10, P50, P90 scenarios.
Standardised cost codes.
Factor in associated risks and assign probabilities.
Export KPI charts:
Time Probability Density Function
Cost Probability Density Function
Time Cumulative Density Function
Cost Cumulative Density Function
Depth vs Time
Cost vs Time
Time Interval
Time Cumulative
Cost Interval
Cost Cumulative
Generate full reports with detailed timeline and cost breakdown:
Event Model
Detailed Event Breakdown with costs
Cost Model
Time vs Depth
Time vs Cost
Time Histogram
Cost Histogram
Full report containing all the above reports and all KPI charts
WITS & Remote Directional Drilling
Supports WITS & WITSML connectivity.
WITS data can be pushed back from the field to the remote server database, where it can be viewed by anyone with the relevant login credentials.
Slide sheets can be automatically populated based on the data received via the WITS feed.
Remote data fetch allows the user to pull wells into a local database, directly from an SQL server database.
Real Time Data Exchange allows field data to be updated on the SQL server database in real time.
DD Dashboard, which provides an interface containing tools a directional driller can utilize while drilling a well either locally on the rig or remotely from an RTOC. It updates automatically while using the WITS feed and contains the following:
Rig Gauges.
A Tool Face Rose which displays Toolface, Effective Toolface, Bit Projection and various other information based on the selected mode.
Real Time Anti-collision for bit projection.
Last 4 surveys along with the Slide Seen and Motor Yield for each one.
Projections including projection to bit and advisory projection.
Real time 3D plot.
Drilling parameters charts populated from the WITS data feed.
Choose between 4 modes: Vertical, Nudge, Curve & Lateral which provide the user with slide and rotary recommendations based on the data entered in the settings menu.
Slide Analysis.
Connection Analysis.
Dashboards
Activity Dashboard
Shows a summary with up-to-date data for all selected wells including, depth vs time chart, revenue tracking, inventory etc.
Print job board report which includes Active Wells, Upcoming and Standby Wells, daily and monthly revenue and summary of wells by operator, state, and coordinator.
Logistics Dashboard
Provides an overview of all tools in the local inventories within the database giving full oversight of all equipment.
View all tools in all locations via google maps.
Various filter options to quickly find the relevant items.
Rigs Online Dashboard
Shows a list of all current jobs where data is being sent from the field to the server database and displays the time since last update.
AC Dashboard
Displays a summary of all open RTAC dialogs.
At the click of a button the user can open the surveys and RTAC dialogs for all active wells in the database.
Innova Web Portal
Login to the web portal from anywhere in the world via an internet browser.
Filter and view all well data contained in the SQL database.
Can be viewed on any internet enabled device with no additional software required.
Additional Features
Server based licensing
Supports data import / export from 3rd party software platforms.
Ability to import COMPASS XML export files at the click of a button.
Directional Difficulty Index (DDI) calculator.
Motor Yield Calculator.
Motor and MWD Forecasting.
Additional UI Features
Copy & Paste - Very quick and easy to add large surveys to the software - copy and paste directly from excel or txt files.
Export files can be generated quickly at any level on the database tree.
Quick and easy to create and switch between new databases.
The Well Seeker PRO user interface is split into four main sections. All sections of the user interface can be dragged and resized, so the user can customize how the interface looks.
The properties window allows the user to quickly see common properties for the currently selected tree item and all parent items. It also displays the current unit set information.
The Well Seeker PRO status bar located at the bottom of the main user interface also provides the user with information as to the programs current operation, unit sets and location of the Database currently selected.
On the right-hand side of the status bar the status and current activity of the Real Time Data Exchange is displayed. See Section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange for more information on the Real Time Data Exchange.
Well Seeker Pro comes pre-installed with three toolbars which are displayed at the top of the main user interface.
The Well Seeker Toolbar contains the main functions of Well Seeker
The Reporting Toolbar contains functions relating to the Drill String and Daily Reporting editors.
The Field Toolbar contains functions that Directional Drillers commonly use during drilling operations.
The following table contains a list of all the icons available across the 3 toolbars.
It is possible to hide or display the toolbars based on the user’s personal preference. The selection made is remembered by Well Seeker and the selected toolbars will be displayed each time the software is opened. For more information regarding this see section 6.3 – View Menu.
When first installed, the toolbar contains all the available options, which for some users may be too many buttons. It is possible to remove any unwanted icons by holding down the ALT key and then left-clicking the mouse key on the desired icon and dragging it away from the toolbar. Releasing the mouse key will then cause the icon to disappear.
If an icon is removed by mistake, or if the user decides to add in previously removed icons, this can be achieved as follows
Open the View menu from the Menu Bar and select the Toolbars and Docking Windows menu item.
Select the Customize menu item to open the Customize dialog. Select the Commands tab.
The user can then search for the desired icon by selecting the various categories on the left-hand side of the dialog. The icons relating to the selected category will be displayed in the Commands box on the right-hand side of the dialog.
Once the desired icon has been identified, it can be added to the toolbar by dragging and dropping it onto the toolbar.
The toolbar can be reset back to its default setting, as per first install as follows:
Open the View menu from the Menu Bar and select the Toolbars and Docking Windows menu item.
Select the Customize menu item to open the Customize dialog. Select the Toolbars tab.
Select your desired toolbar and click on the Reset button. Alternatively click on the Reset All button to reset all the toolbars.
Well Seeker Pro can be downloaded from the Innova Drilling & Intervention website in an unzipped format. However, if Well Seeker Pro is supplied via email, it will be attached as a zipped installation file, which must be unzipped before use. Right click on the file and select “Extract All….” From the context menu.
Select a location which you wish to extract the files to and click “Extract”. The installation files will be extracted to the selected location in a folder called “Well Seeker PRO”.
Once the Installation file has been extracted, open the Well Seeker PRO folder and double click on the “Well Seeker PRO vx.x.x.xxx.exe” file to begin the installation process.
The next screen will allow you to select the location in which you wish to install Well Seeker PRO. The default location is “C:\Program Files (x86)\Innova Drilling and Intervention\Well Seeker PRO”. If you wish to change the location the program is installed to click on the “…” button. Before continuing you must tick the “I agree to the License terms and conditions” checkbox. You can read the License terms and conditions by clicking on the blue highlighted text (See Figure 4 below). One you are ready click the “INSTALL” button to begin the installation.
At this point, you may be asked “Do you want to allow this app to make changes to your device?”. Click “Yes” to continue the installation.
During the installation process, the Well Seeker PRO installer may also install one or more pieces of prerequisite software. If this happens follow the instructions in the setup wizard for each software. Once all prerequisite software has been installed the Well Seeker PRO installtion will resume. All prerequisite software is created by Microsoft and poses no risk to your computer. Some software may require you to restart your computer. In this case, allow the Well Seeker PRO to finish and then restart your computer before running Well Seeker PRO for the first time.
With the installation complete Well Seeker Pro will display the message “Well Seeker PRO has been successfully installed.” Click on the “Finish” button to close the installer.
Once the installation is complete an icon will have been added to the desktop and an entry for “Well Seeker PRO” will be in the start menu.
This menu is only available if a survey or plan is open in the Survey / Chart viewer area. It is also available by right clicking anywhere in the Survey / Chart Viewer when a survey or plan is selected.
Undo: Reverses the last action that you performed in the Survey / Chart viewer.
Redo: Reverses the last Undo action that was performed in the Survey / Chart viewer.
Copy: Copy the selected grid rows to the clip board.
Paste: Paste survey data from the clip board to the grid. Only MD INC and AZI data will be pasted; all other data will be discarded.
Delete: Delete the currently selected row if a full row is selected or delete the contents of the currently selected cell / cells.
Insert Row: Insert a row below the current selection.
The reports menu allows access to the Report Manager, where PDF and Excel reports can be generated. It will only be available if the user is currently viewing a survey, plan or plot in the main user interface.
When special character sets are being entered into the program e.g. Cyrillic characters for well names etc, the user can select the relevant character set from here, which will allow these characters to be used when generating reports.
The user should select their desired report type – Error Ellipse, Anti-Collision or Survey. This will open the Report Manager where they can configure their report.
Note: Well Seeker will remember the settings from the last report printed, with the exception of the following settings: Include Details, SF Plot, Ladder Plot, Whole Path and Save Report. Reports will display the logos selected in the Operator Properties for the well in the Database Tree.
At the top of the Report Manager window is the Select Report Type section. Here the user should select one of the pre-set templates and then customize them to their liking using the options in the lower section. The user can use the drop down box in the bottom right of this section to switch between the three report types. The report type defines the options available in the Report Columns and the Report Options sections.
The user can create a new report template by clicking on the New Survey Report, New AC Report or New Error Report buttons, depending on the report type they need. Templates can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button. After configuring the report in the report manager, the settings can be saved to the currently selected template by clicking on the Apply button.
The Output section allows the user to choose the format of their report. The available formats are PDF, Excel 2003 or 2007, and tab delimited text file. The Font Size option allows the user to set the size of text in the results table, but only in PDF format reports.
The Report Columns table allows the user to select the columns displayed in the main results table of each report. Columns can be turned on or off by clicking the Enabled check box. Columns can be re-arranged using the Move Up and Move Down buttons. The Report Options table allows the user to enable or disable other features of the report.
The available options in these tables depends on the type of report selected - Error Ellipse, Anti-Collision or Survey. See the sections below for details on each report type.
The Interpolate section allows the user to apply some interpolation to their survey or plan listing. The AC Reports Plots section allows the user to add two relevant plots to their AC report.
Interval: When this option is toggled on, instead of listing the survey/plan stations the report will show an interpolated listing. The interval sets the distance in MD between each interpolated station.
Depth From/To: Allows the user to only display stations within a specific depth range in the report. This can be used without interpolation.
Include Final Station: The final survey/plan station will be included in the interpolated listing.
Include Stations: All survey/plan stations will be included in the interpolated listing.
Whole Path: If the well/survey being printed does not start from surface – for example it is a survey tied on to a shallower section, or it is a sidetrack – then toggling this option will add the sections above it to the report, all the way up to surface.
Only Interpolate Plans: If the trajectory being printed is made up of both a plan and actual surveys, then the user can toggle this option so that the interpolation settings only apply to the plan. The actual surveys will display normally with no interpolation.
SF Plot/Ladder Plot: The options allow the user to add a Separation Factor and Ladder plot to the end of their report. These are only available in an Anti-Collision report, and the well/plan being printed must have offsets assigned.
The sections in the bottom right of the Reports Manager give the user some additional options for formatting and printing their reports.
Colours: The Background and Inset Background options allow the user to set the colour scheme of PDF format reports. The Excel Report option sets the colour scheme of Excel format reports. The Defaults button will reset the colour schemes back to the defaults displayed above.
Page Setup: Allows the user to choose between portrait or landscape orientation when creating PDF or Excel format reports.
Include Details: Toggling this on will display the company details on the front page of the PDF format report. The company details can be edited by opening the Help menu in the main interface and selecting Company Details.
Save Report: Toggling this on will prompt the user to save the report to a file location. If this option is not selected, the report will be generated and previewed but not saved when the Create button is pressed. The report can be saved by clicking the save button in either the PDF viewer or Excel depending on which report type is generated.
Create: After setting up their report, the user should click on the Create button to print it.
Cancel: Close the Report Manager.
Batch Print: Opens the Batch Print window. This feature allows the user to save multiple reports at once. All reports will use the options selected in the Report Manager.
The user should select the wells they want to print from the database tree. The type of wells/plans displayed in the tree can be changed using the Filters section. The user should select a location to save the reports using the Select Folder box. When the Print button is clicked, a report for each selected well/plan will be created and saved.
Error Ellipse report column options include: MD, Inc, Azi, Mag H, Bias H, Mag L, Bias L, Mag V, Bias V, Mag Bias, Semi Major, Semi Minor, Azi, Survey Tool.
It should be noted that Well Seeker will only generate an AC Report if the user has at least one offset well selected. If no offset wells are selected, then the user will receive a warning.
AC Report column options include: Ref MD, Ref TVD, Off MD, Off TVD, Ref Semi Maj, Off Semi Maj, TFO, Off NS, Off EW, Ref OD, Off OD, C2C, Ellipse Separation, Min Separation, Bias, SF, Warnings.
When creating an anti-collision report the SF Plot and Ladder Plot options at the bottom of the report manager become available. These options allow the user to add a Separation Factor plot and a Ladder Plot to the report.
Survey Report column options include: MD, Inc, Azi, TVD, NS, EW, VS, DLS, BR, TR, TFO, CL, TVDSS, Grid N, Grid E, LAT, LONG, Closure Azi, Up Down, Left Right, Dist.
The plots menu allows the user to bring up a plot for the currently selected plan / survey.
Plan View – Top down plot showing a bird’s eye view of the well / wells
Section View – A slice at the reference well’s vertical section azimuth
3D View – A 3D representation of all wells
Travelling Cylinder Plot – A specialised polar plot used for anti-collision; requires at least one offset well to be selected.
Separation Factor – Shows separation factor vs measured depth; requires at least one offset well to be selected.
Ladder Plot – Shows the centre-to-centre distance vs measured depth; requires at least one offset well to be selected.
Spider Plot – Similar to a plan view except “TVD slices” can be produced whereby only the current well bore sections which have a TVD greater than or equal to the current value are displayed. This plot is used to help with anti-collision. Using the “+” and “-“ keys changes the current TVD slice. This can also be done from the chart properties menu.
Azimuth Comparison – Show azimuth vs measured depth.
Inclination Comparison – – Show inclination vs measured depth.
Dogleg Comparison - – Show dogleg vs measured depth.
Turn On Error Ellipses– Turns On / Off the error ellipses in whichever chart is currently displayed.
Chart Properties– Brings up the chart properties dialog which allows the user to customize chart settings. See section 6.7 - Chart Properties for more details
Screen Reader – Allows the user to turn the screen reader on and off. The screen reader is not available in 3D plots.
The screen reader will display the co-ordinates of the current mouse position in the top left-hand corner of the chart. If the user clicks on the chart area, a red line will be drawn from the point which was clicked to the current mouse position. The distance between the current mouse position and the point at which the mouse was clicked will be displayed in the distance box of the screen reader, as will the angle (azimuth) between the 2 points. Turning the screen reader off will remove the red measuring line.
Reset Zoom – Reset the chart view to default zoom levels
Chart Defaults – Allows the user to select from a range of default chart options
Default Chart Style – Allows the user to change the default style for all chart types
Default Grid options – Allows the user to set up the default options for the chart grids, such as grid lines, tick marks and grid line styles.
Default Series Style – Allows the user to set the default line style for the chart series.
Default Border Style – The default style for the chart border.
Default Minor Grid Line Colour – Default Colour for Minor gridlines.
Default Major Grid Line Colour – Default Colour for Major gridlines.
Show Offsets On Open – Toggles whether offsets are shown by default when a chart is created.
Show Targets On Open – Toggles whether targets are shown by default when a chart is created.
Tick Marks - Sets the default scale of major and minor ticks on the x- and y-axis.
Show Casing On Open – Toggles whether casing symbols are shown by default when a chart is created.
Casing Symbol – Allows the user to select whether to display the Casing Symbols as casing symbols or Dots.
Chart Font Sizes – Allows the user to set the default font size value for various chart elements:
Default Chart Label Size – The default size of chart labels. This affects all labels within the charts including but not limited to the well name, target name, casing name, annotations etc.
Default Grid Number Size – The default size of grid number and axis number sizes.
Default Axis Label Size – The default size for axis titles.
Default Font Size - Default size for all chart fonts, including axis labels and title.
Show Legend – Allows the user to select the position of the legend on the chart. Default setting is hidden.
Geo Steering Zone Settings – Allows the user to set the colours for the Target, Top Target and Bottom Target geo steering zones, which can be represented on the Section and 3D plots. User can also select a check box to use these options as default.
Tolerance Circle Settings – Allows the user to set the colour and line style for Inner and Outer Tolerance Circles. User can also select a check box to use these options as default.
3D Plot Defaults – Allows the user to set the default options for various 3D chart elements.
3D Plot Centre at Top of Well – When user selects centre on survey in the 3D plot the plot will centre on the top of the well when this option is checked, or at the bottom of the well when this option is unchecked.
Survey Spheres – Select the default size of the Survey Spheres
Fly Down Well Spheres Select the default size of the Fly Down Well Spheres.
Line Thickness – Select the default line thickness. 0.1 - 0.2 is recommended.
Work Sight Settings – User selects the default settings for the work sight in the 3D plot.
Show Rig – Select whether a rig graphic is displayed above the wellhead of the reference well or not by default.
Show Critical Point Targets – Displays plan critical points with a target radius disc by default.
Critical Point Target Radius – User sets the default radius of the critical point target disc.
Show Lease Line Curtain – Select whether to display a lease line as a vertical curtain or a line by default.
Projection Settings – Allows the user to set the colour for Bit projections. User can also select a check box to use these options as default.
Lease / Hard Line Settings – Allows the user to select the colour and line style of lease and hard lines. User can also select a check box to use these options as default.
Show Lithology Lines on Open – Shows Lithology Lines on the Section view and 3D plot when they are first opened. Default is OFF.
Show Principal Plan on SF Plot – Allows the user to select whether to show the Principal plan associated with a survey when in the Separation Factor plot. Default is OFF. This means that when in a survey, if the principal plan is selected as one of the offsets, it will not be displayed on the SF plot. It will display on all other plots.
Show axis scales – Toggles axis scales on/off by default.
Show Plan Points On Open – Allows the user to Toggles the plan points on or off as a default.
Show Well Names – Toggles whether well names are shown by default when a chart is opened.
Show Tether Lines - Toggles whether tether lines are shown by default when a chart is opened.
Only Show Principal Plan – If this option is toggled on, plots will not display any wells other than the reference well and the principal plan for that well, if one has been assigned.
Survey Line Colours – The default colour surveys will be displayed with on charts.
Actual Line Colours – The default colour Actual Wellbores will be displayed with on charts.
Plan Line Colours – The default colour plans will be displayed with on charts.
Principal Plan Line Colours – The default colour principal plans will be displayed with on charts.
X and Z Plane Colour – The default colour of the X and Z plane colours of the 3d chart
Y Plane Colour - The default colour of the Y plane colours of the 3d chart.
Creates a new blank Well Seeker PRO database. It should be noted that spaces and other symbols should not be used in the filename and that the user must have write permissions for the file location selected. Unless Well Seeker PRO is running with administrator privileges it will not by default have write access to the C:\ location or “program files”
Select the database for Well Seeker PRO to use. This will also be the database which Well Seeker PRO will attempt to connect to the next time the program is opened.
This option refreshes the database tree and useful when accessing an SQL database as it will update the tree with any changes made by other users who are accessing the database at the same time.
Allows the user to select a database from a list of the 10 most recently selected databases.
The User can access Well Seeker’s remote database and SQL server functions here.
This option opens the below dialog, which allows the user to connect to a remote database.
The user should enter their login credentials provided by their server administrator into the appropriate sections. The checkboxes beside Database IP/URL, Database Name and Port hide the entered information. Passwords are hidden by default but can be displayed by clicking on the Show Passwords button. Click on the Save Passwords button to save entered passwords between logins. The Clear button will delete all entered information. Login credentials entered in this window are saved in Setup.ini file. See section 6.1.15 - Export Setup File for more information on the setup file.
Depending on how the user’s organisation has set up their user management section, the Connect to Remote Database login may look like the above, instead. In this case the user does not need to enter any credentials for their company’s database – these are selected automatically. The user simply needs to enter the username and password they use for the Innova Web Portal, provided to them by their administrator.
When logged into a remote server database, this option can be used to update the server table schema to match with the user’s current version of Well Seeker. When used, Well Seeker will display a message similar to the one below, comparing the user’s version of Well Seeker with the remote server’s.
Well Seeker will then update all the relevant tables to the remote server to bring it up to date with the user’s version of Well Seeker. Please note that this can sometimes cause issues for users that try to connect to the remote database using old versions of Well Seeker.
This function can be used to select a new external files directory for the ICDS server. The user should select a folder on their local computer. The folder will then be copied to the ICDS server and will be used as the directory for storing external files from that point on. Any files inside the folder on the local computer will also be copied to the ICDS server.
When this option is toggled on, the Real Time Data Exchange will upload external files when it pushes data to the remote server.
This function links the database to an Oasis ERP database, which then allows the user to import/export data from the Cost Codes, Tool Inventory, Daily Reporting and Drill String sections of the Reporting module. The user should enter the URL, username, and password provided by the Oasis database admin.
Save the currently open survey or plan to the database and update any associated survey programs. This option is only available if a survey or plan is selected in the “Survey / Chart Viewer” area.
Allows the user to import survey data into the selected survey. This option is only available if a survey is selected in the “Survey / Chart Viewer” area. This option is NOT available when in a plan. When the option is clicked the user will be promoted to select a survey file.
Select a survey file from the dialog box and select its file type from the filter drop down menu. Supported file types are tab delimited text, space delimited text, comma delimited text, Excel 2003 files and Excel 2007 files. The file type must be selected correctly based on the file you are trying to import, or the file will not open properly. The survey file can contain column headers and must contain the measured depth in a column, inclinations in a column and azimuths in a column. The columns do not have to be in any order and the file can contain other data columns. Once selected the following dialog will be displayed.
A preview of the survey file will be displayed in the main grid with the row numbers down the left-hand side of the lower grid. Select the start row and the end row of the surveys you wish to import and select which column is which from the combo boxes in the upper grid. MD INC and AZI must be selected and if the column is not to be imported select NA from the combo box.
Once happy with the selection, click the import button and the surveys will be imported.
This option is only available if a survey or plan is selected in the “Survey / Chart Viewer” area. Selecting this option will bring up the survey export dialog which allows the currently active survey / plan to be exported either as a text or an Excel file.
If text file is selected from the drop-down menu, the delimiter can be selected from the radio buttons to the right of the dialog. If the results are to be interpolated, click the ‘Interval’ check box and enter the interval required. Clicking the ‘Depth From’ check box allows the user to specify a depth range to export. Clicking the ‘Include Stations’ check box will include all survey/plan stations as well as interpolated points. Clicking the ‘Include Final Station’ will include only the final survey/plan point. If a plan or survey fie is selected, the ‘Export Whole Path’ option becomes available. This exports the current survey / plan as well as any surveys or plans which the current view is tied to.
When selected, the Autosave feature will automatically save any plan or survey which has not been saved for 30 minutes e.g. if the user enters a survey and then leaves their machine without saving, after 30 minutes, Well Seeker will automatically save the survey. Default is ON.
This option allows the user to create a backup copy of the currently selected database. This is effectively a “save as” feature, allowing the user to choose a suitable location and name for the backup.
This option allows Compass .xml files to be imported into Well Seeker. Select the desired file in the Open File dialog window and click on ‘Open’. Well Seeker will import targets, lease lines, survey error models and well plans according to the settings chosen in section 6.1.13 – Compass EDM Import Options.
Well Seeker Pro requires all items in the same database tree level to have a unique name, whilst Compass does not. To avoid conflicts Well Seeker will modify names at the field, facility, well and actual/plan level when importing a Compass EDM. The logic that the software uses is described below:
Operator: Well Seeker will use the name of the operator stored in the EDM.
Field: Well Seeker will append the name of the operator to the end of the field name stored in the EDM.
Facility: The facility will use the name of the facility stored in the EDM and will not append the field name to it.
Well: The well may or may not have the facility name appended to the end of it, depending on the logic shown in the flow chart below:
Actual Well and Plan: Actual wells and plans will always have the name of the well appended to them as a prefix.
This submenu contains additional settings and options for importing Compass EDM files.
This option opens the compass import settings dialog, where the user can select the appropriate settings that they desire when importing data from a Compass EDM file.
Targets and Lease Lines: Allows the user to either include or omit targets and lease lines when importing. The user can also choose to assign lease lines to their associated wells. If not, the user must assign them manually in the Targets window.
Surveys Tools: When checked, Well Seeker will import any survey tools associated with the relevant plans and surveys. If unchecked no survey tools will be imported. Note, that if survey tools are not imported, and any of the imported plans and surveys reference a survey tool which is not available on the imported computer, then Well Seeker will use the default error model selected by the user.
Well Plans: This option allows the user to import ALL plans which are contained within a Compass Export file. If this option is not selected, then Well Seeker will only pull in the plans which are selected as PRINCIPAL in the export file. Default is ON.
This option functions the same as Import Compass EDM file above, but also sets the status of all imported wells to ‘upcoming’ in the Daily Reporting window. See Section 13.4– Daily Reporting for more information.
This option functions the same as Import Compass EDM file above but allows the user to import the Compass data under an existing operator in the user’s Well Seeker database, instead of the operator contained in the EDM. After selecting this option, a dialog will appear allowing the user to select the operator they wish to import the Compass data into. After that an Open File dialog will appear allowing the user to select the desired EDM file.
This option functions the same as the Import Compass EDM File option above but allows the user to select multiple Compass .xml files to import at the same time. Note that depending on the number and size of the Compass files being imported, the import process can take a long time to complete.
Exports the users Setup.ini file. This file contains all the Well Seeker settings which the user has on their computer including Chart Defaults, Colum Selections, Font Size etc. The only thing this file does not contain is the unit set the user is referencing at the time of export. The exported file does not need to be named ‘setup.ini’, the user can give it any name for easier identification later. The exported file also contains the Toolbar Layout. Users importing an exported setup file will be asked if they also want to import toolbar information.
Allows the user to import a Setup.ini file. This will allow the user to instantly set up a new computer with the same settings being used on another machine. This import will not change the units the user had selected before the import and it will also not affect the database which they are working in. i.e., it will not cause them to switch databases. The user will also be asked if they want to import Toolbar Layout information. The user can import any .ini file. If Well Seeker does not recognize it as a valid setup file, it will give a warning message. Note that setup files exported from obsolete versions of Well Seeker may not be recognised by the latest version.
Resets the setup file back to its original install settings.
Exports the user’s configuration of the toolbars at the top of the main user interface as a .ini file. See Section 5.1 - Toolbars for more information on Toolbars. Note that the Toolbar Layout is also included in a Setup File export, so exporting the Toolbar Layout is not required if the user is exporting their Setup File at the same time.
Allows the user to import a .ini file containing Toolbar Layout information. This will allow the user to instantly set up a new computer with the same toolbars being used on another machine. The user can import any .ini file. If Well Seeker does not recognize it as a valid toolbar export, it will give a warning message.
Resets the setup file back to its original install settings.
This option is primarily for users who are accessing an SQL database which is receiving data from several rigs. When selected, the database is refreshed every 1 minute to ensure that all new surveys pushed from the rig are updated on the user’s screen and incorporated in the real time Anti-collision dialog.
This option closes Well Seeker.
The tools menu allows the user access to various Well Seeker PRO functions, some of which are only accessible when a survey or plan view is visible. Additionally, some functions are only accessible when logged into a remote database.
The unit sets dialog can be accessed either from the “Tools -> Unit Sets” menu or by the unit sets icon on the main tool bar. The currently loaded unit set is displayed in the status bar as well as in the properties window.
The unit set defines the units which Well Seeker PRO uses to display data. US Feet is the default unit set when Well Seeker is first installed. A unit set is a specifically formatted text file which is stored in the Well Seeker PRO install directory under the unit sets folder. Unit set files can be copied from computer to computer and if they are placed in the unit sets folder will become visible to Well Seeker PRO. By default, Well Seeker PRO comes with four unit set files: API, SI, ND, US and Canadian. When a unit set is selected, it applies to the entire database.
A unit sets file contains fifteen parameters. The first 6 parameters directly relate to the planning, survey and anti-collision portions of the program. The rest of the parameters all relate to the daily reporting and engineering sections:
Depth: Current units for measured depth and TVD. Options are Feet, US Feet and Meters.
Local: Current units for NS, EW and centre to centre distances. Options are Feet, US Feet and Meters.
Geographic: Defines what units the map co-ordinates are displayed in. Options are CRS Default (the unit set defined by the selected CRS), Feet, US Feet and Meters.
Diameter: This defines the units used to display Casing OD and ID as well as hole size. Options are mm and inches.
Dogleg: The current units DLS, BR and TR are displayed in. Options are Deg/100ft (or 30m), Deg/30ft (or 10m) or user defined. If user defined is selected, the parameter column becomes active and the units value becomes degrees per unit length based on the parameter entered.
Survey Calculation Method: This defines which calculation method is used for calculating survey parameters throughout Well Seeker PRO. Options are Minimum Curvature, Radius of Curvature, Tangential and Balanced Tangential. It should be noted that if a method other than minimum curvature is selected the Well Planning tools will not work.
Flow Rate: Current units for flow rate. User can choose between LPM and GPM.
Pressure: Current units for Pressure. User can choose between Bar and psi
Volume: Current units for Volume. User can choose between BBLS and m3
Mud: Current units for Mud Weight. User can choose between PPG, SG, psi/ft3 and lbs/ft3
Weight: Current units for Weight. User can choose between klbs and Tons
Torque: Current units for Torque. User can choose between kftlb and kNm
Temperature: Current units for Temperature. User can choose between degC and degF.
Cost: Current units for Cost. User can choose between $, EUR and GBP.
Jets: Current units for Jet size. User can choose between in2 and mm2.
A new unit set file can be created by clicking the “create new” button and can be edited by clicking the “Edit” button. To save changes, including changing the unit set currently selected, click the “Apply” button.
The geo mag calculator is a standalone tool that performs the following functions:
Convert latitude and longitude to map co-ordinates and vice versa.
Calculate and print magnetic data based on the co-ordinates entered.
Set the default magnetic model used in Ellipse of Uncertainty (EOU) calculations.
Convert between NAD83 and NAD27 co-ordinates.
In order to use the Geomagnetic Calculator a co-ordinate reference system (CRS), also known as a mapping grid, must be selected from the drop-down menu at the top of the dialog. The “Scale factor” box will then display the scale factor of the selected CRS. Clicking on the Mapping Grid button will open the CRS Editor. See section 8.3.1 – CRS Editor.
Co-ordinates can be entered either as a latitude & longitude or as a map co-ordinate. This is defined by selecting the “Grid North / East” or “Lat / Long” radio button. The grid convergence is displayed in the edit box marked “grid convergence”. This value will be applied when converting between grid north and true north.
Once a CRS has been selected and co-ordinates have been entered, the user can display the location on a map using the Show Map button. Note that this map is generated using Google Maps, which will likely not be using the same CRS as the one selected by the user. This means that the location plotted on the map will not be completely accurate.
Magnetics data can be calculated for the co-ordinates entered by selecting a date and entering an altitude in the “location data” section.
It should be noted that the date selected must be within range of the geo-magnetic model selected or an error will be displayed.
To select the geomagnetic model, open the drop-down menu next to the model edit box and all the models which are currently in the install directory “Magnetics” folder will be displayed.
Well Seeker PRO comes as standard with the IGRF and WMM magnetic models, however it also supports HDGM, BGGM and mvHD magnetic models. To use BGGM, copy the BGGMXXXX.dat file into the magnetics directory and make sure there is a copy of bggm32_v3_8.dll in the magnetics directory. For HDGM models simply paste the hdgmxxxx.dll into the magnetics directory.
If the Geo Mag converter dialog is open and a new model is added to the magnetics folder, the dialog will have to be closed and reopened before Well Seeker PRO can see it.
It should be noted that world magnetic model .COF files must start with “WMM” as the first three letters of the filename, IGRF files must start with “IGRF”, BGGM must start with “BGG” and HDGM must start with “HDGM”.
Once the date and model have been selected, the magnetic data will be displayed. The user can export their magnetic data to either PDF or Excel format using the Print button. The Set as Default button will set the selected magnetic model as the default model when creating a new Actual or Planned Well.
The NAD83 / NAD27 Conversion section can be used to convert map co-ordinates & latitude/longitudes plotted on a NAD83 Datum CRS to their equivalent in a NAD27 Datum CRS, and vice versa. Note: An internet connection is required for this function to work.
To perform a conversion, the user should select a CRS in the Projection details that uses a NAD83 or NAD27 Datum. Then enter their co-ordinates into the Location data section and click on the Convert button. The converted nothing, easting, latitude, and longitude results will then be displayed in the results boxes. If there is an error with the conversion, then a message will be displayed in the “Errors” box.
The survey tool editor is used to create, view and edit Well Seeker PRO .ipm (Instrument Performance Model) files, which are used to calculate Ellipse of Uncertainty (EOU).
The available IPMs are listed on the left of the window and can be filtered using the Search box at the top of the list. The default IPM is highlighted in green. Clicking on an IPM in the list will select it and display its error terms in the main window.
IPMs can be manipulated using the toolbar at the top of the window:
Save IPM: Saves any changes made to the currently selected IPM.
Add new IPM: Creates a new blank IPM.
Delete IPM: Deletes the currently selected IPM.
Edit IPM: Allows the currently selected IPM to be edited. Any changes made should be saved using the Save IPM option.
Open IPM folder: Opens the IPM folder on the user’s computer where the .ipm files are stored. Error models can be added to Well Seeker PRO by putting the .ipm file in to the IPM folder in the Well Seeker PRO install directory. Anything in the file with a # preceding it will be ignored by Well Seeker PRO.
Select IPM: Only available if the Survey Tool Editor is accessed from the plan properties dialog of a Well Plan, or the Survey Properties dialog of a survey. Clicking on this option will set the currently selected IPM as the error model for the plan.
When an IPM is selected its error terms are displayed in the main window. Well Seeker PRO uses the ISCWSA mathematical framework for all EOU calculations, and each line in the .ipm file contains a coefficient which has 8 properties.
Name: The name used to identify the coefficient, it should be noted that as per the ISCWSA framework, certain error terms are singular in vertical hole. Well Seeker PRO accounts for these terms, however they must be named correctly in order for it to do this. The terms which are singular should be named as follows: abx, abix, aby, abiy, mxy3, mxy4, abxy_ti2, abixy_ti2, xym3, xym4, cna.
Vector: The vector defines which direction the error term applies; possible options are:
a – Azimuth
i - Inclination
l – Lateral (equivalent to 1/sin(Inc))
b – Bias term
e – Depth
f - Depth Bias
n – Intermediate calculation term
m – Wolfe and DeWardt misalignment term
Tie – On: Describes what type the error source is and how it is summed together.
s – Systematic, correlated within a survey file
r – random, never correlated
g – Global, correlated between survey files, and wells
b – bias, correlated within a survey file
n – intermediate calculation step
m – Wolfe and DeWardt misalignment term
Unit: The units used for 1 sigma value of the error term
- No units
d – Degrees
m – Meters
im – Inverse Meters
nt – Nano Teslas
dnt – Degree Nano Teslas
Value: The value of the error term at 1 sigma (1 standard deviation)
Weighting Function: This is the mathematical formula used to describe the error term using generalised variables. The formula is parsed much like in MS Excel and uses all normal operators such as * / () ^. The variables which are supported in Well Seeker PRO are:
Inc – Inclination
Azi – Azimuth referenced to whatever is defined at field level
Tfo – Tool Face
Mtot – Total magnetic Field
Dip – Dip Angle
Gtot – Total gravity
Erot – Earths horizontal rotation speed in rads/s
Tmd – Total measured depth
Tvd – True vertical depth
Azt – Azimuth referenced to True North
Azm – Azimuth referenced to magnetic north
Lat – Latitude
Din – Delta Inc
Smd – Delta Measured Depth
Min Inc: Minimum inclination for the weighting function to be evaluated, generally only used for gyro models.
Max Inc – Maximum inclination at which the weighing function to be evaluated, generally only used for gyro models.
Above the main window is some extra information and options.
Survey tool name: The name of the currently selected IPM.
Description: The user can add a more detailed description of the selected IPM if they wish.
Default IPM: Displays the name of the current Default Survey Tool/IPM.
Create diagnostic file: Toggling this check box, will produce a diagnostic file every time the error model is run and be placed in the Debug folder in the Well Seeker PRO install directory. It should be noted that this option will vastly increase the calculation time required for anti-collision scans and error ellipse reports.
Default survey tool: Toggling this check box sets the currently selected IPM as the default IPM. Its name will be displayed in the Default IPM box above and will be highlighted in green in the list. If a survey or plan has no IPM specified, or Well Seeker cannot find the file for the specified IPM, it will use the default IPM. This is “ZERO_ERROR.ipm” by default.
Inclination Only wells display vertical: Toggling this checkbox defines how Well Seeker handles surveys with an inclination only IPM assigned. Well Seeker will recognise an IPM as inclination-only if it has any of the following names. These names are not case sensitive:
INC_ONLY
INC-ONLY
Inclination Only
Inclination-Only
Inclination_Only
If ‘Inclination Only wells display vertical’ is turned on and an Inclination-Only IPM has been recognized, the following will happen:
The inclination values in the survey will be used to calculate the Ellipse of Uncertainty (EOU) in the error model.
The well will be plotted and assumed to be completely vertical. No azimuth or inclination values will be used to calculate position data.
If an Inclination-Only survey is found with a non-Inclination-Only tool tied on below it the whole well will display as vertical. This including the non-Inclination-Only section.
If an Inclination-Only survey is found below a non-Inclination-Only only tool, the portion of the well above the Inclination-Only tool will plot as normal but all Inclination-Only surveys and anything below them will plot as vertical.
Turning OFF ‘Inclination Only wells display vertical’ will stop all the above behaviour and Inclination-Only wells will plot using the inclination and azimuth data provided in the survey grid.
The default value for the ‘Inclination Only wells display vertical’ option is ON, so by default any Inclination-Only surveys will be treated as above. This value is saved within the setup file, so if the user turns this option OFF, Well Seeker will remember this choice.
The interpolate dialog is available if there is an active survey or plan view open, and it allows the user to interpolate the survey listing for both MD, inclination and TVD.
Type the desired value into either the MD, Inc or TVD cell in the grid and the line will be populated with the interpolated values. Should the value entered be out of range, then -999 will be displayed in all cells. The results can be exported to either a text file or Excel file by clicking the Export Data button in the toolbar.
Show interpolated listing: When selected, the greyed-out buttons along the top of the dialog become available to manipulate. The user then has the option to enter the following data:
Interval: The required interval which the plan or survey will be interpolated e.g. 100 will generate an interpolated line every 100ft or m.
Start Depth: The start depth of the interpolation
End Depth: The end depth of the interpolation
Include Stations: Includes the plan lines or survey stations in the interpolated listing
Include Final Station: Includes the final station in the interpolated listing
Bit Projection Only: If a projection has been added to a survey listing via either the Project Ahead or Multi Project tools, then the user can select this option to interpolate the projection only.
Calculate: Generates the interpolated listing
The Create Target button in the toolbar can be used to create a point target from an interpolated position. The user should select the row number of the listing they would like to turn into a target and then click on the ‘Create Target’ button. Enter a name in the dialog box and click OK. The target will be created and assigned to the Actual Well/Plan for the active survey/plan, and can be edited in the Targets window.
The anti-collision settings dialog allows the user to specify the details used when creating anti-collision reports and generating travelling cylinder, separation factor or ladder plots.
The Interpolate section only affects the Travelling Cylinder, Ladder and Separation Factor Plots. If the “interval” check is selected, the reference well will be interpolated at the interval specified, and AC scans against offsets will be performed at these interpolated points. The “depth from” check box allows the user to specify a depth range to scan. The “include final station” and “include stations” options define whether actual survey stations are included in the interpolation and whether a final station is included at the end.
The Limit Anti-Collision Results section allows the user to define maximum values at which AC results will be displayed. It should be noted that these settings are global and do not change regardless of which well / wells are being scanned against and as such they should be checked before performing any anti-collision scan so that potential collisions are not missed.
Any selections made here will be saved and applied to any AC scans run while the program is open. When the program is closed, upon reopening, these selections will be reset.
The AC results section of this dialog allows the user to select the following (note that these 2 options are defaults and once selected these will be remembered by the program and will NOT reset when the program is closed and reopened):
Sort AC Summary: User can choose from the following: No sort, C-C, ES and SF. This determines the way the AC summary in the AC report is displayed. Choosing C-C, ES or SF will order the summary with the smallest relevant value at the top and the largest at the bottom. No sort will keep the summary for each offset well together. See figures below.
Default TC: Choose the default Traveling Cylinder Plot reference. User can choose between North and High Side.
The Directional Difficulty Index, (DDI), provides a first pass evaluation of the relative difficulty expected when drilling a directional well.
DDI is one of the metrics by which directional drilling performance can be measured. By plotting the planned DDI against the actual DDI, the separation between the two can be used as a metric for directional drilling performance. The smaller the difference the better the directional drilling performance, (it should be noted this is not applicable to wells which are modified while drilling or wells that are geo-steered).
The DDI has also proved useful in other areas of planning. It allows various proposed well paths targeting the same reserves to be ranked in terms of their directional complexity. This is particularly useful in mature assets where a number of candidate wells may be available as side tracking options. By ranking these options, unsuitable host wells may be eliminated. It also ensures that the most cost-effective option from a directional drilling viewpoint is known. This can then be weighed against other influencing factors allowing the most suitable host well to be selected.
For more details relating to this feature refer to IADC/SPE 59196 (The Directional Difficulty Index - A New Approach to Performance Benchmarking)
The offset selector is available if an active survey or plan view is open. It allows the user to select any offset wells which are to be displayed in any of the plots or used in anti-collision scans. Only wells referenced to the same CRS are available to select here.
The offset selector dialog displays a tree which will represent all the selectable wells. This is represented in the same way as the database structure on the main user interface. The Expand and Collapse buttons at the bottom of the dialog affect the offset selector tree and allow the user to quickly access all the surveys and plans without expanding each level individually.
The filter at the bottom of the dialog allows the user to select the following filter options:
Include Surveys: The Actual Wellbore is always available to select; however, this option also allows the user to select individual surveys below the actual wellbore level.
Include Non-Principal Plans: When this option is selected the user can choose to offset any non-principal plans. This option is turned on as a default.
Include Plans: When this option is selected the user can choose to offset any principal plans. This option is turned on as a default.
If any of the filters are removed, the user can click on the Update button to automatically deselect any applicable surveys or plans.
Global Scan is another filtering method which allows the user to select a radius from the reference well surface location. Any offset wells within this radius will be automatically selected when the user clicks Select.
In addition to the individual Plan View, Section View and 3D View plots, Well Seeker also has a Wall Plot Composer (WPC), where different plots along with data tables can be displayed together.
As with the individual plots, the WPC option only becomes available when the user is in a plan, survey, planned wellbore or actual wellbore.
Once open, the user can build the wall plot by inserting the desired Charts and Tables. This can be done via the Insert menu at the top of the page, or by right clicking anywhere on the plot. Certain Charts and Tables can also be inserted from the tool bar along the top of the screen. Once inserted, a chart or table can be moved around the page by clicking and dragging.
See below for a definition of each item on the toolbar:
In the File option at the top left of the WPC screen, the user can select to Save or Open an existing wall plot composer template. These templates are saved as .wpc files and allow the user to save the template they are working on and come back to it later.
When a chart is inserted into the WPC, its size can be manipulated by clicking on it and then dragging the outer edges. Manipulating the chart size changes the scale along with the minimum and maximum X & Y Axis values. This is reflected in the Chart Properties Dialog.
If the user selects to fix the scale, by checking the Fixed Scale box, they will no longer be able to manually manipulate the physical size of the chart. It will be fixed and can only be changed by unchecking the Fixed Scale option.
When dealing with an inserted table, the size and shape of the table can be manipulated by clicking and dragging the outer edge. Once the user is happy with the relative size and position of the table, they can select the Reset Table Aspect Ratio option from the top tool bar, which will adjust the selected table to give it a balanced aspect ratio.
Once a wall plot has been populated, it is possible to move charts and tables forward and back on the page in relation to each other. This allows the user to manipulate the layout to ensure smaller items are kept visible at the front while larger items are pushed to the back. This is achieved by right clicking on any chart or table when in the WPC and selecting either “Bring to Front” or “Send to Back” from the context menu.
For more details regarding the Context Menu, see Section 6.8 – Context Menu.
New: Creates a new WPC project.
Open: Opens an existing WPC project.
Save: Saves the WPC project the user is currently working in.
Save As: Save as function for saving the current WPC project.
Print: Opens the print dialog, where the user can send the current WPC project to a printer or can save the plot as a pdf.
Page Setup: allows the user to select the desired page size and layout. Nine predefined sizes are available from the drop-down menu, including user defined.
Exit: Closes the WPC
New Chart: Allows the user to insert any one of 10 available charts.
New Table: Allows the user to insert any one of 18 available tables.
Insert North Reference: Inserts the North reference data.
Insert Logo: Inserts the primary logo assigned at operator level.
Insert Text Box: Inserts a box in which custom text can be entered. Text can be edited by right clicking on the box and selecting Enter Text, and the background colour can be edited by right clicking and selecting Select Background Colour. Text box aspect ratios can be reset using the Reset Table Aspect Ratio option from the top tool bar.
Chart Properties: Once a plot has been inserted into the WPC, the user can then open the Chart Properties, which is where most of the chart functionality is located, and allows the user to add labels, change colours and customise the plot. The chart properties dialog is available to all plots and is described in more detail in section 6.6 – Plots Menu.
Offset Selector: The offset selector in the WPC works in the same way as it does on the main Well Seeker menu. It is however completely independent, which means that offset wells selected in the main menu will have to be reselected when in the WPC.
Offsets On/Off: When in a plot, this option turns the offset plans and surveys on and off.
Error Ellipses On/Off: When in a plot, this option turns the error ellipses on and off.
Chart Titles On / Off: When in a plot, this option turns the chart title on and off.
Select Image: When a logo has been inserted, the user can click on it and choose select image. This allows the user to select any .bmp image to be used in place of the logo. This option will be greyed out unless the user has a logo selected.
Reset Chart: When the user selects any chart in the WPC, they can then select this option and it will reset the chart to how it appeared originally when it was first inserted.
Object Border On/Off: This allows the user to add a border around any individual chart. The user must select the relevant chart before they select this option.
Select Table Data: When a data table is inserted in the WPC and selected, choosing this option opens the select data dialog. This allows the user to select which data they want to show on the table. Note that the data included in the tables is fixed. The user can choose which of this data they want to display, but they are not able to choose any different data not initially displayed in the table. Note that this dialog can also be accessed by double left clicking on a table.
Chart Properties Default: This option allows the user to select default settings for any charts that are inserted into the WPC. The user can create several different defaults and switch between these when pulling in different charts.
Show Gridlines: Shows gridlines on the main WPC page.
Show Ruler: Displays a ruler at the top and left of the screen.
Show Ruler Numbers: Includes numbers on the ruler.
Show Margins: Shows the margins on the main WPC page.
Show Page Border: Adds a border to the outside edges of the page.
Reset Logo Aspect Ratio – Resizes the selected logo to give it a balanced aspect ratio.
Reset Table Aspect Ratio: Adjusts the selected table to give it a balanced aspect ratio.
Zoom: Gives the user various options for zooming in and out of the WPC.
Align Left: Select a chart/table, select Align Left and then click on another chart/table. The selected chart/table will align itself so that the left side of both items is aligned.
Align Right: Select a chart/table, select Align Right and then click on another chart/table. The selected chart/table will align itself so that the right side of both items is aligned.
Align Top: Select a chart/table, select Align Top and then click on another chart/table. The selected chart/table will align itself so that the top of both items is aligned.
Align Bottom: Select a chart/table, select Align Bottom and then click on another chart/table. The selected chart/table will align itself so that the bottom of both items is aligned.
Opens the Slide Sheet. For more information see section 13.10 – Slide Sheet. This option is only available when a survey is open in the main interface.
The Projection Tools submenu contains a number of tools that allow the user to project ahead of the currently active survey sheet.
The Multi Nudge Projection tool allows the user to quickly project ahead using additional features which are not available in the standard Project Ahead section of Well Seeker. More importantly, it allows an unlimited number of projection lines to be included.
As with the Project Ahead tool, it is important to note that the Multi Nudge Projection tool is only available when the user is in a Survey. If the user is in a Plan, or the Actual Wellbore, this option will be greyed out and they will be unable to select it.
When the tool first opens, the tie-On line will be populated with the last survey in the listing. If there are any projections already in the survey table, they will be ignored. At this point the user can then select from 1 of 5 projection Methods, which are described in more detail below.
The Multi Nudge Projection box can be left open while the user is adding new surveys, and the tie-on line can be updated by selecting the Update Tie On button. Note, that the surveys do not need to be saved for this to happen.
If the box is closed and then reopened, it will automatically tie onto the last survey point. The projection setup will remain populated with whatever setup the user had selected previously, even when the program has been closed and reopened. To remove the input projections, the user can delete the lines one at a time or select Remove from Survey, which will remove all of the Multi Nudge Projection and Landing Data projections from the survey table.
Projections can be added to the survey by selecting Append to Survey.
CL/DLS/TFO - This option allows the user to select Course Length (CL), Dogleg (DLS) and Toolface Orientation (TFO) to calculate the projection. This method assumes a 100% slide. Motor Yield will be automatically populated with the same value input in the DLS column.
CL/Slide (%)/TFO - This option allows the user to select Course Length (CL), Slide Percentage (%) and Toolface Orientation (TFO) to calculate the projection. The user is also required to add the Motor Yield, as the projected dogleg is calculated based on the slide (%) and the Motor Yield.
CL/Slide (Dist)/TFO - This option allows the user to select Course Length (CL), Slide Distance (Dist) and Toolface Orientation (TFO) to calculate the projection. The user is also required to add the Motor Yield, as the projected dogleg is calculated based on the slide (Dist) and the Motor Yield.
INC/AZI/DLS - This option allows the user to select Inclination (Inc), Azimuth (Azi) and Dogleg (DLS) to calculate the projection. This method assumes a 100% slide. Motor Yield will be automatically populated with the same value input in the DLS column.
Hold CL - This option allows the user to select Course Length (CL). The inclination and azimuth from the tie-on line will be held for the selected distance.
The user can set up the Multi Nudge Projection with as many lines as required.
Landing Data: This section of the Multi Nudge Projection allows the user to project to a landing point and is most useful when landing out a horizontal lateral and functions in a similar way to the Dogleg Toolface Point planning method. The position of the bit in the Bit row is populated from the last projection in the Multi Nudge section above. Data in the survey table is ignored.
Entering a Landing Point MD
The MD entered relates to the MD on the principal plan. In the below example, the survey is on the left and the corresponding principal plan is on the right. The Multi Nudge dialog is open at the front.
The MD of the curve landing point (7127.21USft MD) has been entered and the TVD, NS and EW coordinates in the projection match the plan at this depth. The program is effectively calculating a constant dogleg and toolface from the Bit line to this EXACT point. The final landing point can be automatically populated by selecting the Find Landing radio button.
In some cases, it may be important to land out exactly at the same point as the plan. If this is the case, then this is the most suitable option.
It is worth noting that the plan is open here for demonstration purposes. It does not need to be open for this to work.
Adjust TVD
Selecting the adjust TVD, allows the user to change the TVD of the point selected in the above. The MD stays unchanged as this is what the program is using to determine the local coordinates of the landing point.
Note in the above how the locals are still the same in the landing point line, but because the TVD has been shifted deeper, the DLS and the inc have changed. The program is still aiming for a specific point here, only with an adjusted TVD.
Adjust Inc / Azi
This option is only available when Adjust TVD is selected. This allows the user to enter an inc, azi and TVD to project to. The main difference with this selection compared to the previous options is that the user is not projecting to a specific point i.e., the local coordinates are not fixed.
In the above, the inc, azi and TVD are entered for the planned curve landing point. This setup tells the user what dogleg is required to land out at horizontal for a given TVD. When new surveys are added, the bit line updates automatically and so does the landing point line.
NOTE: When this dialog is first opened, there is no requirement to enter a MD. It is possible to just select Adjust TVD and Adjust inc / azi and input the values. There is no need to add a MD unless the user specifically wants to hit an exact point.
When the user clicks on Append to Survey in the Landing Data section, it will add both the landing projection and any projections from the Multi Nudge section above to the survey listing.
The project ahead dialog is only available when the user is in a Survey. If the user is in a Plan, or the Actual Wellbore, this option will be greyed out and will not be available to select. It provides access to a range of Well Seeker PRO directional planning tools to allow the user to project ahead from the last survey point.
One additional tool which is only available in the Project Ahead box and is not displayed in the planning tools when in a well plan is the Trend Over tool. This function allows the user to apply the build and turn trends seen in the previous surveys to the projection.
To select the Trend Over function, the user must select Adjust and then either MD or CL. This function will remain greyed out until these options have been selected. The tool works by averaging out the Build and Turn rates based on the number of surveys selected.
The projection tools always use the last survey on the active survey grid as the starting point for any projection. Any time a new survey is added, this will be automatically updated in the project ahead dialog. The planning tools are described in more detail in the planning section of this manual.
It should be noted that any projections appended to a survey file cannot be edited in the grid and must be deleted before any new surveys can be added to the survey file. Projections can be deleted manually via the survey dialog once the projection dialog has been closed or can be removed by selecting “Remove from Survey”.
If Stack Projections is checked on, then Add to survey will not overwrite any previously added projections and the projection will be added to the survey list as a new line. If it is turned off then “Add to survey” will overwrite any projections that were previously added to the survey.
Refer to the “Well Seeker PRO - Project Ahead Guide” for more details on this feature.
The Dashboards submenu contains tools designed to help the user monitor the wells in their database. It contains the Real Time Anti-Collision warnings tool if accessed whilst a survey or plan is open.
The Real Time Anti-Collision tool allows the user to monitor the proximity of offset wells in real time while drilling and will alert the user if the selected anti-collision warning levels are breached. It can also be used to monitor the deviation of the wellbore from its well plan and alert the user if the trajectory of the well strays beyond a specified distance from the plan. Finally, it can be used to monitor the distance between the well and the edge of the lease.
The Real Time Anti-Collision Tool can only be run when viewing a survey. Each offset well needs to be created in Well Seeker as a planned well, actual well or survey list, and then selected using the Offset Selector tool. The Offset selector tool can be found in the Tools Menu or on the main toolbar. These offset wells must have an error model assigned to allow calculation of Separation Factors.
The well plan referenced in the RT AC dialog is whichever plan is selected as the Principal Plan for that well. To set a plan as the principal plan, right-click on the well plan at the plan level and select ‘properties.’ In the Plan Properties window check the ‘Set as principal plan’ checkbox. Any lease lines that are assigned to the well in the Targets window will also be included in the results.
Warning Levels: Allows the user to specify the relevant warning levels. If one of these thresholds is violated, then the offending result will be highlighted in red and an error message will appear in the warnings column.
Sorting: Allows the user to sort the Anti-Collision Results. Three options are available: None, C2C and SF.
Point of Interest: This section displays the last survey in the survey listing. All results in the anti-collision results window are referenced to this point. This point is updated automatically when a new survey or projection is added to the survey listing.
Anti-Collision Results: This section lists the principal plan, offset wells and lease lines, along with their centre to centre (C2C) distance from the point of interest. If the Calculate Separation Factor checkbox is ticked the results section will also show the Ellipse Separation (ES), Reference Ellipse semi-major radius, Offset Ellipse semi-major radius, Separation Factor (SF), High Side Gravity Toolface (TFO HS) and North Referenced Magnetic Toolface (TFO NORTH). The toolfaces displayed are the toolfaces from the reference well point of interest to the closest point of the offset well in question.
File Menu:
Open RT AC Email: Allows the user to generate an anti-collision update email, which can be configured using settings in the Options menu. The email body contains the last recorded survey and/or bit projection, along with its anti-collision output for the principal plan, offset wells and lease lines. The email will also have a full Survey Report and Anti-Collision Report attached.
Note that these reports use the template that is at the top of the list in the Survey Reports Manager and the Anti-Collision Reports Manager. The user should rename the template that they want to use so that it is first alphabetically. See section 6.5 – Reports Menu for more information on the reports manager.
Exit: Closes the RT AC window.
Options Menu:
Open Email: If this option is toggled on, selecting Open RT AC Email in the File menu will generate an email in Microsoft Outlook, with the Survey Report and Anti-Collision Report attached. If toggled off, selecting Open RT AC Email in the File menu will open an html file in the user’s default browser containing the email body.
Bit Projection on Last Line: Signifies that the last line in the survey tab of the reference well is a bit projection instead of a proper survey. If toggled on, the RT AC Email will list the second to last survey as the final survey, and the last survey as a bit projection.
Include Survey Report: Allows the user to select the format of the Survey Report attached to the RT AC Email. The user can choose between Excel, PDF or Text.
Include Anti-Collision Report: Allows the user to select the format of the Anti-Collision Report attached to the RT AC Email. The user can choose between Excel or PDF.
Straight Line Projections: Allows the user to add one or more projections to the Survey Information section of the RT AC Email. Projections will use the inclination and azimuth of the last line in the survey tab of the reference well.
The Activity Dashboard allows the user to monitor the status of all wells (aka ‘jobs’) in the current database, as well as the status of personnel. It is populated using Reporting Data. See Section 13.0 – Reporting for more information. The Activity Dashboard can be left open or minimized whilst working in other sections of Well Seeker.
When first opened the Activity Dashboard will display the Summary page. This page can be returned to at any time by opening the View menu and selecting Show Summary. The page is split into three charts:
Job Summary by Customer (left) – Displays the number of wells in the database for each operator and their status. The status of a well is set in the latest Daily Report for that well. See Section 13.4.7.1 – DDR Report Selection for information on setting the status.
Job Summary by Coordinator (top right) – Displays the number of wells, along with their status, that have been assigned to each DD Coordinator in the database. The user can change this chart to show the wells assigned to each MWD Coordinator by opening the View menu and selecting Filter by MWD Coordinator. The coordinators are set in the latest Daily Report for that well. See Section 13.4.7.1 – DDR Report Selectionfor information on setting the coordinators.
Job Summary by State (bottom right) – Displays the number of wells, and their status, in each US state. The state that a well is drilling in is defined in the Well Data and Personnel section of the latest Daily Report for that well. See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel for information on setting the state.
Below the Summary charts is the Jobs Grid. This is a list of all wells in the database that can be filtered using the dropdown boxes at the top of the grid. Well information for these filters is defined in the Well Data and Personnel section of the latest Daily Report for that well, except for the Operator, which is defined in the Database Tree.
Selecting a well in the Jobs Grid will cause the Summary page to change to the Well Details for that well. When viewing the Summary page, the details for the last well selected can be opened by opening the View menu and selecting Show Well Details.
The Well Details page is split into four charts:
Days vs Depth (top left): Displays the Days vs Depth KPI chart from the Daily Report. This chart is constructed from the daily activities section of the daily report. The colour of the chart can be altered by opening the View menu and selecting Colour by Phase, Colour by BHA or Colour by Activity.
Well Information (bottom left): Displays some general well information from the Daily Report and surveys.
Revenue Tracking (top right): Displays the daily revenue of the selected well. This chart is generated using the daily costs in the Daily Report. See Section 13.4.10 – Daily Costs for more information.
Inventory (bottom right): Displays the number of different types of equipment in the well inventory. This chart is generated using the Tool Inventory. See Section 13.6 – Tool Inventory for more information.
All charts can be customised and exported by right clicking on them to open the Context Menu. See Section 6.8 – Context Menu for more information. In addition to the charts and the jobs grid, there are also some menu items at the top of the screen:
File Menu:
Print Job Board: Prints an Excel document that lists all active, upcoming and on standby wells. Also summarises the revenue and daily revenue for any current wells. The date range for the revenue and daily revenue can be changed in the Revenue Forecast menu.
Print Motor Overview: Prints an Excel document that contains a summary of the number of motors that are currently at each well. For each well there is also a breakdown of the motors on stie by serial number, description, size and status.
Open Selected Well in Tree: Opens the currently selected well in the Database Tree.
Exit: Closes the Activity Dashboard.
View Menu:
Show Summary: Forces the charts to display the summary charts.
Show Well Details: Forces the charts to display the well details of the last well selected.
Show Grid: Toggles the jobs grid on/off.
Show Charts: Toggles the charts on/off.
Colour by Phase/BHA/Activity: Changes the colour and legend of the Depth vs Time chart.
Filter by MWD Coordinator: Toggling this option on changes the Job Summary by Coordinator chart to split jobs by MWD Coordinator instead of Directional Coordinator.
Refresh Data: If any changes are made to the database while the Activity Dashboard is open, the user can use the Refresh Data menu item to apply them to the Dashboard.
Revenue Forecast Menu:
Calendar Month/Last 30 Days/60 Days/90 Days: Changes the date range for the revenue and daily revenue pages in the Jobs Board Report.
The Logistics Dashboard searches all the well inventories in the database and displays all tools which are listed in these inventories. Note that if the On Location box is not checked, the tool will not show up in this dialog.
The filter allows the user to quickly search the available inventory based on Well Status, Tool Type, Tool Status, State and County.
The interactive map at the top left of the dialog displays whatever tools are listed in the table at the bottom of the dialog. Left clicking on any pin in the map will open a window, listing the tools at that location. The window will detail the following for each tool: Serial Number, Description, Tool Type and Status.
The chart at the top right of the dialog shows the number of tools in the inventory at each rig in the database and splits them up by tool type. The chart can be customised and exported by right clicking to open the Context Menu. See Section 6.8 – Context Menu for more information.
The Reset Map button will reset the map to the default position if it has been moved or zoomed in. The Logistics Dashboard can be left open whilst working on other parts of the database. If any changes are made to the database, the user can click the Refresh Data button to update the table.
This option shows the user which wells are currently performing real time data exchange with the SQL server database.
The dialog will only populate when:
The user is accessing an SQL remote database.
At least one additional computer is setup to perform real time data exchange.
If opened while accessing a local database, the dialog will be blank.
In addition to the table, the File Menu is available with the following options:
Show WITS Connections: Any wells that are sending WITS data via the Send Data to Server option in WITS Reader will also be displayed on the Rigs Online Dashboard. If this option is toggled off only wells sent via the Real Time Data Exchange will show up. See section 13.10.7 – Serial/TCP WITS Data Reader for more information on the WITS Reader.
Print Daily Summary: Prints a PDF report that includes the Rigs Online table, as well as the 24hr Summary and 24hr Lookahead for each well.
Exit: Closes the Activity Dashboard.
In Well Seeker, it is possible to have multiple RT AC dialogs open at the same time. In a real-time operations center for example, one user may be monitoring multiple different rigs at any one time. In these situations, the AC Dashboard is designed to help the user monitor these wells as follows:
Two lines will be displayed in the dashboard for each RT AC dialog which is open.
One line will show the details of the offset well with the lowest Centre to Centre distance.
One line will show the details of the offset well with the lowest SF, so long as “Calculate Separation Factor” is turned on in the RT AC dialog.
If any of these values trigger a warning, based on the individual warning levels selected in each RT AC dialog, then the line will be highlighted in red.
Any item which is not an Offset i.e. it does not say offset in the first column of the RT AC dialog, like the principal well plan and targets, will be ignored.
The user can configure the visible columns shown in the AC Dashboard using the Show Hide menu. Additionally, in the File menu, the user has access to the Open RT AC for Active Wells option:
The Open RT AC for Active Wells option allows the user to open multiple RT AC dialogs simultaneously from the AC Dashboard. The Select Wells window will display all wells that are currently set to active in their Daily Report. See Section 13.4.7.1 – DDR Report Selection, for more information on setting the status of a well. The user can toggle wells on or off using the Select column and then click on the Ok button. This will open an RT AC dialog for each selected well.
The user can also check the Update Offset Selection option which unlocks the other options in the Offset Well Selection. Activating these options and then selecting Ok will override the offset selection for the selected wells.
Include Non-Principal Plans: Any plans that are under the same well for each selected actual well in the list will be added to the RT AC offsets for those wells.
Include Principal Plans: Adds the principal plan for each selected well to their RT AC offsets.
Include Actual Wellbore: User should enter a distance in the “Distance from well” box. Any actual wellbores within this distance from the selected wells will be added to their RT AC offsets.
Opens the Tool Orders dialog. The Tool Order dialog allows the user to create tool requests for upcoming jobs and monitor the status of the order to ensure all required tools are ready when the job starts. For more information on the Tool Order dialog, see section 13.21 – Tool Orders.
The Tool Orders dialog is only accessible from the Tools > Dashboards submenu when logged into a remote server. When in a local database, the user can access the Tool Orders dialog via the Tool Inventory window (see section 13.6 – Tool Inventory).
The Incident Dashboard is only accessible from the Tools > Dashboards submenu when logged into a remote server. The dashboard allows the user to review all BHA failures that have occurred over the previous twelve months.
The top half of the window is split into three charts. All of these charts show incidents that have occurred over the last twelve months:
Incident Overview – Displays the total number of BHA failures and the months that they occurred, coloured by the type of tool that failed. BHAs that have had the Motor Failed, MWD Failed or RSS Failed boxes checked in their respect performance reports will be marked on this chart. The month on which they are marked is set by the Date Out date in the performance report. The chart also displays the number of open and closed failure investigations. A BHA is marked as closed if the Closed checkbox in the Failure Information section of the performance report is checked.
Motor Vendor – Displays the total number of motor failures and the months that they occurred, coloured by the motor make. The motor make is set by the Make field in the component properties of the motor in the Drill String Editor.
MWD Type – Displays the total number of MWD failures and the months that they occurred, coloured by the MWD type. The MWD type is set by the MWD Type drop-down box in the main Daily Reports window.
The bottom half of the window contains the incidents grid. This is a list of all BHAs that have had the Motor Failed, MWD Failed or RSS Failed boxes checked in their respect performance reports. The list contains all such BHAs in the database, and is not restricted to occurrences within the last twelve months like the charts. The list can be filtered using the drop-down boxes and the Job # search box at the top of the grid.
Selecting a well in the grid will replace the Incident Overview chart with a listing of the components in the BHA. The user can then use the Open Selected Well in Tree command in the File menu to open the well or return the Incident Overview chart by selecting Show Summary in the View menu.
The admin tools submenu contains tools that can aid the user in managing both local and remote databases.
The database tree search dialog allows the user to quickly search the database to find the relevant well they are looking for.
Search / Select Job Number: Allows the user to search the database using the assigned job number. The job number can be found in the Well Data & Personnel section of the Daily Report. Job number can be entered manually or selected from the drop-down list which will display all the available job numbers in the database.
Select Actual Well: Allows the user to search the database using the actual well name. Well Name can be entered manually or selected from the drop-down list which will display all the available well names in the database.
Date Range: Allows the user to search for wells that have daily reports falling within the chosen date range.
Search Job Status: Allows the user to search the database using the assigned Job Status. The job Status can be found at the top right of the main dialog in the Daily Report. Job Status can only be selected from the drop-down list which has options: N/A, Active, Standby, TD & Complete. The user can also search the assigned DD or MWD Coordinator by checking the Coordinator checkbox and selecting from the second dropdown list. The coordinators are set in the Well Data & Personnel section of the Daily Report.
Search Results Table: Once a search parameter has been entered and search has been selected, any results will populate in the search results table. The user can then select the desired line in the table and hit select. This will close the search dialog and expand the relevant Operator in the database tree, down to the well level.
Search Rig Name: Allows the user to search the database by rig name. The user can enter a rig name into the search box or select from the dropdown list. Rig names are set in the Well Data & Personnel section of the Daily Report.
Select: Clicking on a row and then clicking on the Select button will open the selected well in the Database Tree.
Export Cost Data: Exports the total daily cost data for all currently found wells to an Excel document.
The Clean Database tool will fix any errors in the database due to missing records and data corruption. When run, this tool will do the following:
Check to see if child tables associated with plans / actuals and surveys exist and remove any orphaned tables not associated with any wells.
Checks and removes duplicate records.
Checks and removes daily report records no longer associated with any wells.
Checks that a survey program references wells / surveys which still exist.
Checks and adds in a default depth datum for all wells.
Checks the depth datum for a plan / actual exists and is assigned.
Checks to see if any Instrument Performance Models (IPM’s) which are referenced exist in the IPM folder.
Note, that it is important to back up the database before this tool is run, as some of the changes made are not reversible. The below warning message will be displayed any time the user chooses to run this tool.
This tool allows the user to check if there are any ‘space’ characters at the start or end of any names in the Database Tree. Upon opening the tool, the grid will be populated with any names with spaces at the start or end. The Level column informs the user where in the database tree each name has been found. If there are many names found, the Search box can be used to filter out all but the desired name.
If the user checks the checkbox in the Repair column beside a name and clicks OK, Well Seeker will remove the spaces from the names in the database tree. The user can use the Check All and Un-check All buttons to check or uncheck the whole of the Repair column.
This tool works in a similar way to the Check Names for Whitespace tool. It checks for any duplicated names in the Database Tree and displays them in a list. The Level column tells the user where in the Database Tree the duplicated name can be found. The Parent column displays the name of the level above the duplicated item. If there are many names found, the Search box can be used to filter out all but the desired name.
If the user checks the checkbox in the Repair column beside a name and clicks OK, Well Seeker will fix the duplicated names in the database tree. The user can use the Check All and Un-check All buttons to check or uncheck the whole of the Repair column.
The User Permissions tool allows the user to view and edit the permissions for the users of the currently connected remote SQL database and can only be accessed when connected to a remote SQL database.
The following permissions are available:
Create New Items: User can create new items in the database.
Delete Items: User can delete items in the database.
Edit Items: User can edit items that other users have created.
Administrator: The user can change the permissions of other users.
Approver: User has permission to approve and archive bid sheets. See section 13.15 – Create Bid Sheet.
See Section 6.1.5 – SQL Server Databases for more information on SQL remote server databases.
When a remote database is first created, only its creator will have a username login assigned. New users can be created using the Add User button and removed using the Delete User button. Click on the Username field to edit an existing user’s login name.
The first time a user logs in to the remote database, the WS password that they enter will be saved as the password for any future logins. If a user forgets their password, another user with administrator permission can reset their password by clicking on the Password field.
This feature is only available to Innova Drilling & Intervention staff.
This feature is only available to Innova Drilling & Intervention staff.
Selecting this menu item will round the measured depths of the currently opened survey to the nearest whole number.
Code Defaults allows the user to set the defaults for Activity, Phase and Cost Codes for the whole database. Once these have been set, any new actual well which is created will contain these defaults.
The user can switch between Activity, Phase and Cost Codes using the drop-down box. Any changes they make should be saved by clicking on the save icon at the top of the window.
The user can modify these codes for individual operators and wells if required. See Section 13.0 – Reporting for more information on Activity, Phase and Cost Codes.
The Real Time data exchange tool allows the user to automatically upload updates for a given well to a remote database.
Select the well from your local database that you wish to upload to the remote database. Note that unless the Create Well on Remote option is checked, the selected well must already exist on the remote server. The well must also be set as Active in the Daily Reporting window on the remote server (see section 13.4.7.1 – DDR Report Selection more information). Checking the Create Well on Remote option requires a valid login with permission to create a well.
Enter the ICDS Server IP address and Port of the remote database in the ICDS Server section. These details will be provided by your server admin.
The Select Data section allows the user to select what associated data is uploaded along with the well:
Check for new Plans: When this option is checked, whenever the Real Time Data Exchange uploads to the remote server, it will check if there are any new plans on the remote server for the selected well. If there are, it will display a message in the Messages section.
Surveys: If this option is unchecked, only plans will be uploaded.
Daily Reports: Check this option to upload any daily reports associated with the well. See Section 13.4– Daily Reporting for more information on daily reports.
Drilling Parameters: Check this option to upload drilling parameters associated with the well.
Replicate Operator: This option will create a transfer file which contains all the information under the currently selected operator.
Principal Plan: Pushes the principal plan to the server.
Engineering: Check this option to upload engineering data associated with the well. Engineering is a work in progress and is not currently available to commercial license holders.
Geo-Steering: Check this option to upload geo-steering settings associated with the well. See section 7.12 - Create Offset Plan for more information on geo-steering settings.
Create Well on Remote: If this option is not checked, then the well must already exist on the remote server in order to update it with the Real Time Data Exchange tool. Checking this option will create the well on the remote server when it is uploaded. However, this requires the user to log in to the remote server and have creating permissions assigned.
Check for Plans: This button functions in the same way as the Check For New Plans option, but can be used at any time without having to wait for the next data transfer.
Network Latency: Clicking this button will ping the remote server and display a message showing the latency. This can be used for troubleshooting if the remote server is being slow or unresponsive.
Synchronize with server: When this option is checked, Well Seeker checks the server database to see if there are any differences compared to the local. This check is performed every 30 seconds when the real time data exchange is running or before every manual push.
While running the data transfer the user will see “remote data synchronized” every 30 seconds in the Messages section. If WS registers that there is a change in any of these tables on the server compared to the local, then the user will be prompted to review these changes. A button will appear in the Data Transfer section called Review database changes. Clicking on this button will open the Select Data dialog shown below:
This window will detail which table has been changed along with the object that has been changed, who edited it on the server and when. The user can then choose to accept the change by checking the box in the accept column. If accepted, the ENTIRE table is overwritten on the local database with the data from the server. If the user chooses to reject change, by leaving the accept column unchecked and clicking OK, then no changes will be made to this table in the local database. Note that the data transfer will not upload any data to the server until all synchronization issues have either been accepted or rejected.
The Data Transfer section allows the user to start or stop the upload. Set the update rate in minutes in the Update Rate box. This will define how often the tool will upload data to the remote database.
Pressing the Start button will begin the real time data exchange. You can see the time until next data upload countdown in the Time until next update box. The Stop button will pause the exchange. The Manual Push button will upload once without having to start the automatic transfer. It can also be selected while the automatic transfer is running.
The Messages section will keep a record of all uploads, inform the user if a new plan is available as well as any errors that occur. The Clear button will clear all messages.
The Sync Rignames button will pull rig name and personnel data from the remote server and add it to the Personnel Details (section 6.4.18 – Personnel Names and Details) and Rig Names (section 6.4.20 – Rig Names) tools. A well does not need to be selected in the Select Well section but the remote database needs to be specified by entering its IP and Port in the ICDS Server section.
The right-hand side of the Status Bar in the main user interface displays the time of the last push and the time until the next update. If the last push was successful, it will be highlighted green. If the last push was unsuccessful, it will be highlighted red.
The Remote Data Fetch tool allows the user to import well and plan data from a remote database without needing login credentials for the server. Its primary purpose is to allow field personnel to quickly retrieve all the required information on a well before they start drilling. The Remote Data Fetch tool allows them to do this without needing to log in to their organisation’s remote server database, which could represent a risk from a security and data management perspective.
The Data Fetch window is split into three main sections, which are described below:
To use the Data Fetch tool, the user requires the URL and port number for their organisation’s ICDS server, which they should enter into the ICDS Server and Port boxes, respectively. This information should be provided to the user by their organisation. An IP address is also acceptable instead of a URL. Depending on how the user’s organisation has set up user management, these credentials may be automatically filled in and not editable.
After entering the ICDS Server and Port, the user can test their connection to the server by clicking the Test Con button. The server will send back a response in the Message Box above. Whenever the user clicks on the Test Con, Connect or Fetch Data buttons, the Message Box will display a response from the server. If there are any errors during the connection or fetch process, they will be displayed here.
After entering the ICDS Server and Port, the user can click on the Connect button. This will populate the Well List section with the wells that are present on their organisation’s remote server database. Once the user has selected the wells they wish to download, and they have adjusted their download settings in the Data Fetch Options section, they can download them to their local database by clicking on the Fetch Data button. The message box will detail the progress of the download. If the download is successful, the message box will display “Data fetch complete!” and the selected wells will appear in the user’s local database tree. Note that if the wells already exist in the user’s local database, they will be overwritten by the downloaded wells.
When the user clicks on the Connect button, the Well List section will populate with the wells that are stored in the organisation’s remote server database.
By default, only wells with the status Upcoming, Active, Standby and TD are displayed and selectable. The user can view plans, principal plans and wells with other statuses by selecting the appropriate setting in the Data Fetch Options section.
At the top of the window is the Filters section. Dropdown boxes allow the user to filter the well list by operator, well status, job number and rig. The search box allows the user to filter the list by any string they want, such as well name, county, or state.
The user can select the wells they wish to download by clicking on the circle to the right of each well. Depending on the settings they have selected in the Data Fetch Options section, offsets and principal plans for the selected wells may also be downloaded when the user clicks the Fetch Data button.
The Data Fetch Options section allows the user to adjust what wells are displayed in the Wells List and what gets downloaded along with the selected wells when the user clicks the Fetch Data button.
Show all wells: By default, only wells with the status Upcoming, Active, Standby and TD are displayed and selectable. Toggling on Show all wells will display all wells regardless of their status and allows them to be selected for download.
Show plans: By default, well plans are not displayed. Toggling on Show plans will display all non-principal well plans and allows them to be selected for download.
Show principal plans: By default, well plans are not displayed. Toggling on Show principal plans will display all principal well plans and allows them to be selected for download.
Pull offset wells: When this option is toggled on, any wells that are downloaded will also download their offsets, if they have any.
Pull principal plan: When this option is toggled on, any wells that are downloaded will also download their principal well plan, if one is available.
Set transferred status: When this option is toggled on, any wells that are downloaded will have their status changed on the server to ‘transferred’. This is a useful way to indicate to the server database manager that a data fetch has been performed.
Opens the Contact List dialog, where the user can enter any relevant contact details.
The Personnel Details window can be used to keep a list of all personnel involved with wells in the database. These personnel will then be accessed quickly when adding personnel to other Well Seeker features such as Daily Reports and Analytics.
The user should enter the name of each member of personnel into the Name column and then select their position from the dropdown box in the Position column. The Email, Phone and Personnel ID columns are optional. The checkboxes in the Active column can be toggled on/off to show/hide personnel from other Well Seeker features.
At the top of the window the user can filter the list by typing in the Search box, which searches all fields in the table. The dropdown boxes can be used to filter by the Position and Employment fields.
The Personnel Utilization tool can be used to generate a personnel utilization report. This report will mark on a calendar each day that the selected personnel member(s) have worked as well as the rig(s) that they worked on.
The user should select a date range in the Date Range section and choose which personnel to include from the list. The Check All and Un-check All buttons can be used to quickly include or exclude all personnel. The personnel list is populated by names that have been entered into the Well Data & Personnel section in a Daily Report. See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel for more information.
The report can also be filtered by coordinator and personnel type by clicking on the check boxes in the top right of the window. These dropdown boxes will be populated according to the information entered into the Personnel Details tool. The user can also filter the list using the Search box in the top right corner.
The Rig Names window allows the user to create a list of rig names that can then be used in the Daily Reporting and Database Tree Search tools. Un-checking the Active checkbox next to each rig name will hide that rig from any dropdown list.
Wits data comes in with a time stamp and an ID and is then translated into the appropriate parameter based on the Well Seeker WITS mapping.
When selected, this will open the WITS Mapping dialog, as displayed below.
Port Number: This is not currently used for anything
Record ID: Comes from the WITS zero standards.
Field ID: Comes from the WITS zero standards.
Internal Mnemonic: The Internal Mnemonic is what Well Seeker uses to map the WITS data it is receiving. For example, a WITS ID of 0110 is mapped to Hole MD (WITS zero standards), which is something that will make more sense to the user. The internal mnemonic is displayed when you double click on one of the Real Time Gauges (see section 13.11.1.1 – Real Time Gauges) in the DD Dashboard, and the user can choose which mnemonic to display.
Table Name: The table ID in the Well Seeker Database which the parameter is written to.
It is important to note that currently, there is NO standard mapping for RAW survey values BX BY BZ, and as a result, it is likely that the channels used will vary from company to company. The user should therefore be aware of this and adjust the mapping accordingly once the relevant channels have been determined.
Here the user can enter the addresses of any company or location that are being shipped to/from over the course of a project. These addresses can then be used in the Daily Reporting package to generate a shipping ticket or a bid sheet. The addresses entered in the Shipping Address tool are applied to every operator in the database, so these addresses are available to select for any well within the database.
The Logos submenu allows the user to set a default for the primary and secondary logos, that are normally set in the Operator Properties window.
Allows the user to select a default primary logo. Once selected, when the user creates a new Operator, the selected logo will automatically populate as the primary logo in the Operator Properties. Well Seeker accepts bmp, png and jpg format images as logos.
Allows the user to select a default secondary logo. Once selected, when the user creates a new Operator, the selected logo will automatically populate as the secondary logo in the Operator Properties. Well Seeker accepts bmp, png and jpg format images as logos.
Removes the currently set primary logo.
Removes the currently set secondary logo.
The IPM File Management tools allows an organisation with a Well Seeker Pro server database to store and manage a list of IPM files on their server. This list of IPMs can then be pulled down to any PC with the correct company Well Seeker Pro credentials, overwriting all existing IPM files used by Well Seeker Pro on that PC. This ensures that well planning have control over the IPM files used within their organization and gives the field the tools to always be in line with the well planner’s IPM structure.
The server administrator should upload the desired IPMs using the Upload IPM Folder command. Well Seeker running on a local computer can then connect to the server to check if the local user’s IPMs are up to date.
With a stable internet connection, Well Seeker connects to the server database every 30 minutes to perform the check. The IP Address and Port Number entered in the ICDS section of the RT Data Exchange (section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange) dialog is what determines which remote database Well Seeker performs the check on. Well Seeker checks the upload date for each of the IPM’s on the server database and takes the most recent date. It then checks the created date for all the IPM’s on the local computer and takes the most recent date.
If the upload date is newer than the created date an orange warning displays in the status bar at the bottom right-hand side of the main user interface:
The user can then update their IPMs using the Pull IPM Files from Server option.
The user must be logged on to their company main Well Seeker Pro server database, with a Well Seeker login that has the Administrator user permission enabled. This option first deletes any existing IPMs on the server database and then uploads all of the IPM files on the local PC they are currently using from the following pathway C:\Users\[Username]\AppData\Roaming\Well Seeker Pro\IPM, to the server database.
The user must be logged on to their company main Well Seeker Pro server database. Opens a dialog where the current list of IPMs on the server can be viewed, including the file name, the user that uploaded the IPM file and the upload date.
This option can be selected when accessing either a local or server database. When selected, all existing IPMs on the computer are moved to a new folder in the IPM directory called Old, and the IPMs from the server are then all downloaded to the IPM directory (C:\Users\[Username]\AppData\Roaming\Well Seeker Pro\IPM) on the local PC.
The user must be logged on to their company main Well Seeker Pro server database, with a Well Seeker login that has the Administrator user permission enabled. This option deletes all the IPMs from the server.
The Asset Search option allows the user to search all inventories in the database tree for a specific drill string component. The user should enter the serial number of the component and select its type in the Asset Details section and then click on Search. The user can also limit the search to a specific date range by checking the checkbox in the Date Range section before clicking Search.
Results of the search are shown in the three Data sections. The Well Data section will display wells that contain the selected asset in their Inventory. The Run Data section will show wells where the asset has been used in the Drill String Editor as part of a BHA. The Summary Data section displays a summary of the above two sections. For more information in the Inventory and the Drill String Editor, see Section 13.0 – Reporting.
Allows the user to switch between currently open surveys, plans and charts.
The view menu allows the user to customize how the Well Seeker PRO interface looks and which elements to display.
Toolbars and Docking Windows: This menu allows the user to show or hide various elements of the Well Seeker PRO main user interface. If there is a tick next to the item, it means it is currently being displayed. If an element has been closed it can be re-opened from this menu. The customize option displays a dialog which allows the user to customize the look and feel of the overall interface.
Decimal Places: Allows the user to select the number of decimal places the plan and surveys are referenced to. User can select between 1 and 10 decimal places.
Font Size: This option relates to the size of the font in the Survey / Chart window. The user can choose between Small, Medium, Large and Extra Large.
Lat Long Display Options: This option allows the user to select how latitude and longitude are displayed in the Survey Viewer. The user can select either Degrees, Minutes and Seconds or Decimal Degrees. Any active surveys must be closed and re-opened before the change can come into effect.
Survey Column Show Hide: This option is only available if a plan or survey is open in the Survey / Chart viewer area. This allows the user to customize the columns which appear in the survey / plan grids. Click on the checkmark in the Visible column to toggle that column on/off when viewing a survey or a plan. Click ‘Apply’ to save changes and ‘Cancel’ to exit without saving changes.
The “Method” and “Target” columns are only applicable when in a plan.
The “TC X” “TC Y” “TFO Highside” “TFO + Azi”, “Distance to Plan”, “Up Down”, “Left Right”, “Closure Azimuth” & “BR to Land” columns are only available when in a survey.
Use Direct 3D: Toggles whether Well Seeker uses DirectX drivers to render 3D charts and effects. If the user is experiencing issues while viewing 3D charts, toggling this option off may resolve them. However, display quality and functionality are reduced in 3D charts when Direct 3D is toggled off.
Color Palette Selection: Sets the color palette for some charts, such as the KPI charts produced in Daily Reporting or Well Analytics.
PDF Report Font Size: Changes the font size for PDF format reports. Default size is 12.
The context menu is available in every plot by right clicking anywhere on the plot. This allows the user to change certain aspects of the plot based on their requirements. The contents of the menu will vary dependent upon the chart selected.
Viewing Style – Allows the user to select the desired Chart style.
Border Style – Allows the user to select the desired Border style of the chart.
Font Size – Allows the user to select the desired font size, which will affect all fonts on the chart including title and axis labels. Large, Medium or Small.
Show Legend – Allows the user to toggle the chart legend on and off.
Legend Style – Allows the user to select the Legend style. There are 6 options, including Hide Legend.
Numeric Precision – Allows the user to select the number of decimal places the numbers in the plots are referenced to. Zero to 3 d.p.
Plotting Method – Allows the user to select the way the line is plotted: Point, Line, Bar, Points + Line, Spline Area.
Data Shadows – Allows the user to select between off, shadow and 3D.
Gradient Styles – Allows the user to select the gradient graphic on a pie chart.
Data Labels as – Allows the user to select the labels as a percentage or as the actual value.
Group Percentages – User can select the percentage threshold below which a segment in a pie chart will be grouped as other.
Grid Options – Allows the user to change the grid options in the chart.
Graph and/or Table – Allows the user to view the chart only, table only or both at the same time.
Point Label Orientation – Allows the user to select the orientation of the X axis series labels.
Include Data Labels – Allows the user to add data labels to the chart.
Mark Data Points – Adds the data points relating to the data labels.
Undo Zoom – Resets the zoom on the chart. Pressing the Z button has the same effect.
Customization Dialog – Opens a dialog that allows the user to chart titles, axis min and max values, fonts, line colour and styles.
Maximise – Maximises the chart to fill the screen. Escape button exits this view.
Export Dialog – Allows the user to Export the chart using multiple image formats: EMF, WMF, BMP, JPG and PNG. The user has 3 options:
Clipboard: exports directly to clipboard, allowing images to be quickly added to word, excel & PowerPoint documents
File: Creates an image file of the chart which can be used on its own or imported into any suitable document
Printer: Sends the chart to the printer
The user can also choose the relevant Width, Pixels and DPI to use for the export. For Clipboard and File options, Pixels is the only available selection. When Printer is selected, the Millimeters, Inches and Points options become available to select.
X Axis on Top – Moves the labelled X axis from the bottom to the top.
Y Axis on Top – Moves the labelled Y axis from the left to the right.
Additional X Axis – Adds an additional labelled X axis.
Additional Y axis – Adds an additional labelled Y axis.
The following context menu items are only available in a 3D chart. For more information on the 3D chart and how to use these items, see Section 12.3 - 3D Chart:
Rotation Animation – Toggle this option on to make the 3D chart rotate automatically around the z-axis, for display purposes.
Rotation Increment – Changes the speed and direction of the rotation animation.
Center on survey – Changes the view to a ‘fly down sphere’ centered on the deepest survey in the reference well. The keyboard arrow keys can be used to change the survey well that the fly down sphere is referencing.
Fly down well – Causes the fly down sphere to automatically move from the top of the well down to the bottom.
Show closest approach – Measures the distance between the fly down sphere and the nearest point on the chosen reference well.
Orientate to North – Orientates the 3D chart so that north on the chart is pointing straight up with reference to the screen.
North Ref Distances – When toggled off, the show closest approach option will display distances with reference to the highside of the reference well. When toggled on, distances will be measured with reference to north.
Go to bottom of well – When center on survey is turned on, this will cause the fly down sphere to go to the deepest survey in the well.
Go to top of well - When center on survey is turned on, this will cause the fly down sphere to go to the shallowest survey in the well.
Help: Opens the Well Seeker PRO help file.
License Info: Displays the current license info for Well Seeker PRO.
Details of the licensing dialog are detailed in Appendix A.
Online documentation: Opens the Innova Documentation website, which contains all of Innova’s information resources in one place. The website contains this manual, along with shorter tutorial documents and videos, as well as longer form training videos.
Online training videos: Opens the Innova Documentation website but navigates to the Online Training Videos section.
Open documentation folder: Opens the windows folder where the default install documentation, how to guides and manuals can be found.
Open database location: Opens the windows folder where the Well Seeker Pro database file currently open is saved.
Open Install Folder: Opens the folder which was created during the install process.
Open Setup File Folder: Opens the folder which contains the active setup file.
Open Virtual Store: Opens the virtual store folder. Depending on the computer setup and user permissions, the virtual store may contain several files and folders which are used by well seeker. This folder can sometimes be difficult to locate as it is often hidden. This option automatically locates and opens the folder for you.
Send Debugging Email: If the user has outlook setup as their email platform, selecting this option will open a new email from their default email account. The email will contain the following:
The Debugging File will be included as an attachment.
The subject line will be populated with the following: Well Seeker Debugging Info (Date).
The body of the email will contain the system information which is included in the txt document in the debugging folder.
Create Debugging File: Creates a zipped debugging folder which the user can save anywhere they wish on their computer. The debugging folder contains the following files:
A copy of the current Database which will have the date added to the end of the name.
A copy of the user’s setup file.
A txt document containing certain system information, including the current version of Well Seeker being used, Screen resolution details etc.
Audit Logs: Opens the Audit Data window. This window allows the user to track changes made to the database. The Audit Data grid will display the time each change was made, a description of the action performed, the object the action was performed on and the user that performed the action. If on a local database this will always be ‘local user’ but if logged into a remote server this will display the username of the person that performed the action. At the bottom of the window the user can change the number of records shown in the grid using the Number of Records box. The two dropdown boxes can be used to filter by description and by object name.
Start Screen Capture: This option, after a few seconds, will start to record a video of the user’s screen. This video can then be sent to the Innova support team to help with investigating issues. Note: Only one screen capture video can be saved at a time. Starting an old one will overwrite the previous capture.
Stop Screen Capture: Once the user has captured everything they need in the screen capture, they should select this option to stop recording and save the screen capture file.
Open Screen Capture File Location: Opens the folder containing the screenCapture.mp4 file that contains the most recently captured video.
Well Seeker – Self Test: This option is used by Innova staff to test software updates. It should not be used by users.
Company Details: Allows the user to enter the Name, Website and Telephone Number for their company. This information can then be added to the front cover of any reports generated by the user. The option to include these details is found in the report manager.
About Well Seeker: Displays the current version of Well Seeker PRO. If the Check for Update function has been run and an update is available, the Download and Download/Install buttons will be available.
Clicking on Download will save a zip file containing the patched Well Seeker.exe to the user’s computer. The user can then implement the batch manually by following these steps:
Back up your database by going to File > Backup Database.
Close Well Seeker PRO.
Unzip Well Seeker.exe from the zip file. Place it in your Well Seeker PRO installation directory, replacing the file that I already there. By default this directory is C:\Program Files (x86)\Innova Drilling and Intervention\Well Seeker PRO
Open Well Seeker PRO and go to Help > About Well Seeker. Your version number should be updated to the latest version.
Clicking on Download/Install will automatically download and apply the patch. Please note that Well Seeker PRO will close and reopen during this process, so it should not be run during a critical operation. Any incoming/outgoing data streams such as WITS or the Real Time Data Exchange will also need to be restarted.
Check for Update: Contacts the Innova server and carries out a check on Innova’s patch updates. It will inform the user if their version is up to date, or if there is a newer version available via a message window.
If Well Seeker Pro is up to date, then no further action is required. If a patch update is available, then the user will be informed of the new version number available and there will be an additional reminder in the bottom right of the UI.
Auto update check: If this option is toggled on, Well Seeker will run the Check for Update function every time the program starts.
The chart properties dialog allows the user to turn on depth labels by clicking the “Depth Labels” check box and labels will be displayed at the interval specified by the “label interval” edit box. “Start Depth” and “Stop Depth” can also be selected here, where only labels within this depth range are displayed.
Inclinations and azimuths can also be displayed by clicking the inclinations and azimuths check boxes, and these will be displayed alongside the depth labels at the same frequency. These labels can be added independently of the depth labels. It should be noted that if a large number of wells are displayed; turning on depth labels can drastically reduce chart zooming and scrolling performance.
This section allows the user to turn on various chart annotations, such as well names, lithology’s, annotations, casing symbols and plan sections. Plan Sections can only be displayed if the reference well is a plan and annotations, lithology’s, casing symbols and plan sections can only be displayed in section, plan, 3D and spider plots. If lithology lines are selected horizontal lines will be drawn across the plot at the depths of the lithology change. Lithology’s can only be displayed on section plots. Lithology Planes can only be displayed on 3D plots. Lease Line Intersections will display an annotation if a well crosses a lease line. They require a lease line to be set as a target for the reference well.
The warnings annotations if selected will show the warning levels defined at operator level on the separation factor plot. These are on by default in the separation factor plot.
This section allows the user to control properties which affect all chart labels. The style of the label can be changed to bold or italics and the default size of the label can be set here too. If the allow labels to be zoomed box is checked when the user zooms a plot the label size will increase accordingly. If not, the label size will remain fixed regardless of zoom level.
Tether lines can also be attached to labels if the check box is selected. If this is done, when a label is dragged a tether line will be drawn to indicate its original position.
These options are only available in the section and 3D plots and allow the user to add the Geo Steering data to the plots. User can select to add one or all the following zones: Top Target, Target and Bottom Target
This section allows the user to select the font size of the chart labels, axis labels and grid numbers.
The TVD slice section is only applicable to spider plots and allows the user to specify a TVD range which will be displayed on the spider plot.
By default, labels are coloured the same as the well they are associated with, this can be overridden by selecting the check boxes in the label colour section. Overriding the colours will make all labels of that type the same colour.
If the current plot is a plan view or a spider plot, this section allows the user to display a symbol for the wellhead location and allows any templates to be displayed. The slot names on the templates can also be displayed by clicking the slot names option.
Inner and Outer Tolerance circles can also be displayed by selecting the check boxes in this section.
This section allows the user to determine the frequency at which error ellipses are draw. Error colour and line style can also be selected to match the series style in this section.
This option can severely reduce scrolling and zooming performance if a large number of wells are being displayed.
This section allows the user to define if labels are displayed on offset wells or just the reference well. Check the appropriate check box for the label type.
This section allows the user to override the default line colour for various well types.
When selected, the “Randomize offset colours” option overrides all default well colours and all offset wells are displayed with a different, randomly generated colour.
If the current plot is a travelling cylinder, this section allows the user to change the reference of the travelling cylinder plot from highside to true north. The default reference can be selected in the Anti-Collision Settings, which is accessed via the Tools menu.
If the user has opened a Travelling Cylinder plot from a plan, any offset surveys which are associated with the same Well will not display errors when the user selects to show these.
In the above example if the user opens the New Plan and offsets the current survey and the offset survey, when in the TC plot, if they select to display errors, NO errors will be displayed on the Current Survey because it is associated with the same well (Ref Well) as the plan which is being referenced. The offset survey will show errors as it is associated with a different well.
Selecting “Show Errors on Ref Well” from this section of the chart properties, allows the user to override this and display the errors on Current survey if they require.
It is worth noting here that if the user opens a TC plot from the Current survey and offsets the New Plan, even though the new plan is associated with the same well, the errors will display. The program behaves differently depending on whether a survey or plan is the reference for the TC plot.
This section allows the user to select the colour of the Major and Minor gridlines, and the background colour of the plot.
The X, Y and Z plane colours can also be changed here for the 3D plot.
The colour of the text in the plot axis can be changed here via the “Text” option.
This section allows the user to manipulate the X and Y Axis Minimum and Maximum values and fix the chart scale. The axis scale can be added or omitted from the relevant charts by checking or unchecking the “Show Scales” box.
The axis scale units are scale/inch as default but can be changed to scale/cm by checking this box.
In order to display wells correctly, Well Seeker attempts to preserve the aspect ratio of a plot, so it does not appear distorted i.e. X & Y axis scales are kept the same. This can however lead to plots not filling the entire screen. De-selecting the preserve aspect ratio option means that when zooming in on a plot, Well Seeker does not maintain the 1:1 ratio for the axis scales. This can produce wells which look distorted and it is not recommended to disable this option.
Chart grid lines can be manually overridden by unchecking the “auto” check box. This allows the user to manually enter the distance between major and minor grid lines.
When a chart is first opened, it will display the reference well. Sometimes, if there are several targets and the well does not hit these targets e.g. when planning a well, the user wants to initially understand where all the targets are before they attempt to hit them, the targets may fall out with the maximum and minimum values on the chart, and as a result they are not showing. In this situation, the user can select Auto Max Min Scale to Include Targets, and this will automatically adjust the chart axis scale on opening to include the targets.
The colour and line style of individual plans and surveys can be changed by selecting the series from the drop-down menu (or by selecting the plan or survey directly from the box) and then selecting the colour and line style from the drop-down menus. This can also be done by right clicking the chart and using the customization dialog. Note that the customization dialog option is disabled in the Wall Plot Composer. Also note that changing a series style will have no effect if the Force Color option has been select for the plan/actual wellbore properties level, it will remain the forced colour. If the Only Show Principal Plan option is toggled on, plots will not display any wells other than the reference well and the principal plan for that well, if one has been assigned.
This section allows the user to select which grid lines are displayed. X & Y Major and Minor grid lines can be displayed independently of each other. The “Thick Major Gridline” option, displays the major grid lines more boldly than the minor, making them stand out more.
This section allows the user to select the Chart Style. There are 13 different styles to choose from which includes a “No Style” option. Border style is selected from here also. There are five options: Shadow, Thin Line, No Border, Insert and Thick Line.
If required a Legend can be added to any of the plots, and the drop-down in this section gives the user six options: Hide, Top, Bottom, Left, Right and Inside Axis.
This section allows the user to display targets, drilling targets, target names and it also allows the user to determine individual targets colour and line style. It is also possible to hide targets so that they are not displayed on a particular plot. This is achieved by unchecking the “Visible” box associated with any specific target.
Lease Lines and Hard Lines are also displayed in this section and are identified by the check in the Lease and Hard Lines cell.
This section allows the user to toggle Bit Projections on and off. The user can also select the colour of the projection.
This section allows the user to change the size of Survey Spheres and Fly Down Spheres in 3D Charts, adjust Worksight settings, select the rig graphic on or off and adjust the Critical Point Target settings. These options are only available to edit in the Chart Properties for 3D plots.
The database navigator allows the user to navigate through and manipulate the Well Seeker PRO database.
Users can access database navigator functions from the tool bar at the top of the window or by right clicking in the window area.
The database is split in to 8 levels which are described below. Tree items can be expanded by clicking on the plus symbol to left of the icon and minimized by clicking on the minus symbol.
The tree state is saved when the program is closed to help aid navigation, however if the program exits unexpectedly the tree will not be saved.
If a survey, plan, or actual / planned well bore is double left clicked, the surveys / plan will be opened as a new survey view tab in the survey / plan viewer area. A maximum of 20 plans & 20 surveys can be open at any one time.
Database functions can be performed either by using the toolbar at the top of the database viewer or by right clicking anywhere within the database viewer window.
Insert [Level] Item: Depending on which Level you select when you right click the insert function will insert a new Facility, Well, Survey, etc below the currently selected level.
Insert New Actual Well: If the currently selected item is at Well Level, a new actual well can be inserted.
Insert Planned Well: If the currently selected item is at Well Level, a planned well can be inserted.
Cut: Cut the selected tree item and copy to the clipboard.
Copy: Copy the selected item to the clip board.
Paste: Paste cut / copied items to the current tree item.
Delete: delete the currently selected tree item.
This option is only available at field level. If the CRS for the field is NAD83 or NAD27, NADCON conversion can be used to convert between the two. Surface co-ordinates for items in the field will be altered so that they occupy the same location but in the new CRS.
If an actual well or a planned well is selected this option becomes available to select and allows the user to enter and edit casings for the well. This input is also used in anti-collision calculations where casings are included.
The only fields which are required are MD or TVD, and OD. The MD or TVD is interpolated (based on the input) from the actual wellbore so if this has not yet been created then the generated depth will not be calculated.
Casing Type is selected from a drop-down menu which has 4 options: Conductor, Casing, Liner and Open Hole.
This displays the targets dialog which is described in Section 11.0 – Targets.
This displays the dialog for user defined annotations. The user can enter a MD or TVD and the corresponding depth field will populate i.e., enter a MD and the TVD cell will automatically populate with the relevant value which Well Seeker interpolates from the plan or survey. If the depth entered does not exist, then the annotation will not be displayed.
If the user is entering annotations for a plan, the Import Critical Points button will be available. Clicking this button will pull the plan points of the plan into the table as annotations.
Allows the user to enter the formation tops depths. These are entered as a MD, TVD or TVDSS and can only be displayed on the section view and 3D plot. The user can also enter the Dip Angle, which will change the angle of the lithology lines in the plots.
This option is available to select from all database tree levels; however, the sub-menu option availability is dependent upon the selection level in the database tree. For a detailed description of the Reporting menu and all the sub-menu items, see Section 13.0 – Reporting.
Displays the properties dialog for the current tree selection. For more details on the individual properties, see section 8.0 – Well Seeker PRO Database Structure.
Rename the currently selected tree item. Symbols including # $ £ / [ ] @ cannot not be used for naming database items.
Opens a sub-menu with more refined options.
Export: Export the currently selected tree item and all children to an export file.
Export Multi Well: Gives the user the option to select which facilities, wells, actual wells and planned wells are to be included in the export from a given field.
Import: Import a Well Seeker PRO transfer file into the current database. If the files to be imported contain any database tree item with the same name as an existing item, Well Seeker PRO uses an internal logic process to automatically decide how the conflict is handled.
In all standard cases where a name match is found between the export file and the database, the outcome is the database data is overwritten with the data from the export file. The only exception to this is when a duplicate name is encountered under a different parent item in the database tree.
The way in which duplicate child items, under different parent items in the database tree are handled is described below:
The tables below show examples of a simple Well Seeker export file imported into Well Seeker Pro using the new process, including a scenario where duplicate level items are dealt with.
Export and Database naming matches:
Export and Database naming mismatch, resulting in duplicate level resolution logic:
A message dialog appears after the import process has completed, informing the user if any duplicate level items have been resolved.
An importFileLog.txt file is also created in the debug folder. This contains the same information that is displayed in the message dialog above, and provides a reference for the user once the dialog has been closed. The debug folder file path is: C:\Users\USERNAME\AppData\Roaming\Well Seeker Pro\Debug.
Import – No Reporting: Functions the same as Import, but does not import any of the reporting data contained in the export file. This will allow users to pull in trajectory data, such as plan updates from the office, without concern about overwriting reporting data.
Only available from database level, this allows the user to create an instant plan and all the levels above it with default values.
Only available from database level, this allows the user to create an instant survey and all the levels above it with default values.
This option is primarily used for Geo-steering adjustments in lateral sections of the well bore and is only available for planned wellbores. It allows the user to create a plan from a user defined measured depth with a user defined TVD and dip angle. The TVD reference can also be selected here as zero Vertical Section.
Whenever a Geo-Steering report is received it will specify a new target TVD and dip angle. The user should enter the current bit depth into the MD box (this will calculate an interpolated point on the selected plan). The user can then enter either the TVD Change (+ve value is deeper, -ve value is shallower) or the New Target TVD from the geo steering report. When one is entered, the other calculates automatically. Finally, the new Dip Angle can be entered.
When the Create button is clicked a new well plan will be created. The new plan will include the Offset TVD and Dip angle in the name. This plan will mirror the original plan down to the MD selected as the start point.
From the start point, the new plan will then drop (or build) instantly to the new required TVD. It should be noted that this tool is not intended to output a polished well plan; rather, its purpose is to quickly adjust the current well plan to reflect the drilling requirements / changes supplied by the geologist. The Directional Driller then has a new updated plan to follow and can bring the wellbore back to plan.
This opens the Geo Steering Dialog. This option is only accessible from the Actual Wellbore level. The data entered here would be supplied by the geologist and can be represented on the section view and 3D plot.
The thickness options along the top allow the user to enter the required thickness of the top, Centre and bottom formation target. These thicknesses are directly represented in the section view plots, an example of which is below.
The user then enters the MD as supplied by the Geologist. The program will take this measured depth and interpolate the Survey to find the corresponding Vertical Section to use for plotting on the section view plot. It is important to note at this point that when calculating the required VS, Well Seeker will use the VS azimuth the survey is referenced to.
The user then enters the Centre target TVD. This value along with the values entered in the thickness section allow the program to automatically calculate the Top Zone, Top Target, Bottom Target and Bottom Zone TVD values in the first line of the main grid.
The final value to enter is the Dip Angle. The first dip entered on line 1 is just for reference and does not have any effect on the calculated depths. From line 2 onwards, the entered dip does affect the calculated TVD values. To calculate the centre target TVD on line 2, Well Seeker uses the TVD on line 1, the vertical section on line 2 and the dip angle on line 2. If the dip on line 2 is 90° then the TVD will be the same as line 1, if it is <90° the TVD on line 2 will be greater than line 1 and if it is >90° the TVD on line 2 will be less than line 1. The user can add as many lines into the table as they require, and all of these can be plotted on the section or 3D charts. It should be noted that the dip value on the last line, will also be used to project ahead on the plot to the same VS at the end of the principal well plan.
In the above plot, the black Vertical lines represent the different lines entered in the Geo Steering Dialog. If the first line in the geo-steering dialog has a vertical section which is greater than the vertical section of the landing point in the principal plan, then Well Seeker will automatically add an additional line to represent this point. If the vertical section of the first line in the dialog is less than or equal to the vertical section of the landing point in the principal plan, then this line will not be added.
If Specify TVD is selected, then the Centre Target TVD is no longer automatically calculated from the dip angle. Instead, the user can manually enter the TVD and the difference in the TVD between lines, along with the vertical section is what is used by Well Seeker in the plots. The user can still manually add the dip angle, but this has no effect on the plotted values, with the exception of the last dip, which is still used to project to the vertical section TD of the principal plan.
If TVD ref to Zero VS is selected, then the existing TVD columns gain the addition of “@ 0VS” to their titles and a new column displays which shows centre target TVD. This column shows the centre target TVD at the relevant vertical section, as detailed by the measured depth entered. Both Centre Target TVD values are calculated based on the Dip angle entered.
Geo steering data can be added to the plot from the chart menu, and the different target zone colours can be selected from the Chart Defaults section of the Plots Menu. This chart default option also allows the user to select if they want these 3 zones to be represented on the plots as a default when they are opened. For more information regarding this, refer to the Plots Menu section of this manual.
It is worth noting that if there is no data entered in the Geo Steering Updates dialog, WS will still represent the target zones on the plot if these are turned on. The data used for this comes from the TVD and dip angle at the start of the lateral in the principle plan. Thickness will be 20 as default for all thickness options.
Expands all the database tree items below the level selected.
Collapses all the database tree items below the level selected.
The External Files option is only available at the Actual Well level. It allows the user to store files within the database. The user should select the desired file using the open folder button at the top of the window. Once a file has been selected, they can sort it into a category by choosing it from the dropdown box. The file can then be added by clicking on the Add button. Added files can be removed by selecting them from the list and clicking the Delete button, or opened from within the database by selecting Open File.
If the user is having technical issues, this folder can be sent to and contains most of the data required by the support team to investigate the issue.
Email Screen Capture: If the user has outlook setup as their email platform, selecting this option will open a new email from their default email account. The email will contain the screen capture video as an attachment. If the user is having technical issues, this file can be sent to and will aid the support team to investigate the issue.
The survey view allows the user to enter survey data into survey files and is accessible by double clicking on a survey file from the database viewer (above Left). The tie-on line for the survey is not editable from the grid and can only be changed in the survey properties dialog. Enter MD INC and AZI and all other parameters will be calculated.
If an actual or planned wellbore is being viewed, surveys are not editable (above right).
The distance, Up Down, Left Right, TC X, TC Y, TFO HS, TFO + Azi and BR to Land columns will only be populated if a principal plan is present. The BR to Land column data can be overridden if the Force Landing option is selected in the Actual Wellbore Properties. The proximity calculations are performed using the scan method specified at operator level.
The targets dialog can be opened from field level down to actual well / planned well level, from the targets button in the database explorer.
The list of targets available to the level the dialog was opened from is displayed in the grid. Targets can be made available to different levels by clicking the check boxes next to the target name in the grid. Targets are always available to the field level; however, the user can select which other levels they are to be associated with. The maximum level the target can be assigned to is dependent on which level the dialog was opened. For example, if the dialog was opened at well level, it would not be possible to associate the target with any actual wells or plans but it would be possible to associate the target with wells and facilities.
Targets will only be visible in the grid if they are currently associated with the level the dialog was opened from. If you wish to add a target from a different level, use the “Filter” drop-down menu to show targets from the level above. The check boxes can then be clicked to associate the target with the current level. When the target dialog is opened, the filter is set to the current level by default.
To create a new target, click the “Create new” button and a target will be added to the grid. The “copy target” will create a duplicate of the currently selected target. The “Delete” button will remove the currently selected target from the grid, and ”Save” will save any changes made.
The export targets button will export all targets currently displayed in the targets list to a well seeker export file. This can then be imported using the import targets button. When targets are imported, they will be imported and allocated to the current level which the targets dialog was opened from and may have to be manually assigned to any plans.
The targets name can be changed from the “Name” edit box and when “Save” is pressed, the name in the grid will be updated. The filter combo box will allow the user to show which level targets are currently being displayed at. The show lease lines radio button when checked will toggle the target list to only display lease/hard lines and will not display lease/hard lines when unchecked.
The TVD of the target can be entered in the TVD edit box. It should be noted that the TVD reference will change depending on which level the dialog was opened from. For Field, Facility, and Well level the TVD datum will be the system datum, and for actual and planned wells, the datum will be whichever depth reference is currently selected. The depth datum and elevation will be displayed in the text to the right of the edit box.
To create a drillers target enter the confidence level required in the confidence box. This represents the statistical likely hood that if the drillers target is hit the well will be within the geological target. Click the create drillers target button and select the well path which will be used to create the target. If the well path does not reach the targets TVD an error will be displayed. If the errors are small enough and the confidence level selected allows, the drillers target will be created and displayed on the plot. If the survey errors are too large or the confidence level too high an error will be displayed. Selected confidence must be less than 100%.
The target centre location can be defined in three ways by selecting the appropriate radio button:
Local: Local coordinates relative to the local datum. The local datum changes depending on which level the target dialog was opened at. The current datum is shown in the text at the bottom of the target centre frame.
Map: Enter the map coordinates of the target. This is usually the best way to enter the target centre location as it leaves no room for confusion which can occur with local coordinates.
Geographic: Enter the target lat / long.
When a target is supplied as a horizontal displacement and azimuth from the surface location, the user can use this section to generate the desired coordinates. Once these details are added and calculate has been selected, the program will automatically populate the target’s local coordinates. These cells will only be editable when local is selected in the target centre section.
The user can select to force the line style and colour of each target individually. This means that when a target is displayed on a plot, it will always display with the forced colour and line style. Note that when this is selected the line colour and style can not be adjusted from within a plot. This can only be done from the Targets dialog. If the user needs to be able to adjust from the chart properties then this option should be deselected.
No data is required for entering a point target.
Dip Angle: The dip angle of the target horizontal plane. Note that this is applied after the rotation setting.
Dip Azimuth: The azimuth of the dip direction
Thickness Up: The distance from the target centre to the top of the target
Thickness Down: Distance from the target centre to the bottom of the target
Radius: The target radius
Rotation: Only applicable if the arc properties are enabled and it defines the rotation angle from north of the target centre line. Note that this is applied before the dip angle is applied.
Aiming Point Offset From Target Centre: Offsets the centre of the circle north/south and east/west from the target co-ordinates. Note that the target itself does not change, just the position of the circle.
Arc Properties: Allows half-moon targets or equivalent to be created. Specify the start angle of the arc and the end angle.
Dip Angle: The dip angle of the target horizontal plane. Note that this is applied after the rotation setting.
Dip Azimuth: The azimuth of the dip direction
Thickness Up: The distance from the target centre to the top of the target
Thickness Down: Distance from the target centre to the bottom of the target
Semi-Major: The length of the ellipse semi major axis
Semi-Minor: The length of the ellipse semi minor axis
Aiming Point Offset From Target Centre: Offsets the centre of the ellipse north/south and east/west from the target co-ordinates. Note that the target itself does not change, just the position of the ellipse.
Arc Properties: Allows half-moon targets or equivalent to be created. Specify the start angle of the arc and the end angle.
Rotation: The rotation angle from north of the target centre line. Note that this is applied before the dip angle is applied.
Dip Angle: The dip angle of the target horizontal plane
Dip Azimuth: The azimuth of the dip direction
Thickness Up: The distance from the target centre to the top of the target
Thickness Down: Distance from the target centre to the bottom of the target
Length: The length of the target
Width: The width of the target
Aiming Point Offset From Target Centre: Offsets the centre of the rectangle north/south and east/west from the target co-ordinates. Note that the target itself does not change, just the position of the rectangle.
Rotation: The rotation angle from north of the target centre line. Note that this is applied before the dip angle is applied.
Polygon targets can be used for defining unusual shaped drilling targets as well as lease lines and hard lines. The input method must first be selected by choosing either map coordinates or local XY coordinates. Local coordinates are local with respect to the target centre and map coordinates are absolute points on a map.
The target can either have a constant thickness which is defined by the thickness up and down edit boxes or each point can have an individual thickness which is entered for each point on the grid. The dip angle and azimuth of the target can also be specified.
Target points are then typed into the grid using whichever input method was selected.
Shrink Target: This option allows the user to reduce the size of a polygon target by a set distance. This is useful for creating a hard line from a lease line at know set back distance. Complex polygons may have their corners / edges rounded or smoothed to take in to account the shrinking.
Lease Lines and Hard Lines are differentiated from a polygon target by checking the “Is a Lease Line” or “Is a Hard Line” box. It is important to understand that once this has been checked, Well Seeker will see this as a lease/hard line and not a target. The next time the user opens the target box, the lease line will no longer be visible. To see these lines, the user can select the “Show Lease Lines” option below the filter. This filter will hide the targets and display only the lease lines and the hard lines.
NOTE, that both targets and lease lines will be available to plot and can be manipulated in a similar way in the chart properties.
The Well Seeker PRO daily reporting package allows the user to semi-automate the creation of daily drilling reports. Reporting package features are accessed through the reporting toolbar in the database tree, or through the Reporting Toolbar.
Use the navigation tree on the left to view the page for each feature in the Reporting package.
The daily reporting package can produce the following reports:
It is suggested that data is input in the following order to increase input efficiency and reduce the requirement to duplicate data entry. However, this is just a guide and the user can deviate from this sequence should they wish.
Input tool listing into Tool Inventory. This will give the user the option to select these components when creating a BHA, reducing duplicate data entry.
Input/import the BHA for the upcoming run in the Drill String Editor. Once created a BHA can be associated with a time and date window within daily reporting. This allows for sharing of data between Drill String Editor and Daily Reporting, including allocating tool performance and utilisation data.
Confirm/edit Activity Codes, Cost Codes and Phase Codes. These codes can be utilised in the Daily Reporting dialog and when referenced, are used by Well Seeker to generate the relevant KPI data. If the user is interested in reporting this data, it is important that these codes are set correctly at the start of the job.
Input/confirm Shipping Addresses. Shipping addresses can be selected in the shipping ticket dialog.
Fill in the Daily Reporting and Shipping Ticket sections as required.
The user can populate the daily activity section of the daily report directly from the slide sheet. If it is the user’s intention to populate the daily report in this way, then input the drilling data into the Slide Sheet over the relevant 00:00-24:00 time interval. At any time, the user can select Get DDR from Run Sheet within the Daily Reporting dialog, and the daily activity section will be populated automatically with the relevant data from the run sheet.
The Daily Reporting toolbar is an additional toolbar that gives access to the main Daily Reporting Functions. It can be enabled/disabled using the View > Toolbars and Docking Windows menu item.
A plan view gives the user access to the Well Seeker PRO’s powerful array of well planning tools. The planning tools are displayed at the bottom of the plan view and are accessed by clicking on the various radio buttons and edit boxes provided. Once the details for a planning method are entered, the calculate button should be pressed to add it to the grid.
MD INC and AZI can be entered into the grid directly if desired and this will be assumed to be an ADJ MD method. Once a planning method has been used, a solid blue line is displayed under the last line of the method and the parameters used to generate it have the parameters editable in white cells. All other cells are greyed out. Changing one of the planning method cells will force the plan line and all lines below it to recalculate. Deleting a single line of a planning method will result in all lines for the method being deleted.
Saving the plan will force the planned wellbore to be re-calculated. The planned wellbore is interpolated at the currently selected dogleg parameter, defined in the unit set.
The above planning tools are only available when in a plan. If the user accesses the planned wellbore, the grid is not editable and the planning tools will not be displayed.
MD, INC, AZI: Enter a MD, an INC and AZI in the text boxes in the parameters section.
CL, INC, AZI: Enter a CL, an INC and AZI in the text boxes in the parameters section.
INC, AZI, TVD: Enter an INC, an AZI and a TVD in the text boxes in the parameters section.
INC, AZI, DLS: Enter an INC, an AZI and a DLS in the text boxes in the parameters section.
The build / turn planning method is a 3D planning tool in which consecutive surveys have a constant build / turn rate between them. The well path produced by this method is effectively describing a trajectory travelling around a cylinder.
MD / CL: Enter an MD or CL, build rate and a turn rate and click on the “Calculate” button.
INC: Enter a build rate and a turn rate and an INC and click on the “Calculate” button.
AZI: Enter a build rate and a turn rate and an AZI and click on the “Calculate” button.
TVD: Enter a build rate and a turn rate and a TVD and click on the “Calculate” button.
The dogleg tool face method is a 3D planning tool where build rates and turn rates will vary between survey stations depending on the dogleg and tool face setting requested.
MD / CL: Enter an MD / CL, DLS and TFO and click on the “Calculate” button.
INC: Enter a DLS, TFO and an INC and click on the “Calculate” button. The trajectory will be calculated until the required INC is reached. If the INC selected cannot be reached, an error will be displayed.
AZI: Enter a DLS, TFO and an AZI and click on the “Calculate” button. The trajectory will be calculated until the required AZI is reached. If the required AZI cannot be reached, an error will be displayed.
TVD: Enter a DLS, TFO and a TVD and click on the “Calculate” button. If the TVD cannot be reached, an error will be displayed.
TANGENT: There are two methods available for the tangent option:
Tangent – HC (Hold Curve): The HC option draws a tangent section then a curve to hit the target
Tangent – CH (Curve Hold): The Curve Hold draws a curve to line up on the target then a tangent to hit the target
The Curve Hold method allows a larger number of targets to be reached. A NS, EW and TVD value must be entered. This can be done manually or by selecting an existing target. Lastly the DLS of the curve must be selected. If the target cannot be reached with the parameters specified, an error will be displayed. Usually increasing the DLS allows the target to be reached or changing the method from hold curve to curve hold.
POINT: Enter a NS, EW and TVD; this can also be done by selecting an existing target from the drop-down menu. The well trajectory will be turned using the minimum possible dogleg to reach the point. This method describes a constant curve to the target. If the required point is on an existing plan, this can be achieved by selecting plan from the target details section, choosing the relevant plan from the drop-down menu and selecting the appropriate MD. This MD relates to the point on the offset plan and Well Seeker will automatically populate the NS, EW and TVD based on this selected point.
CL: Enter a CL and click on the “Calculate” button.
MD: Enter an MD and click on the “Calculate” button.
TVD: Enter a TVD and click on the “Calculate” button.
VS: Enter a Vertical Section and click on the “Calculate” button
The optimum align function is a powerful tool for lining up on targets at specified inclinations and azimuths. It is particularly useful if multiple targets are to be hit. The trajectory produced is usually a 3D S-shape profile, which can be defined either by specifying two curve sections and a hold or by using two curves. If “Curve Hold Curve” is used, the doglegs for both the curve sections must be specified. For a “Curve-Curve” method, only the dogleg for one of the curves must be entered. If “Balanced” is selected, Well Seeker PRO will attempt to create a profile using the same dogleg for both curves.
When selecting a point to hit, the user can choose any available targets from the drop-down menu or enter the N/S, E/W and TVD values manually using the user defined option. Then select the appropriate optimum align parameters and required dogleg, and enter the desired inc and azi and click on the “Calculate” button
If there are 2 targets and the user requires the plan to “line up” the first target with the second, the second target can be selected from the line up drop-down menu. Well Seeker will calculate the tangent inc and azi between the 2 targets and automatically enter these values into the relevant boxes.
It is also possible to line up on an existing plan. When Plan is selected, the user can choose the relevant plan from the drop-down menu and the relevant MD on the plan that they would like to hit. The coordinates and TVD of the point on the plan will be automatically entered and the inc and azi will mirror that particular point on the well plan.
If the optimum align method cannot reach the desired inc and azi at the target point, an error message will be displayed. Usually increasing the doglegs will allow the target to be reached.
If the user has multiple targets to hit, then one way to achieve this is by selecting the “Thread” function in the target details section. No planning method needs to be selected to open the Thread targets dialog; however, the feature utilises the Optimum Align functions when generating plans. Targets are available to select via a drop down menu at the top of the dialog, and the planning method options are selected at the bottom of the dialog.
The 2D well planning tools are designed to allow a well from surface to be planned with a single click. The 2D planning tools have multiple build /drop rates but only one horizontal plane (azimuth). There are two options available: S-Well and Slant Well. The S-Well profile can either be a standard S where the inclination is dropped back to vertical at the target, or a modified S where a specified inclination greater than zero is reached at the target. The slant well has a constant build up rate and a specified kick off point to reach the target.
To use this method, the KOP must be entered (the inclination will be vertical to this point), the DLS of the initial build (BUR 1) and then the drop rate (BUR 2).
The user then has two additional options to choose from, final inclination (Fin Inc) and final hold length (Fin Hold). The user can choose to select none, one or both of these options via the checkbox to the right of the corresponding cell. The final details required are the target NS, EW and TVD. These can be entered manually or by selecting a target from the drop-down menu. If the target cannot be reached with the specified parameters, a warning message will be displayed.
No Checkboxes selected: When the user does not select either the Final Inclination or Final Hold options, the drop section of the plan will stop at the selected target at an inclination of 0° (if this is possible). This will be referenced in the Method Column of the plan as SWELL_OPT1.
Final Inclination Only: When the user enters only the final inclination, the drop section of the plan will stop at the selected target at the desired inclination (if this is possible). This will be referenced in the Method Column of the plan as SWELL_OPT2.
Final Hold Only: When the user enters only the final Hold, the plan will hit the target at 0° inclination (if possible) and will have lined up at the given hold distance entered prior to hitting the target. In the below example, the plan has lined up at 0° inclination 100m MD before hitting the target. This will be referenced in the Method Column of the plan as SWELL_OPT3.
Final Inclination & Hold: When the user enters both values, the plan will hit the target at the desired inclination (if possible) and will also include a hold section prior to hitting the target. In the below example, the plan has lined up at 5° inclination 100m MD before hitting the target. This will be referenced in the Method Column of the plan as SWELL_OPT4.
To use this method, the KOP must be entered (the inclination will be vertical to this point) and the DLS of the build (BUR 1). The final details required are the target NS, EW and TVD. These can be entered manually or by selecting a target from the drop-down menu. If the target cannot be reached with the specified parameters, an error message will be displayed.
The Well Seeker Pro Database is divided in to 8 different levels all of which have their own properties associated with them.
The Well Seeker PRO top level is simply the Well Seeker PRO Database. This contains all the user data and has NO properties associated with it. By default, the Well Seeker PRO database is called Well_SeekerDB.mdb which is located in the install directory. This is the default database which Well Seeker PRO initially looks for. Multiple Well Seeker PRO databases can be created and can be named differently from the default. Ensure that the database is created in a directory which the user currently has write permissions to.
The user will not be able to create a new database with Well Seeker PRO in the Program files directory, or directly to the C:\ root directory. Once created, a new database can be moved to the desired location using Windows Explorer.
A new database can be created from the “File->Create new database” option. Once created, the new database will not be automatically connected to; this must be done from the “File->Select Database” option. When Well Seeker PRO closes, it will store the file path of the last database it was accessing in the setupWS.ini file and attempt to reconnect to it on start-up.
Should Well Seeker PRO fail to connect to the database specified in the “setupWS.ini” because the database has been deleted, or moved, or the database name has been changed, then the user will receive a warning and will be asked if they wish to manually select a database. The user can then browse the computer and select the relevant database they wish to access.
Operator represents a specific oil company or business unit and contains settings which will affect all levels and all fields and wells below it.
Name: This is the name of the operator and any change made here will be reflected in the database tree.
Contact: A contact for the operator can be entered. This is for information purposes only.
Address: The address of the operator; this is for information purposes only.
Primary Logo: The logo is the default logo which can be displayed on reports. Only .bmp files are supported, and the logo can be selected by clicking the select logo button which brings up a standard Windows select file dialog.
Secondary Logo: This is an additional Logo which can be added to plots and reports allowing the user to show their company logo as well as the clients.
Set Password: At every level in the database structure, the user has the option to lock the properties via a “Locked” checkbox at the bottom left of each dialog. When locked, the user is unable to edit any of the inputs at this level without the relevant password. This option opens the set password dialog, where the user can enter and where necessary change their chosen password.
Scan Method: This is the anti-collision scan method used for all proximity scans. Well Seeker PRO currently supports three options:
3D Closest Approach: Finds the closest approach of the offset well in 3D space. To visually represent the scan, imagine an ever-expanding sphere with its origin at the point of interest on the reference well. The point on the offset well which first touches the sphere is the point of closest approach. A 3D scan will always find the point of closest approach regardless of which direction the offset well is coming from.
Travelling cylinder North / High side: The scan describes a circular plane perpendicular to the wellbore. To visualize, imagine a 2D disc with its origin at the point of interest on the reference well with its axis perpendicular to the well bore. The point at which the offset well intersects the disc is the point of closest approach. Travelling cylinder scans can miss or be very late to detect offset wells which approach near perpendicular to the reference. This scan should be used with caution or when backed up by an accompanying 3D closest approach scan. The difference between the North / High side scans is simply the reference angle used when determining the direction of the offset well. High side references the offset well to the high side of the current well bore, this can lead to confusing outputs as at low inclinations the high side of the wellbore can swing dramatically between survey points. North referenced travelling cylinder scans use North (True or Grid, whichever is selected at Field Level) as the reference where the high side angle is calculated and the current wellbore azimuth is added.
Horizontal Scan: Finds the point of closest approach of the offset well by scanning horizontally on the reference wells current TVD. This scanning method is rarely used as it can miss potential collisions.
Error Surface: This describes the error surface used to calculate separation or clearance factors in Well Seeker PRO. It currently supports three methods:
Circular Conic: Uses the ellipse semi major axis as the error radius regardless of which direction the wells are approaching from. This can lead to very pessimistic AC results.
Pedal Curve: This method describes the errors as an ellipse (elliptical conic); however, it uses the pedal radius in separation factor calculations. This is the radius of the ellipse perpendicular to the line of closest approach.
Combined Covariance: This method uses the same error radius as elliptical conic; however, the total error radius is calculated by root sum squaring (RSS) the two radii. This method should be used only with errors at 2.79 Sigma and above.
Ellipsoid Scalar Expansion: This method describes errors as a 3D ellipsoid. The reference and offset ellipsoids are then expanded using the same scale factor until they come into contact. The scale factor required to achieve this is the separation factor. Ellipsoids that are already touching before scalar expansion have a SF of 1. Ellipsoids that overlap before scalar expansion have a SF of <1. This method requires greater CPU power than the other methods.
Warning Type: This defines the type of warnings which Well Seeker PRO will flag on the anti-collision report and it has two settings:
Error Ratio: This is also known as “Clearance factor” or “Separation Factor”. It is calculated by dividing the centre to centre distance by the summed radius of the EOU. The error surface defines the total error radius.
Well Seeker uses the Pedal Curve Method when calculating the reference and offset error radius values.
Rules Based: This allows the user to define an Anti-collision rule which can be either an Error ratio or a depth ratio. In the Type column the user can select from the following options:
Error ratio: This is just a normal separation factor-based rule and works in the same way as the Error Ratio option above. Note the user does not need to enter anything in the Max Radius cell for this rule.
Depth ratio: This option takes the current measured depth and multiplies it by the ratio. This value is then the C-C distance warning limit at that given depth. If the C-C distance at this depth is less than this value Well Seeker will flag this with a warning. The user can set the max radius to limit this; however, the user does not need to enter a maximum radius for the rule to work. For example, if the depth ratio was set at 0.1 at a measured depth of 100m, the rule would be a minimum C2C of 10m. Anything less than this would be flagged.
Min C-C Distance: This option lets the user select a radius, which acts as the C-C distance warning limit along the entire well and if you end up with a C-C distance less than the radius entered, you will get a warning. This differs from the above since the radius is fixed and does not change based on depth. Note the user does not need to enter anything in the Ratio cell for this rule.
It is possible to combine these AC rules. This allows the user to include multiple warnings when running the AC calculations. For example, the user could have the standard error ratio warnings selected at the same time as the minimum centre to centre. In the above, if the warnings on lines 1-4 were selected, this will flag the various levels for SF and also flag any point with a C-C of less than 5m/ft (whatever the selected units are)
The warning types are defined in the warning type grid and can be named however the user desires and there can be an unlimited number of rules which can be evaluated. The warning grid will change depending on whether rules based, or error ratio is selected.
Errors evaluated @ Sigma: Sets the number of standard deviations used when calculating separation factor in anti-collision reports and real time AC. Default value is 2.
Errors output @ Sigma: This is the number of standard deviations used for calculating the size of errors ellipses for anti-collision reports, real time AC and for displaying on plots. For separation factor calculations, the software used the above Errors Evaluated @ Sigma setting. Default value is 2.
Increasing the sigma value increases the size of error ellipses, but also increases the probability that the wellbore is inside the error ellipse. The below table represents the confidence levels for one, two- and three-dimensional Gaussian distribution with equal standard deviations in all directions.
When using the Pedal Curve method (as is used within Well Seeker), the probability of collision is effectively broken down into a one-dimensional problem, therefore at 1 sigma there is a 68% chance that the well path will reside inside the EOU and this increases to 95% at 2 sigma. This value also determines at what sigma level the error ellipse sizes are displayed on the error ellipse report. The below picture shows a visual representation of the pedal curve around an ellipse of uncertainty.
Casing: This option allows the user to decide if the casing radius is to be considered in the anti-collision calculation.
Include Casings: If “yes” is selected in the casing option, this option defines how the casing radius is used in the separation factor calculation.
If “Add” is selected, the radius is added to the error radius and survey bias.
If “subtract” is selected, the casing radius is subtracted from the centre to centre distance.
It should be noted for top hole sections where the centre to centre distances are small, this option can give a negative centre to centre distance.
Errors Calculated From: This option allows the user to define where the EOU calculation starts from. For land wells and jack-ups, “surface” is usually selected. However, for deep water wells, “mudline” is usually selected.
TC Plot Safety Factor: This option allows the user to apply a safety factor to the errors which are generated in the travelling cylinder plot. With a value of one entered here (default), the ellipses will generate as per normal i.e. no safety factor applied, which means touching the No-Go line on the plot effectively equates to a SF of 1. If the user enters a value of for example 1.2 here, the ellipses displayed on the TC plot will be 20% larger, 1.5 will be 50% larger etc, giving the safety factor required. Note: This value cannot be anything less than 1
Warnings Grid: This allows the user to define the warning rules which will be displayed on anti-collision reports. If “Error Ratio” is selected as the warning type, the grid will display “Name” and “Ratio” Columns. The name will be displayed on an anti-collision report if the separation factor is less than or equal to the value in the “Ratio” column. If “Rules Based” is selected as the warning type, the grid will have the additional columns “Type”, “Max Radius” and “Active”. The type column specifies if the value entered in the “Ratio” column is a clearance factor or a depth ratio. The “Max Radius” Column only applies to depth ratios and specifies the maximum radius to be added to the total error radius. The “Active” column specifies if the rule will be evaluated or not.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
Customer is a Directional Company: Changes the Directional Company field in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the Daily Reports (see section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel) to Operator. This can be used if the ‘operator’ is in fact the directional drilling company, and they want their daily reports to reflect this.
WPTS Separation Rule: Toggling on the Use WPTS Separation Rule option on instructs the software to use the WPTS Separation Rule to calculate the separation factor value when running anti-collision. It also allows the user to set the value for the two additional parameters used in the calculation – the surface margin and project ahead uncertainty.
Surface Margin: The surface margin term increases the effective radius of the offset well and accommodates for small, unidentified errors. It also defines the minimum acceptable slot separation during facility design and ensures that the separation rule will prohibit the activity before nominal contact between the reference and offset wells, even if the position uncertainty is zero. Default value is 0.3m or 0.984ft.
Projection Ahead Uncertainty: Quantifies the 1 standard deviation uncertainty in the projection ahead of the current survey station. The size of this value represents uncertainties such as directional sensor to bit distance, survey interval, angular control from the BHA, drilling experience in the current formation and the operator’s general attitude towards risk. Default value is 0.5m or 1.64ft
The field level represents a specific oil or gas field on which the operator can have any number of facilities. Fields define the mapping grid to be used when calculating geographic coordinates.
Field Name: Name of the field which will be displayed in the database tree.
Mapping Grid: The dropdown box sets the co-ordinate reference system (CRS) which will be used to convert between grid co-ordinates, local co-ordinates and latitude/longitude values. Clicking on the mapping grid button will open the CRS Editor. See section 8.3.1 – CRS Editor below.
Azimuth North Reference: Either true north or grid north can be used as the azimuth reference. It is assumed that the azimuths entered into survey grids will be referenced to the radio button selected here.
Local Coordinate Reference: This defines the datum for local coordinate systems. If “Well Centred” is selected, the well head location is defined as the well’s datum and all wells will start at local coordinates zero north and zero east. If “Facility Centred” is selected, the centre of the facility is used as the common reference. This option is commonly used for facilities with multiple slots.
Apply Scale Factor: If this option is selected, the scale factor defined in the CRS will be used to calculate map co-ordinates from local co-ordinates. This is the ratio between measured distances on the map compared to measured distances on the ground as a result of distortion of linear scale associated with mapping a spherical surface (the earth) onto a plane. Note that this option does not affect the local coordinates, only the map coordinates (Northing and Easting’s).
Show Map: This extends the existing dialog to include a Google Maps section. This will show the location of the positional data entered and can be toggled between map and satellite view. The map can also be zoomed in and out using the – and + buttons. This map location will only be accurate if the CRS selected uses WGS 84, as this is what Google Maps utilises.
Show Field Ref Point on Report: When selected, the field reference point coordinates will be included in the Field data box of any report generated. If unchecked (default) then these coordinates will not appear in the field data box in the reports.
Field reference point: This is the reference location used for the field. The reference point can be entered either as a latitude & longitude or as a map coordinate. This is defined by selecting the “Grid North / East” or “Lat / Long” radio button. The grid convergence for the field reference point is displayed in the edit box marked “Grid Convergence”. This value will be applied when converting between grid north and true north.
System vertical datum: This is datum which all TVDs stored in the database will be referenced to. This is usually either mean sea level “MSL”, lowest astronomical tide “LAT” or some other user specified value. If a value other than MSL is selected from the combo box, the elevation above or below MSL must be entered. A positive value indicates that the datum is above mean sea level and a negative value indicates it is below it.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
The CRS Editor is where the user can create, delete, and edit their available Co-Ordinate Reference Systems. Well Seeker Pro comes with several of the most common CRS installed by default.
The available CRS are listed on the left-hand side of the window. The user can filter the list by entering a name into the Search box at the top of the window. The CRS Editor is controlled using the toolbar at the top of the window:
Save Changes: Saves any changes made in the CRS Editor.
Add new CRS: Creates a new blank CRS titled ‘New CRS.’
Export CRS: Exports the selected CRS as .json file, allowing it to be sent to other users.
Import CRS: Imports a CRS from a .json file and adds it to the list.
Enable CRS: Closes the CRS Editor and sets the currently selected CRS as the one in use in the Field Properties/Geo-mag Calculator.
Edit CRS: Allows the currently selected CRS to be edited. The CRS details on the right of the window will no longer be greyed out and the user can edit each line by left clicking on it.
Parameters highlighted in GREEN are required and affect the output - Care should be taken to enter the data correctly:
Name: This can be anything you want as it has no impact on any of the calculations. In Well Seeker, the naming convention is the System / and then the Map Projection, and it is recommended that this convention is followed.
Area of use: Description of which part of the earth this CRS references and has no effect on any of the calculations.
Datum: This is just text and does not directly affect any calculations.
System: This is just text and does not directly affect any calculations.
Ellipsoid: The name of the Ellipsoid. This does not have any effect on the output.
Semi Major Axis (m): This is the Equatorial Radius of the Ellipsoid in metres and is required for the CRS to work.
Semi Major Axis (UOM): This is the equatorial radius of the ellipsoid in the units of measure which the CRS is using and is optional.
Units of Measure: This is a drop-down menu option, and you can choose from 7 options.
Inverse Flattening: Also called ‘1/f’, this is the inverse Flattening of the Ellipsoid and is required for the CRS to work.
Map Projection: This is just text and does not directly affect any calculations.
Projection Type: This is a drop-down menu, and you can choose from 4 options – TM, 1SP (Standard Parallel), 2SP or STEREO.
False Easting: A linear value applied to the origin of the x-coordinates. Usually applied to ensure all x-values are positive.
False Northing: A linear value applied to the origin of the y-coordinates. Usually applied to ensure all y-values are positive.
Latitude of Origin: This should be input as a decimal.
Longitude of Origin: This should be input as a decimal.
Scale Factor: Ratio between measured distance on the map and on the ground.
1st Standard Parallel: This information will be required if you select 1 SP or 2 SP from the Projection Type Drop down menu.
2nd Standard Parallel: This information will be required if you select 2 SP from the Projection Type Drop down menu.
A facility represents either an offshore platform or a specific onshore site. A facility is usually a collection of wells or for a subsea well, the facility could represent the subsea template or well head location.
Name: The name of the facility which will be displayed in the database tree.
Lease /Hard Lines: The user can select to have lease / hard lines show at all levels within the Targets dialog. On will pre-select the lease / hard lines to be displayed from Field to Actual / Plan levels. Off will pre-select the lease / hard lines to be displayed from Field to Facility level only. When either on or off is selected, the user should then select apply. If there are a lot of lease lines and / or a lot of plans and surveys, then it may take a moment for Well Seeker to process this selection.
Show Map: This extends the existing dialog to include a Google Maps section. This will show the location of the positional data entered and can be toggled between map and satellite view using the Satellite checkbox. The map can also be zoomed in and out using the – and + buttons. This map location will only be accurate if the CRS selected uses WGS 84, as this is what Google Maps utilises.
Facility reference point: This is the reference location used for the facility. For an offshore platform, this is usually platform centre and for an onshore facility, this is usually the centre of the site. The reference point can be entered either as a latitude & longitude or as a map coordinate. This is defined by selecting the “Grid North / East” or “Lat / Long” radio button. The grid convergence for the facility reference point is displayed in the edit box marked “Grid Convergence”. This value will be applied when converting between grid north and true north.
Facility Location Uncertainty: The horizontal and vertical uncertainty of the facility entered at 1 sigma. This value is used for EOU calculations.
Rig Directions: Provides a space where the user can leave a note on the location of the rig.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
Clicking the templates button gives the user access to the templates dialog.
A template represents a number of surface locations from which wells can originate. Templates are usually used for offshore platforms or subsea wells. A facility can have more than one template associated with it which can be selected from the “Select template” combo box.
The name template is displayed in the name edit box and this name can be changed by editing it here. The slot prefix is the prefix which will be applied to all slots created and be how the slot name is displayed.
A new template can be created by clicking the “Create New” button and changes to the current template are saved by clicking the “Apply” button. The current template will be deleted by clicking the “Delete” button. Templates cannot be deleted if one or more slots are in use by the well level.
The centre of the template describes the offset of the centre of the template to the facility reference point in terms of North / South and East / West co-ordinates.
The template geometry is defined by selecting the appropriate radio button in the geometry section.
Rectangular templates are defined by parameters in the rectangle section of the dialog.
The offset from the template centre is defined by the first two edit boxes and this represents the offset from the centre point defined in the template centre section. The number of rows and columns are defined in the “Rows” and “Columns” edit box and the clockwise rotation of the template is defined in the rotation section. The X and Y spacing is defined by the X and Y spacing boxes and the slot numbering can be specified from the drop-down menu.
Circular templates can be defined by the parameters in the Circle section.
If single slots are selected from the geometry section, then the slot locations and names are entered in the grid at the bottom of the dialog.
If rectangular or circle geometries are selected, the slots can be converted to single slots by clicking the convert to single slot button. It should be noted that this operation is not reversible.
The well properties dialog defines the properties for a single well head. If the well is an exploration well, the well head location may be the same as the facility location.
Name: The name displayed in the database viewer tree
Description: A description of the well, used only for information
Well head Location:
Slot: If a template has been created at facility level, the well head location can be assigned to a slot from the template. Select the slot from the drop-down list. If the slot is moved the well will move along with it.
Offset from facility: The well head location is defined by an offset from the facility reference point. This is specified in local coordinates.
Map: The map coordinates of the well head.
Geographic: The lat / long of the well head.
Grid Convergence: The grid convergence at the well head location.
Scale Factor: The scale factor of the CRS selected at field level
Location Uncertainty: The vertical and horizontal location uncertainty of the well head entered at 1 sigma.
Depth Reference: The depth reference grid allows the user to enter the elevation and details of multiple depth datums which have been used. A depth datum usually represents a drilling rig and if multiple rigs have been used to drill the well, they can be entered here. The datum name is simply the name which will be displayed on reports and when selecting the depth datum at actual well level. The elevation is the elevation above the system vertical datum of the depth reference. It is this value which is added on to all TVD’s stored in the database. Once the elevation is entered the specifics of the datum can be entered in the section to the right of the grid.
If the datum is for an offshore rig, the first edit box will be the water depth. If the well is onshore, the edit box will represent the elevation of ground level above MSL.
If “offshore” is selected, the user can enter the well head elevation above MSL. If “subsea” is selected, the elevation below MSL can be entered. This is the distance between the top of the well head and MSL.
Show Map: This extends the existing dialog to include a Google Maps section. This will show the location of the positional data entered and can be toggled between map and satellite view using the Satellite checkbox. The map can also be zoomed in and out using the – and + buttons. This map location will only be accurate if the CRS selected uses WGS 84, as this is what Google Maps utilises.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
An actual well represents a well that has already been drilled or is currently being drilled. Whenever an actual well is created, an actual well bore is automatically created below it. The actual well bore represents the actual well path and is defined by the survey program. The actual wellbore can only be deleted if the actual well is deleted.
Name: The name displayed in the database viewer tree
Description: A description of the wellbore used only for information purposes.
Tolerance Circles: Tolerance circles are for visual reference only. The radius of the inner and outer tolerance circles can be added here. These can be displayed in a plan or spider plot by selecting their inclusion in the chart properties dialog. The default colours for the inner and outer tolerance circles can be adjust in the ‘Plots>Chart Defaults’ menu.
Vertical Section: Details of the vertical section (used for section plots and vertical section calculations) are entered here. The VS azimuth and the origin point must be entered in order to correctly calculate vertical section. When Bottom Hole Location is selected, the program will draw a straight line from the VS origin point to the last survey point and the azimuth of this line will be used as the vertical section. It is important to note that if this is selected, the vertical section will change every time a new survey is added.
Depth Reference: A list of depth references available to the well can be selected from the drop down menu. The list represents all the datums entered at well level. If the depth datum is changed and there are currently surveys entered, a dialog will appear asking if you wish to change the TVDs or preserve them. It should be noted that changing a depth datum with surveys already entered can seriously corrupt your database and a backup should be made prior to this.
Magnetics: The magnetics grid allows the user to calculate magnetic data for the well location using any of the models available in the Well Seeker PRO magnetics directory. Data entry is as per the Geo Mag calculator, the only difference is the active check box indicating which magnetics data will be used for EOU calculations.
Survey Program: The survey program specifies how the actual well bore is constructed and which parts of the various surveys will be used to create the actual well bore. Select the survey from the survey drop down box and enter the depths to use. The ipm’s (Instrument Performance Models) are selected at survey level and are automatically populated here based on the selected survey.
Sidetrack Details: If the well is a side track, the “side track” check box should be clicked in order to enable the side tracking options. Select the parent well from the drop-down list (which will be a list of all actual wells currently underneath the well) and enter the sidetrack depth. Click the “Create sidetrack” button and this will update the survey program with all the surveys up to the sidetrack point from the parent well. It should be noted that all previous survey program lines will be deleted. Once the sidetrack is created, all the surveys and the survey program will have access the surveys in the parent well bore.
Errors Start: If the "side track" check box has been checked, the user may choose where anti-collision ellipses begin when running anti-collision between the sidetrack wellbore and it's mother bore. If ST Point is selected, the error ellipses for both will start at the sidetrack kick-off point, with an initial magnitude of zero. If Surface is selected, the error ellipses will start at surface as normal. If the well was imported from a Compass EDM file, this option will match the choice in the EDM file. Otherwise, it will default to ST Point. Note that this only applies to anti-collision run between the mother bore and the sidetrack. For anti-collision scans against any other well or plan, the errors will start from surface.
Export Geomag Data: Exports the geomagnetic data as a document. Select the line in the ‘Magnetics’ section that you want to export the geomagnetic data for. Then select the report format as ‘PDF’ or ‘Excel’ from the drop-down menu, before selecting ‘Export’ to generate the report.
Force Landing: By default, the BR to Land column data is calculated from the principal plan. Force landing allows the user to enter a TVD, INC and AZI to project to, without having to make an alteration to the principal plan. This information only affects the BR to Land column data.
Force Colour: Selecting this option and choosing a colour will ensure that this actual well will always be displayed in this colour in all the plots. This supersedes any colour options for this actual well in the ‘Chart Properties’ dialog.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
A planned well represents a well that is being planned. Whenever a planned well is created, a planned wellbore is automatically created below it. The planned wellbore represents the planned well path and is an interpolated listing of the plan. The planned wellbore can only be deleted if the planned well is deleted.
Name: The name displayed in the database viewer tree
Description: A description of the wellbore used only for information purposes.
Set as principal: If this option is selected, a red box will appear around the plan icon in the database viewer. Only one principal plan per well can be selected per well. This plan will be used in the distance to calculations in the survey view.
Tolerance Circles: Tolerance circles are for visual reference only. The radius of the inner and outer tolerance circles can be added here. These can be displayed in a plan or spider plot by selecting their inclusion in the chart properties dialog. The default colours for the inner and outer tolerance circles can be adjust in the ‘Plots>Chart Defaults’ menu.
Vertical Section: Details of the vertical section (used for section plots and vertical section calculations) are entered here. The VS azimuth and the origin point must be entered in order to correctly calculate vertical section. When Bottom Hole Location is selected, the program will draw a straight line from the VS origin point to the last survey point and the azimuth of this line will be used as the vertical section. It is important to note that if this is selected, the vertical section will change every time a new survey is added.
Depth Reference: A list of depth references available to the well can be selected from the drop-down menu. The list represents all the datums entered at well level. If the depth datum is changed and there are currently surveys entered, a dialog will appear asking if you wish to change the TVDs or preserve them. It should be noted that changing a depth datum with surveys already entered can seriously corrupt your database and a backup should be made prior to this.
Magnetics: The magnetics grid allows the user to calculate magnetic data for the well location using any of the models available in the Well Seeker PRO magnetics directory. Data entry is as per the Geo Mag calculator the only difference is the active check box indicating which magnetics data will be used for EOU calculations.
Survey Program: The survey program specifies how the planned wellbore is constructed and which ipm’s will be used to create the planned wellbore. Select the plan or survey from the drop-down box and enter the depths to use. If the line entered is part of the current plan, the IPM can be selected from the drop-down menu. If the plan is a sidetrack, then the survey program will populate from surface to the sidetrack depth with the relevant motherbore details and the ipm for these lines will not be editable.
Sidetrack: If the plan is a sidetrack, the sidetrack check box should be clicked in order to enable the side tracking options. Select the parent well from the drop-down list (which will be a list of all actual and planned wells currently underneath the well) and enter the sidetrack depth. Click the ”Create sidetrack” button and this will update the survey program with all the surveys up to the side track point from the parent well. It should be noted that all previous survey program lines will be deleted. Once the sidetrack is created, all the surveys and the survey program will have access the surveys in the parent well bore.
Errors Start: If the "side track" check box has been checked, the user may choose where anti-collision ellipses begin when running anti-collision between the sidetrack plan and it's mother bore. If ST Point is selected, the error ellipses for both will start at the sidetrack kick-off point, with an initial magnitude of zero. If Surface is selected, the error ellipses will start at surface as normal. If the plan was imported from a Compass EDM file, this option will match the choice in the EDM file. Otherwise, it will default to ST Point. Note that this only applies to anti-collision run between the mother bore and the sidetrack. For anti-collision scans against any other well or plan, the errors will start from surface.
Tie-On: This section specifies where the plan will tie on to:
Surface: The plan will tie on to the well head location
User defined: The user can enter the MD INC AZI NS EW and TVD the plan will be tied on to.
From survey / plan: This option is only available if the plan is a side track, select the survey file of plan to tie on to and type the MD which you wish to use. The INC AZI NS EW and TVD will be interpolated from the survey or plan selected.
Export Geomag Data: Exports the geomagnetics data as a document. Select the line in the ‘Magnetics’ section that you want to export the geomagnetics data for. Then select the report format as ‘PDF’ or ‘Excel’ from the drop down menu, before selecting ‘Export’ to generate the report.
Force Color: Selecting this option and choosing a colour will ensure that this plan will always be displayed in this colour in all of the plots. This supersedes any colour options for this plan in the ‘Chart Properties’ dialog.
Survey Tools: Clicking on this button will open the Survey Tool Editor. If the user selects a row in the survey program by clicking on its row number and then clicks on Survey Tools, they can use the ‘select IPM’ button in the Survey Tool Editor to choose an IPM for that row.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
A survey represents a set of surveys taken with a single survey tool. A wellbore is made up of multiple surveys.
Name: The name displayed in the database viewer tree.
Tie-On: This section specifies where the plan will tie on to:
Surface: The survey will tie on to the well head location
User defined: The user can enter the MD INC AZI NS EW and TVD the survey will be tied on to.
From survey: Select the survey file to tie on to and type the MD which you wish to use. The INC AZI NS EW and TVD will be interpolated from the survey or plan selected. If the well is a sidetrack then surveys from the parent well are also available.
Survey Instrument: Select the error model which will be used to calculate the EOU for all surveys stations in the survey file. Clicking the “Survey Tools” button will bring up the survey tool editor. The user can also select an error model by opening the survey tool editor, selecting a model and clicking on the ‘select IPM’ button.
Locked: This checkbox allows the user to lock all the editable cells in the dialog. If NO password has been entered at Operator level in the set password section, then the user can freely select to lock and unlock the dialog. If a password has been added at Operator level, then the user must enter the relevant password to both lock and unlock the dialog.
There are 11 charts available in Well Seeker PRO:
Section View
Plan View
3D View
Travelling Cylinder
Ladder
Separation Factor
Spider
Azimuth Comparison
Inclination Comparison
Dogleg Comparison
Live View
All charts are a graphical representation of a reference data set. Which data set the chart is referenced to depends upon the actual well, survey, plan or planned wellbore that is currently open and selected by the user when the plot is opened.
Right clicking anywhere on the chart area brings up the chart menu which allows the user to customize the chart as they wish. Grid options, legend style and position as well as font size can be changed. The Maximize option allows the user to make the chart full screen size, pressing the escape key returns the chart to normal size. The customization dialog allows the user to control all aspects of the chart including the series colours, chart colours and various other styles.
The export dialog allows the user to print the chart directly to a PDF, jpg or other file format.
Additionally, the charts can be edited in the Chart Properties dialog. For more information on the chart properties dialog see section 6.7 - Chart Properties.
Many of the settings that can be edited in the chart properties dialog can be set by the user so that they are already selected by default upon opening a chart. For more information on this feature and additional chart functions see section 6.6 – Plots Menu.
A side slice view of the well, plotting TVD vs Vertical Section on a specific vertical section azimuth. The
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
A top down representation of the well, plotting North/South vs East/West local coordinates.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Displays a 3D representation of the well path, plotting North/South vs East/West vs TVD.
The chart can be rotated and panned around the centre point using the mouse with the left mouse button depressed. The centre point can be adjusted by holding Shift and using the mouse with the left mouse button depressed.
The plot is zoomed in and out using the + and – keys or the mouse scroll wheel. The { and } keys can be used to decrease or increase the well line thickness as required.
The 3D chart has a slightly different right click chart menu to the other charts.
The legend display, rotation animation settings and plotting method settings can all be adjusted from the 3D chart menu.
The Center on survey and Fly down well options will zoom and centre the 3D plot on the reference well when selected. The Center on survey option will allow the user to manually move along the wellbore points using the ↑ and ↓ keys. The Fly down well option will move through the wellbore points automatically at a speed that can be manipulated by using the ↑ and ↓ keys and be paused and restarted using the Spacebar. In this state the chart displays the reference well point coordinates data and the up/down, left/right and centre to centre distance in relation to the currently selected offset well. The North Ref Distances option will toggle this distance between high side reference and north reference. The offset well can be individually toggled through all the currently displayed offset wells using the < and > keys.
If necessary, the ← and → arrow keys can be used to toggle the displayed reference well to any of the currently displayed offset wells. This allows the user to change the reference well without having to come out of the chart, open a different well and then open a new chart.
When Centre on survey or Fly down well is selected the Show closest approach option can also be selected, displaying a line between the reference and offset well and labelled with centre-to-centre distance between them at that point in the reference well.
The Go to bottom of well and Go to top of well will send centre the view at the bottom or top of the well, respectively.
A specialised anti-collision plot that shows the relative distance and bearing of offset wells. For more information on the travelling cylinder scan method see section 8.2 - Level 2: Operator.
To correctly use a TC plot, the user must have Travelling Cylinder or Travelling Cylinder North selected at operator level as the scan method.
Travelling Cylinder if HS is the reference.
Travelling Cylinder North if North is the reference.
TC Plot Safety Factor: This option allows the user to apply a safety factor to the errors which are generated in the travelling cylinder plot. With a value of one entered here (default), the ellipses will generate as per normal i.e. no safety factor applied, which means touching the No-Go line on the plot effectively equates to a SF of 1. If the user enters a value of for example 1.2 here, the ellipses displayed on the TC plot will be 20% larger, 1.5 will be 50% larger etc, giving the safety factor required. Note: This value cannot be anything less than 1.
The centre of the plot is the centre point of the reference well. The selected offset wells will display over the entire depth range of the individual offset wells, unless a depth filter has been applied. In the TC plot, errors are generated by adding the semi major errors from the reference and the offset and displaying this around the offset.
The user should set the reference to either north or high side in the Chart Properties, depending on the chosen scan method. The default reference can be selected in the Anti-Collision Settings, which is accessed via the Tools menu.
The depth range over which the TC plot displays offset well data can be selected by the user in the Anti-Collision Settings dialog. For more information regarding the anti-collision settings dialog see section 6.4.5 – Anti-Collision Settings.
The plot can be zoomed by dragging an area with the left mouse button. Right clicking brings up the chart menu and clicking Undo Zoom resets the chart. Pressing the Z key also resets the zoom.
Shows the relative centre to centre distances of the offset wells to the reference vs measured depth.
The plot can be zoomed by dragging an area with the left mouse button. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
A zoom window will appear at the bottom of the chart to allow the user to select which part of the chart they wish to view once zoomed in.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Shows the separation factor vs measured depth of the reference well for all selected offset wells.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
A zoom window will appear at the bottom of the chart to allow the user to select which part of the chart they wish to view once zoomed in.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Similar to the plan view chart, except that TVD slices can be taken by using the + and - keys to increase / decrease the depth viewed. TVD slice depth can also be manually entered in the Chart Properties.
A top-down representation of the well, plotting North/South vs East/West local coordinates.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Shows azimuth vs measured depth.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the azimuth comparison chart can only be accessed via Plots > Azimuth Comparison.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Note that when zooming in this plot it is recommended to uncheck the “Preserve Aspect Ratio” option in the Chart Properties, otherwise the plot will distort when zoomed in.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Shows inclination vs measured depth.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the inclination comparison chart can only be accessed via Plots > Inclination Comparison.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Note that when zooming in this plot it is recommended to uncheck the “Preserve Aspect Ratio” option in the Chart Properties, otherwise the plot will distort when zoomed in.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
Shows dogleg vs measured depth.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the dogleg comparison chart can only be accessed via Plots > Dogleg Comparison.
The plot can be zoomed by scrolling the mouse wheel. When zoomed in the ↑, ↓, ← and → keys scroll the view in the corresponding direction. The view can also be scrolled my left clicking and dragging the mouse. The zoom can be reset via the context menu or by pressing the Z key.
Note that when zooming in this plot it is recommended to uncheck the “Preserve Aspect Ratio” option in the Chart Properties, otherwise the plot will distort when zoomed in.
Right clicking on the chart brings up the Context Menu and double left clicking anywhere on the chart opens the chart properties dialog.
This option can be accessed via the database navigator menu or directly from the Daily Reporting dialog. Note that when accessing via the database navigator menu, the Activity Codes option will only be available to select from Operator Level.
These codes are used in the Daily Activities section of the Daily Reporting package and utilised for KPI Tracking Graphs and automatic calculations of Drilling Parameter and Drilling Summary data when selected.
The active check box allows the user to select which of the activity codes are active. Any codes which are selected as active will be available from the dropdown menu in the Daily Reports section. If the code is not selected as active, it will NOT be available to select in the Daily Reports. Note: Caution should be taken de-activating codes after a well has started. If a code is in use in the Daily Activity grid and the user de-activates it, it will be replaced with no selection.
The toolbar at the top of window contains additional functions:
Save: Saves any changes made.
Activate all codes: Sets all currently entered activity codes to active.
De-activate all codes: De-activates all currently entered activity codes.
Reset to defaults: Sets the activity codes to match the values entered in the Code Defaults, if any have been entered. If not, this will reset all the activity codes the Well Seeker factory default. See section 6.4.14 –Code Defaults.
Lock: If the associated Operator Properties have been locked, the Activity Codes will also be locked. Clicking on the Lock button will unlock them. If a password has been set in the associated Operator Properties, it will need to be entered before the window can be unlocked.
Most activity codes are arbitrary and do not have any specific function beyond allowing the user to differentiate between different activities in reports and KPI results. They can be added, removed, and modified without affecting the Daily Reporting package. However, some codes do have special functions which the user should be aware of:
2K (Rotary Drilling) and 2J (Slide Drilling): Any code beginning with the number 2 is recognised by the software as drilling activity, allowing it to record drilling hours, distances and differentiate between slide and rotation. 2K and 2J are the most important of these codes as they are the default codes used to populate the Daily Activity grid using data from the Slide Sheet. The user should make sure that 2K and 2J are always present and active in the Activity codes.
Codes starting with 5: Codes starting with the number 5 are recorded as circulating hours by the software. The exception to this rule is code 10C (Reshoot, surveys, cycle pumps, downlink tools), which will also count as circulating time.
Codes starting with 8: Codes starting with the number 8 are highlighted in red in the Daily Activity grid and are counted as rig non-productive time (NPT).
Codes starting with 26: Codes starting with the number 26 are highlighted in red in the Daily Activity grid and are counted as directional non-productive time (NPT). By default, there are no 26 codes included so the user will need to add them manually if they wish to record directional NPT.
3Z (Sidetrack): Allows the user to change the current hole depth recorded in the daily report. The only other way to do this is with a drilling activity (code 2), which counts as drilling time. 3Z allows the user to change the hole depth (e.g., when pulling back to a sidetrack KOP) without affecting recorded drilling time.
Note that Well Seeker Pro uses the code for these activities to recognise them. All code descriptions are arbitrary and can be changed without affecting Daily Reporting functions.
This option can be accessed via the database navigator menu or directly from the Daily Reporting dialog. Note that when accessing via the database navigator menu, the Cost Codes option will only be available to select from Well Level.
This tool is used to define cost items, that can then be used in the Daily Costs tool in the Daily Reporting package and in the AFE Designer.
Description: A description of the Item or Service
Cost Code: Appropriate cost code. This will be something made up by the user.
Value: The unit cost of the item or service
Cost Schedule: User can choose the following options from a drop-down menu: Fixed, Daily, Hourly, Variable or Footage
Group: Appropriate group code. This allows the user to see which costs are associated with the same group.
Type: User can choose the following options from a drop-down menu: Tangible, Intangible or Consumable
Vendor: Enter the vendor’s name. This allows the user to group costs by vendor.
The cost code profile can be exported as a .mdb file using the Export button, and the Import button can be used to import cost code profiles.
If any cost codes have been sent to the well using the Bid Sheet tool, the name of the bid will appear in the Linked Bid box.
The Search box can be used to filter the results table. The Update from remote button allows the user to pull in cost codes from a bid sheet on a remote server.
To access bid sheets the operator must exist on both the local and the remote server. The user must also have recently connected to the remote server via the Real Time Data Exchange or Remote Data Fetch.
The Set to Default button will set the cost codes to match the values entered in the Activity / Cost Code Defaults (See section 6.4.14 –Code Defaults).
The Import from Oasis button allows the user to import cost codes from an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Once complete, the data entered in this section will be available to select in the Daily Costs section of the Daily Reports and also in the AFE Designer.
The window can also be locked using the checkbox in the bottom left. When locked it is not possible to change any of the data in the window. If a password has been set in the associated Operator Properties, it will need to be entered before the window can be unlocked.
This option can be accessed via the database navigator menu or directly from the Daily Reporting dialog. Note that when accessing via the database navigator menu, the Phase Codes option will only be available to select from Operator Level.
These phase codes are used in the Daily Activities section of the Daily Reporting package and utilised for KPI Tracking Graphs and the Depth v Time Chart. Phases can be created and edited here.
The Save button will save any changes made to the Phase Codes table.
The Set to Default button will set the phase codes to match the values entered in the Code Defaults (See section 6.4.14 –Code Defaults). If no defaults have been set, this button will reset the phase codes to the Well Seeker factory default.
If the associated Operator Properties have been locked, the Phase Codes will also be locked. Clicking on the Lock button will unlock them. If a password has been set in the associated Operator Properties, it will need to be entered before the window can be unlocked.
The drill string editor is used to construct the BHA and drill string for each drilling section. The information here is used in Daily Reporting and is required for the Slide Sheet.
The Drill String Editor window is divided into five parts: The toolbar, the top dialog, the lower dialog, Assembly Details and Component Properties.
The toolbar contains all the functions required to operate the Drill String Editor. These functions can also be accessed using the dropdown menus at the top of the dialog.
Save: Saves any changes made to the BHA in the Drill String Editor.
Select BHA to Print: Opens the Select BHA dialog which allows the user to select which BHAs they want to print BHA and Performance reports for. The selected reports will then be exported together in a single document. The user can choose the format of the document using the drop down box at the top of the dialog.
Print Tally Book BHA: Exports the selected BHA to an Excel report in a compact format designed to be attached to a DD/MWD operator’s tally book.
Print BHA Excel: Exports the currently selected BHA as a BHA report in Excel format.
Print BHA Inverted Excel: Exports the currently selected BHA as a BHA report in Excel format, but with the BHA arranged so that the bit as at the bottom of the page.
Print PDF BHA: Exports the currently selected BHA as a BHA report in PDF format.
Print PDF BHA Inverted: Exports the currently selected BHA as a BHA report in PDF format, but with the BHA arranged so that the bit as at the bottom of the page.
Print all BHAs Excel: Exports all BHAs in Excel format. All reports will be contained in a single document.
Print all BHAs PDF: Exports all BHAs in PDF format. All reports will be contained in a single document.
Single page BHAs: If this option is toggled on, BHA reports will be formatted so that they fit onto a single A4 page.
Print all Performance Reports Excel: Exports all performance reports in Excel format, contained in a single document.
Print all Performance Reports PDF: Exports all performance reports in PDF format, contained in a single document.
Add New: Creates a new blank BHA in the Drill String Editor.
Delete: Deletes the currently selected BHA. Note that if the BHA is selected in a Daily report a warning message will appear advising “The BHA is currently in use with Daily Reports or Engineering and cannot be deleted”. If a BHA has a run sheet associated with it, then deleting the BHA also deletes the run sheet.
Exit: Closes the Drill String Editor window.
Undo: Reverses the last action performed.
Redo: Reverses the last undo action performed.
Copy BHA: Duplicates the currently selected BHA and adds it to the bottom of the list of existing BHA’s.
Insert from Inventory: Opens the Insert From Inventory dialog, allowing the user to import a component from the Tool Inventory into the BHA. See Section 13.5.8 – Insert from Inventory for more information.
MWD Probe Order: Opens the MWD Probe Order dialog box. This dialog allows the user to set which tools are in the MWD string. Tools can be renamed in the MWD column and can be included or exclude from the string by toggling the Included check box on or off. The order of the tools can be changed using the Move Up and Move Down buttons.
This can then be displayed on the BHA report if the Include MWD section in BHA option is toggled on.
Use IADC Bit Grading: If this option is toggled on, the Grade In and Grade Out fields for the Component Properties of the Bit are edited using the Bit Grading dialog box. Click on the ‘…’ button next to the Grade In or Grade Out fields to open the dialog.
The Bit Grading dialog complies with the IADC bit grading system. Use the drop-down box on each row to fill in each part of the IADC code. If the bit is new, the user can simply click on the New checkbox.
If this option is toggled off, then the Grade In and Grade Out fields can be filled in manually.
Include MWD section in BHA: Toggles the MWD probe string section on in the BHA report. The string can be configured using the MWD Probe Order option.
Component catalogue: Opens the component catalogue. If the Insert function is used in the component catalogue, it will apply to the row selected in the Assembly Details table when the component catalogue was opened. See section 13.5.9 – Component Catalogue.
Material grades catalogue: Opens the material grades catalogue. See Section 13.5.10 – Material Grades Catalogue.
Pipe class catalogue: Opens the pipe class catalogue See Section 13.5.11 – Pipe Class Catalogue.
Use Drop Down: These options control how certain fields in the component properties can be edited. When toggled off, the fields can be edited manually. When toggled on, they are edited using a dropdown box that contains a pre-defined list. This is to avoid spelling discrepancies between different users, as many of the fields are used in the Well Analytics module.
The connections field is used in all component types. The bit make field is used in the Bit component type. The motor make, motor lobes, bend angle and stages fields are used in the Motor component type.
Import Engineering BHA: Imports a BHA exported from the Innova Engineering software package. Note that this will overwrite the currently selected BHA.
Import BHA: Allows the user to import BHA’s exported from the Drill String Editor in Well Seeker. Using this function will cause a dialog box to appear asking the user to open the desired .mdb export file. Once the file is selected the Import/Export window will open allowing the user to select the desired BHAs to be imported. Once selected, the BHA’s will be added on to the end of the current list of BHAs in the Drill String Editor.
Export BHA: Opens the Import/Export window, allowing the user to select which BHAs they want to export. The exported BHAs will be exported as a .mdb file.
Export BHA in Engineering Format: Exports the currently selected BHA in a .bha format, allowing the BHA to be imported into the Innova Engineering software package.
Export current BHA to Oasis: Exports the currently open BHA, and all its associated drilling performance data to an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Export all BHAs to Oasis: Exports all BHAs in the currently open Drill String Editor, along with all their associated drilling performance data to an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Edit Data: Opens the Performance Report dialog. See Section 13.5.12 – Performance Report.
Performance Report: Prints the performance report for the current BHA in Excel format. To print the performance report in other formats, open the performance report dialog using the Edit Data option.
The main user interface is where the user constructs the drill string and records details for each component. It is split into 4 different sections which are discussed in detail in the below sections.
The upper dialog allows the user to select any available BHAs from the dropdown menu on the left. The BHA can be given a unique title in the Description Box. The data added to the Rig, BHA #, MWD # and Mud Weight cells are included when printing the BHA.
The lower dialog is used to define the Depth In/Out and the Date In/Out for the selected BHA. These values can be updated manually, or they can be automatically filled in by opening the Performance Report and clicking on Get Data From DDR. This will only work if the BHA has been used in the daily activities of the well’s Daily Reporting.
The lower dialog also displays the buoyed BHA weight and weight below jar (if a jar is included in the assembly). Note that these weights are when the assembly is vertical. The formation cell is for the user to input the target formation, and this is a searchable input in the Well Analytics tool. Any text in the formation and comments section will be displayed in the BHA report when printed.
The Assembly Details grid allows the user to construct the drill string, allowing it to be included in various reports in the Drill String, Performance Report and Daily Reporting Modules. Different types of assembly can be modelled including drilling, casing and liner assemblies and data entry is identical for each.
The grid can be manipulated by right clicking on a row to open the Assembly Grid Context Menu:
Copy: Copies the selected row.
Paste: Replaces the selected row with the copied row.
Delete: Deletes the selected row.
Insert: Inserts a new row into the assembly above the selected line.
Move Up / Move Down: Moves the selected line up or down in the list. Line 1 cannot be moved and should always contain the lowest component in the BHA, for example the bit.
Insert from Catalogue: Automatically fills in the component information in the Assembly Details. See Section 13.5.9 – Component Catalogue for more information.
Insert from Inventory: Opens the Insert From Inventory dialog. See Section 13.5.8 – Insert from Inventory for more information.
New lines can be added opening the Context Menu and selecting the Insert command. Lines can also be deleted by selecting the desired row, opening the Context Menu and selecting Delete. Lines in the grid can be rearranged using the Move Up and Move Down buttons in the Context Menu, except for the bit, which must always remain at the top in row 1.
It is recommended that the first thing the user does when filling in a new line is select the component type in the Component column. Once a component type has been selected on any given line, the user can then either manually enter the relevant component details, or by right clicking on the line, select to insert the component from the Catalogue or from the Inventory. Selecting to insert opens either the component catalogue or the insert from inventory dialog and allows the user to choose the appropriate component and insert the relevant details automatically at the click of a button.
The following describes each column in the Assembly Details table:
Component: Before any other details can be entered the component type must be selected from the dropdown list. The type of component that is selected will determine the properties displayed in the Component Properties section. A list of component types and their properties can be found in Appendix E – Drill String Editor Component Properties.
Description: A description of the component entered. This is only used in the generation of reports and plays no part in any of the calculations
OD: The outer diameter of the component in inches or mm
ID: The inside diameter of the component in inches or mm
TJ OD: If the component has a tool joint (such as drill pipe) enter the OD in inches into this column.
TJ ID: If the component has a tool joint (such as drill pipe) enter the ID in inches into this column.
Weight: This is the weight per unit length of the component, this must be entered by the user and is used for BHA weight calculations.
Cumulative Weight: The cumulative weight of the drill string components up to that point. This is automatically calculated.
Length: The length of the component in the system units.
Cumulative Length: The cumulative length of the drill string components up to that point. This is automatically calculated.
Non-Magnetic: Select this option if the component is made of non-mag material. This is currently for reference only.
The Component Properties section is where the user can include extra information for each component in the drill string. Selecting a row in the Assembly Details section will display the Component Properties for the component in that row. The Component Properties section will not populate until the selected row has a component type selected.
The details entered into the Component Properties are featured in the BHA reports, performance reports and daily reports. A list of component types and their properties can be found in Appendix E – Drill String Editor Component Properties.
The Insert From Inventory dialog allows the user to import drill string components from the Tool Inventory into the Drill String Editor. It can be accessed by selecting the desired row in the Assembly Details and right clicking, or from the Edit menu.
The Insert From Inventory dialog contains all tools currently in the Tool Inventory for the well. See Section 13.6 – Tool Inventory for more information on adding tools to the Tool Inventory. If the Component field in the Assembly Details has already been selected, the dialog will be filtered so that it only shows components of that type.
The user can select an item from the dialog and click the Insert button to add it to the drill string. If the other Assembly Details fields have been recorded in the Tool Inventory, then they will also be imported. The SN, Cnx Top, Cnx Bottom, Make and Model fields will be imported into the Component Properties.
The Component Catalogue can be accessed via the Catalogues menu or by clicking on the ‘Component Catalogue’ icon in the toolbar. Right-clicking in the Assembly Details grid and selecting ‘Insert from Catalogue’ will also open the component catalogue.
The Component Catalogue contains a list of drill string components with pre-defined properties that can be used in the Assembly Details section. The desired component can be searched for using the dropdown menus at the top. Clicking the Insert button will add the selected component to the BHA list. Note that the insert function will only work, when the catalogue has been opened via the assembly details grid.
Custom components can be added, removed and edited using the Add, Delete and Edit buttons. Components which come with the standard install can also be edited and removed if desired. The Reset button will revert the catalogue back to its originally installed state. Finally, the component catalogue can be imported and exported to and from other users.
The material grades catalogue allows the user to define the minimum yield and ultimate yield of the common types of material grade used in drill pipe and casing. The user can also create new material grades if required. The material grade for a drill string component can be selected in the component properties section of the main Drill String Editor window for drill pipe, heavy weight drill pipe and casing / liner only. These material grades are used for calculations in the Engineering module.
The pipe class catalogue allows the user to define the wall thickness of the different classes of drill pipe. The catalogue comes with 5 default classes but also allows the user to create new drill pipe classes if required. The pipe class for a drill string component can be selected in the component properties section of the main Drill String Editor window for drill pipe and heavy weight drill pipe only. These material grades are used for calculations in the Engineering module.
The Performance Report allows the user to generate a BHA performance report, using the data from the Drill String Editor and information pulled from the Daily Reports.
Once the details of the Performance Report have been filled in, the Print Performance Report option can be used to export the report in Excel format. In the case of a motor failure, the Print Motor Failure option will export an Excel format report with details specific to the motor. Equivalent reports are available for the MWD string.
The Get from DDR button can be used to automatically fill in the Performance Report using information from the Daily Reports dialog. Any fields that correspond to data available from the DDR will be populated when the Get from DDR button is selected. The values imported will be the corresponding run data from the Daily Reports dialog covering the selected BHA.
After the Get from DDR button has been clicked once, the user can use the Auto Update BHA Hours on save and Auto Update Motor Report Parms options in the Report Options menu of the main Daily Reports window to keeps these values updated automatically. Note that Auto Update Motor Report Parameters requires Auto Update BHA Hours to be toggled on before it will work.
The toolbar contains all the functions required to operate the Performance Report. These functions can also be accessed using the dropdown menus at the top of the dialog.
Print Motor Performance Report Excel/PDF: Prints a performance report in Excel or PDF format. Contains run data, motor data, drilling parameters, bit data, mud data, sensor offsets, dogleg performance, BHA details and failure information. In addition, it contains any comments from the operations at time of incident, troubleshooting performed, surface findings and additional comments boxes. Pictures can be attached using Add Images in the Tools menu.
Print Motor Incident Report Excel: Prints a motor incident report containing motor information from the performance report and drill string editor. It also contains extra fields that can be filled in with more detailed motor information and comments on any failures. Pictures can be attached using Add Images in the Tools menu.
Print Motor Failure Report Excel: Prints a motor failure report containing personnel, run information, mud information, bit information, motor description and drilling activity. It also contains the troubleshooting, surface findings, and evaluation comments boxes.
Additionally, it contains spaces to document the incident type, disassembly observations, damaged components, and additional observations. Pictures can be attached using Add Images in the Tools menu.
Print Motor Chargeback Report PDF: Prints a performance report in PDF format with the Chargeback comment box added to the bottom.
Print MWD Performance Report Excel/PDF: Prints a MWD performance report in Excel or PDF format. Contains run data, MWD tool serial numbers, MWD plug in data, drilling parameters, bit data, mud data, sensor offsets, dogleg performance, BHA details, MWD post run data, MWD tool order, magnetics, and failure information.
In addition, it contains any comments from the operations at time of incident, troubleshooting performed, MWD incident info, MWD shop findings and MWD comments boxes. Pictures can be attached using Add Images in the Tools menu.
Print MWD Failure Report Excel: Prints a MWD failure report containing personnel, run information, mud information, bit information, motor description and MWD information. It also contains the troubleshooting, surface findings, shop findings, and evaluation comments boxes.
Additionally, it contains spaces to document the incident type and additional observations. Pictures can be attached using Add Images in the Tools menu.
Save: Saves changes to the performance report.
Exit: Closes the performance report window.
Add Images: Allows the user to attach images to the performance report, that will then be included at the bottom of any motor report that is printed.
To add an image the user should browse for it by clicking on the folder icon, then clicking on the add button. Once added, any image can be rotated by selecting it in the list and clicking rotate image or deleted by clicking on delete image.
Get Data From DDR: This option automatically will populate the main, mud properties and MWD sections with data taken from the Daily Reporting (DDR) module for the well. Note that this will overwrite any data already entered into these sections. For this option to produce accurate data the DDR must have fluids, parameters, costs and activity data entered for every day the BHA is in use. The BHA must also have pick up (6O) and lay down (6P) activities correctly assigned in the daily activity section of the DDR.
Attach Files: The attach files dialog allows the user to attach external files to the performance report. These files will remain with the report if the well or reporting data is exported.
To add a file the user should first select the category that they want to assign the file to in the dropdown box. These categories are arbitrary and are to help with sorting large numbers of files. The user should then browse for the file by clicking on the folder icon and then clicking on the add button. Once added, any file can be open by selecting it in the list and clicking open file or deleted by clicking on delete.
Get MWD surface system data: If available, this option will retrieve all serial numbers of MWD surface equipment from the Tool Inventory. They will then be available as dropdown boxes in their appropriate fields in the MWD section. For more information on the Tool Inventory see Section 13.6 – Tool Inventory.
Get Min Avg Max Values: If this option is toggled on, the Get Data From DDR button will import in and display the minimum, average and maximum values for the drilling parameters during the BHA run. They will be displayed in a min/avg/max format. If this option is toggled off, only the average value will be displayed.
The main section of the Performance Report contains the following fields:
Depth In: The start depth for the BHA run. This is entered in the main Drill String Editor window and is not editable in this dialog. This field is updated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Depth Out: The end depth for the BHA run. This is entered in the main Drill String Editor window and is not editable in this dialog. This field is updated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Total Drilled: The distance between the Depth In and Depth Out. This is automatically calculated and is not editable in this dialog.
Time In: The time in 24hr format that the BHA went below the rotary table on the Date In. The Date In field can be found in the main Drill String Editor window. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Time Out: The time in 24hr format that the BHA returned above the rotary table on the Date Out. The Date Out field can be found in the main Drill String Editor window. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
BRT Hrs: The total time that the BHA spent below the rotary table. This is automatically calculated and is not editable in this dialog.
Slide Drilled: If there was any sliding during the BHA run, the user can record the distance slid here. This is a manual input. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Rotary Drilled: The distance drilled while rotating on bottom. This is automatically calculated by taking away the Slide Drilled distance from the Total Drilled distance.
Drilling/Circulating Hrs: The total number of hours spent drilling, both rotary and sliding. This value is automatically calculated from the data entered in the DDR.
Rotary Hrs: The number of hours spent rotating on bottom. This value is automatically calculated by taking the Slide Hrs away from the total Drilling Hours.
Slide Hrs: If there was any sliding during the BHA run, the user can record the sliding hours here. This value is automatically calculated from the data entered in the DDR; however the user can manually edit this cell if they wish, which in turn will change the rotary hours.
Slide ROP: The average Rate of Penetration during sliding. This is automatically calculated by dividing the Slide Drilled distance by the Slide Hrs.
Rotary ROP: The average Rate of Penetration during rotation on bottom. This is automatically calculated by dividing the Rotary Drilled distance by the Rotary Hrs.
Average ROP: The average Rate of Penetration over the whole run, including both rotation and sliding. This is calculated automatically by dividing the Total Drilled distance by the Drilling Hrs.
Date In: Date BHA is in hole. This is entered in the main Drill String Editor window and is not editable in this dialog. This field is updated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Date Out: Date BHA is out of hole. This is entered in the main Drill String Editor window and is not editable in this dialog. This field is updated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
# Stalls: The number of motor stalls recorded during the BHA run.
Stall Pressure: The average standpipe pressure at the time of stalling.
Dry Ream Time: The number of hours spent reaming while not circulating.
Wash / Ream Time: The number of hours spent reaming while circulating.
Average Temperature: The average downhole temperature during the BHA run.
Max Temperature: The maximum downhole temperature during the BHA run.
BHA Cost: The total cost of the well while the BHA is in hole. This is pulled automatically from cost data in the DDR when the Performance Report is opened.
State/Province/Region: The state, province or region of the well in which this BHA was run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Country/County/AFE: The county or local area of the well in which this BHA was run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Job #: The job number for the well. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
API Job #: If the well has an API job number assigned, it can be entered here. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Rig: The name of the rig. This is automatically populated with the Rig input from the main page of the Drill String Editor.
Lead DD: The name of the Lead Directional Driller that ran this BHA. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Co Man: The name of the Company Man on the rig. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Flow Rate: The average drilling mud flow rate during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
WOB: The average Weight on Bit whilst on bottom during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
WOB Slide: The average Weight on Bit whilst sliding on bottom during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
RPM: The average Rotations Per Minute of the string whilst drilling during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
On Btm Press: The average On Bottom Pressure during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Off Btm Press: The average Off Bottom Pressure during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
On Btm Tq: The average On Bottom Torque during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Off Btm Tq: The average Off Bottom Torque during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Plan DLS: Average planned dogleg severity for the run.
Act DLS: Average actual dogleg severity during the run.
Max DLS: The highest recorded actual dogleg severity during the run.
PU: The average surface hook load recorded while pulling the BHA out of hole.
ROT: The average surface hook load recorded while rotating off bottom.
SO: The average surface hook load recorded while running the BHA in hole.
Min Temp: The maximum downhole temperature during the BHA run.
Cost Per Ft/Cost Per Hr: The cost per foot and cost per hour during the BHA run. This is calculated automatically from cost data in the DDR.
The Mud Properties section contains the following fields:
Type: The type of drilling mud used during the BHA run. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
600, 300, 200, 100, 6, 3: If viscometer shear rate test results are available, they can be entered in these fields. The numbers represent the RPM of the viscometer when the shear rate was measured. These fields are auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
PV: The mud Plastic Viscosity. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
YP: The mud Yield Point. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Weight: The mud density. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Temp: The temperature of the mud during drilling. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Solids %: The % volume of the mud made up of solids. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Sand %: The % volume of the mud made up of sand. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Chlorides: The chloride content of the mud. This field is auto populated if the Get from DDR radio button is selected.
Oil/Water: The relative proportions of oil and water in the mud, in %.
The MWD section contains the following fields:
MWD Plug In/Out Date/Time: These fields are automatically taken from the component properties of the MWD tool in the drill string editor. They can be refreshed by closing and reopening the performance report window.
MWD Plug in Hrs: Calculated automatically from the above values.
Circulating Hrs: This value is automatically calculated from the data entered in the DDR and can be refreshed by clicking the Get Data from DDR button.
Tests: The MWD section allows the user to record the results of various pre- and post-run MWD tests. They are filled as PASS or FAIL using the dropdown box in each field.
Pulse Amp On/Off Bottom: The recorded amplitude of MWD telemetry pulses during drilling when on and off bottom.
Good Detection: A PASS or FAIL dropdown box allowing the user to record whether pulse detection was good during the BHA run.
Day/Night MWD Engineer: The MWD personnel on shift at the well site during the BHA run. This can be updated from the DDR personnel section by clicking the Get Data from DDR button.
Required Non-Mag Above/Below: The length of non-magnetic drill collar required above and below the MWD directional sensor to ensure there is no magnetic interference distorting azimuth measurements.
Min/Max Temperature: The minimum and maximum recorded temperature whilst drilling. Can be updated by clicking the Get Data from DDR button.
Serial Numbers (SN): The serial numbers of the MWD surface equipment used at the well site. If these have been recorded in the Tool Inventory then they can be imported into the MWD section by clicking on the Get MWD Surface System button. The fields will then become dropdown boxes containing the serial numbers of available equipment.
EDR: The make of the electronic drilling recorder used on the rig to record drilling parameters, etc.
Transducer Type: The make of the Standpipe transducer
Receiver Type: The make of the surface system data receiver.
Hookload sensor: The serial number of the hookload sensor. Available serial numbers can be pulled in from the Tool Inventory by clicking on the Get MWD Surface System button.
Surf Sys Ver/Type: The make and version of the surface system.
Int/Ext Offset: The internal and external (scribe line) toolface offset between the MWD and the motor highside.
Laptop 3/4 SN: The serial numbers of spare laptops. Available serial numbers can be pulled in from the Tool Inventory by clicking on the Get MWD Surface System button.
BU Receiver SN: The make of the backup surface system data receiver.
BU Surface System Type: The make of the backup surface system.
DD/MWD 1/MWD 2 Verification: The personnel that signed off on MWD reports delivered to the operator.
Survey/TF sequence: The programmed mode of the MWD for recording surveys and toolfaces.
X/O Angle: The inclination at which the MWD stops recording magnetic toolfaces and starts recording gravity toolfaces.
The Failure Information section allows the user to record any failures that occur during the BHA run. The Failed check box must be checked before any other features become available. The other features allow the user to record if the failure required a BHA trip and how many hours passed before the failure. The comments box can be used to record any other information relevant to issues or failures during the BHA run.
BHA Component: The BHA component that failed can be selected here. Note that components will only be available for select if they have been given a serial number in their Component Properties in the Drill String Editor.
MWD Tool: If a particular MWD tool component was the cause of the failure, this dropdown box can be used to select it. Note that components will only be available for selection if they have been assigned serial numbers in the Component Properties of an MWD tool in the Drill String Editor.
Motor Cat: Allows the user to specify any parts of the motor that failed.
MWD Cat: Allows the user to specify any parts of the MWD that failed.
NPT (Non-Productive Time): The non-productive time caused by the failure can be entered here and will be displayed in the Performance Report.
Hrs to failure: The time in hours between running in hole and failure can be recorded here and will be displayed in the Performance Report.
Trip for failure: Checking this box will indicate in the Performance Report that a BHA trip was required because of the failure.
LIH (Lost in Hole): Checking this box will indicate in the Performance Report if the BHA was lost in hole.
EDR Review: This should be checked if data from the electronic drilling recorder on the rig has been gathered.
Acct MTBF: This should be checked if the failure needs to be included in calculating the Mean Time Between Failure statistics for the failed component.
Surface failure: Checking this box will indicate in the Performance Report that the failure occurred at surface.
Closed: Checking this box will indicate in the Performance Report that the failure has been resolved.
Comment Boxes: The Operations at Time of Failure, Trouble Shooting Performed, Surface Findings, Shop Findings and Evaluation boxes can be used to make comments about the failure. These comments will be displayed in the Motor Failure Report and the Performance Report.
The Performance Data and Additional Comments sections can be used to record if there were any failures during the BHA run, the reason for POOH and any miscellaneous information.
Motor Failed: Check this box to indicate if there was a motor failure. This will also check the ‘failed’ box in the Failure Information section to allow the user to enter details of the failure.
MWD Failed: Check this box to indicate if there was an MWD failure. This will also check the ‘failed’ box in the Failure Information section to allow the user to enter details of the failure.
Catastrophic Failure: Check this box to indicate that there was a sudden and complete failure of any component during the BHA run.
Unplanned Trip: Check this box to indicated that the BHA was pulled out of hole for an unplanned reason, such as BHA failure.
MWD OOS: This should be checked if the MWD was operated Out Of Specification. For example, in downhole temperatures it was not rated for.
RSS Failed: Check this box to indicate if there was a RSS failure.
Reason POOH: This dropdown box can be used to record the reason the BHA was pulled, which will appear in the Performance Report.
Additional Comments: This section can be used to record any miscellaneous information that the user deems relevant. The user can enter any relevant information regarding the run in this section and this can be included in the EOWR.
MWD Comments: Can be used for general comments on the MWD performance that will be included in the MWD performance report.
MWD Failure Information: Can be used to describe any MWD failures and will appear in the MWD performance and failure reports.
MWD Shop Findings: Can be used to describe the results of investigation in the workshop and will appear in the MWD performance and failure reports.
Chargeback: Can be used for comments that will be included in the motor chargeback report.
The Daily Reporting section of Well Seeker allows the user to create daily reports for a given well. The Daily Reporting tool is only available for selection at the Actual Well level.
The user can access all features of the daily reporting module via either the menus, the toolbar or the main user interface itself. The figure below details the functions of the DDR toolbar. All the options available via the toolbar are also available from the various menus at the top of the page.
Add daily report: Creates a new daily report.
Delete report: Deletes the currently selected report.
Last report: Selects the last daily report.
First report: Selects the first daily report.
Export cost data to Oasis: Exports cost data to an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Save: Saves any changes to the daily report.
Reload Reports: Updates all daily reports. This is most useful when accessing an SQL database which is being regularly updated from the field.
Print Motor Yield Report: Prints a motor yield report for any or all of the BHAs for the well. The user can select which BHA they want to print and the report format. Drilling parameters can be included by clicking on the check box.
Print BHA: Prints the BHA which is assigned to the daily report being displayed in the main user interface at the time.
Print DDR: Prints the currently selected daily report as an Excel file.
Print Company Mans Report: Prints the currently selected daily report as a Company Mans Report in Excel format. Turn on Show Company Man Report Options in the Report Options menu to activate the parts of the daily report interface that are used in the Company Mans Report.
Print Cost Reports: The Print Cost Reports submenu gives the user access to all cost related reports.
The Print Cost Reports Submenu contains the below items:
Print Daily Cost: Prints the daily cost associated with the selected Daily Report as an Excel file.
Print Well Cost: Prints ALL the daily cost information for the actual well as a single Excel file.
Print Invoice Date Range: Allows the user to print versions of the Well Cost (Standard Invoice), Grouped Invoice and Cost Tracking report that are restricted to a specified date range.
The user should enter the desired date ranges in the table. The Print checkbox can be used to enable or disable the selected range. The user should then select the report type and file format from the dropdown boxes and select Print to print the report. The Save button will save the entered settings.
Print Field Invoice Grouped: Prints a field invoice, where all associated individual costs are grouped together. If for example on a 10 day well the same cost appears each day (operating @ $1,000), all of these would be grouped together with the date range and the total cost ($10,000). Note, only costs which are entered over consecutive days are grouped together. In a situation where there is a day, or several days where a given cost does not appear, then an additional line will be added to the report.
Print Cost Tracking: Prints a report that lists all cost codes for the well, and then marks on which days they were used.
Print Filtered Cost Report: Prints a Well Cost report that can be filtered to only show the cost codes that the user wants.
The user should select the cost costs that they wish to include and then click the Print button to print the report.
The Search box can be used to filter the results table. The Update from remote button allows the user to pull in cost codes from a bid sheet on a remote server.
To access bid sheets the operator must exist on both the local and the remote server. The user must also have recently connected to the remote server via the Real Time Data Exchange or Remote Data Fetch.
Print Tool and Personnel Tracking: Prints an excel report that lists all items in the Tool Inventory and the DD and MWD personnel for the well. The report will show which days the tools were in hole and the personnel were on site. It also totals up the number of days each tool was in hole and on locations, and totals the number of days each personnel member was on site.
Print EOWR: Prints an End of Well Report in Excel format. The user can select what data they wish to be included in the EOWR via the Report Options menu.
Print Tool Utilization: Prints a tool utilisation report in Excel format. The tool utilisation report lists every BHA component used in the well, along with the circulating hours, drilling hours, BRT hours and the runs in which each component was used. Note, that only tools with a serial number entered in the component details section of the relevant BHA will be included in this report.
Print Shipping Ticket: Opens the Shipping Ticket dialog, from which a shipping ticket can be setup and printed. See Section 13.8 – Shipping Ticket for more details.
Print Slide Sheet: Prints the slide sheet in excel format for the BHA selected in the currently active daily report.
Print RVDS Slide Sheet: Prints the RVDS slide sheet in excel format for the BHA selected in the currently active daily report. This slide sheet is not associated with the standard slide sheet and requires a separate license to access.
Print Personnel Utilization: Prints a personnel utilization report including Name, Position, Date and time of arrival and departure and total days / hours on site.
Print PDF Reports: Allows the user to print PDF versions of the above reports. It also gives quick access to PDF versions of reports found in other reporting modules such as the performance reports from the Drill String editor. Additionally, the user can print out a Certification Report and a Certified Survey Listing.
Create Morning Report Package: Creates a zipped folder which contains a copy of the current database and an excel morning report. The morning report contains the following tabs: Summary, Well Summary, Personnel Report, Field Invoice, Grouped Invoice, Tool Inventory, Tool Utilization, Depth vs Time, Activity Summary chart, Phase Summary chart, Footage per Day chart, Footage per Phase chart, Survey Report, all Daily Reports, all BHA’s, all BHA Performance Reports, all Daily Cost Reports.
Report Colours: Allows the user to select the background colour for all excel reports generated in Well Seeker. This option is linked to the excel report colour option in the Report Manager. When the colour is changed in either of these locations, the other will update to match automatically.
Select Merge PDF File: Allows the user to add an external PDF document to the PDF End of Well Report. User should select the PDF file in the dialog box that opens, and then click on the Open button. The external document will be added to the biggening of the EOWR, after the cover page.
Clear Merge PDF File: If a Merge PDF file has been selected, this option clears the selection.
Exit: Closes the Daily Report Dialog
Pump Data: Opens the Pump Data dialog. See Section 13.4.11 – Pump Data.
Daily Cost: Opens the Daily Cost dialog. See Section 13.4.10 – Daily Costs.
Next Report: Selects the next day’s report from the currently selected report.
Previous Report: Selects the previous day’s report from the currently selected report.
KPI Tracking: Opens the KPI (Key Performance Indicator) Tracking dialog. See Section 13.4.12 – KPI Tracking Graphs.
Depth v Time graph: Opens the Time v Depth dialog. See Section 13.4.13 – Depth v Time graph.
Well Statistics: Opens the Well Statistics dialog. See Section 13.4.14 – Well Statistics.
Tortuosity KPI: Opens the Tortuosity KPI dialog. See Section 13.4.15 – Tortuosity KPI.
Copy Previous Report: Gives the user the option to copy certain information (well data & personnel, Fluids and Drilling Parameters details) from the current report to the next new report when the Add Daily Report button is pressed.
Copy Previous Report Costs: Gives the user the option to copy the daily costs from the current report to the next new report when the Add Daily Report button is pressed.
Report Hours: Allows the user to set the number of decimal places that time in hours is reported to in reports.
Daily Report: Allows the user to select whether to include the following data in body of the Daily Report. Toggling these options on/off will add/remove the relevant items from the daily report when it is printed using the Print Report button. If there is no data available, the section will not be included regardless of whether the section is toggled on/off:
Include BHA: Includes the most recently used BHA for that day. Data for the BHA is taken from the Drill String Editor (13.5 – Drill String Editor)
Include Surveys: The daily report will check the depths in the Daily Activity section against the surveys in the actual wellbore for the well. Any surveys that fall within that day’s drilling will be included in a table.
Include Drilling Parameters: Includes data from the Drilling Parameters section in the DDR main user interface.
Include Pump Data: Adds data from the Pump Data dialog (13.4.11 – Pump Data).
Include Daily Costs: Adds data from the Daily Costs dialog (13.4.10 – Daily Costs).
Include MWD Data: MWD Data is taken from the MWD Parameters dialog (13.4.9 – MWD Parameters) and the Drill String Editor (13.5 – Drill String Editor), specifically the component details of the MWD/LWD component.
Include Sign Off Section: Adds a section at the bottom of the report where the creators and approvers of the report can put their signature.
Show activity description of code in DDR: Toggling this on will cause the Code column in the Daily Activity section to show the full description of the activity code, as opposed to just the code number.
EOWR – The End of Well Report (EOWR) is a collection of other reports from the Reporting module. The EOWR submenu allows the user to select which reports are included in the EOWR report when it is printed using the Print EOWR button in the File Menu.
Note: If the Include Daily Costs, Include Well Costs and Include Cost Tracking options are all turned off, all cost information will be removed from the DDR and the EOWR. This allows the user to sanitize their reports of any cost data if they wsh.
The option Include Section Separators only applies to the PDF version of the EOWR. It adds title pages between each report included in the EOWR.
Date Format: Allows the user to choose between DD/MM/YY and MM/DD/YY (default) date formats.
Location: Select between USA, Canada, and Rest of the World. This toggles the headings in the Well Details section of the Daily Reports Dialog between State and County (USA), Province and AFE (Canada) and Region and Country (Rest of the World).
Additional Daily Report Options: This submenu only applies to Excel format DDRs. It allows the user to add other reports from the Reporting module to the DDR when it is printed using the Print DDR button in the File Menu.
Include Slide Sheet with DDR: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Slide Sheet.
Include Costs with DDR: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Daily Costs.
Include BHA with DDR: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the BHA.
Include Survey Report with DDR: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Survey Report.
Include Inventory with DDR: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Inventory.
Include Tool Tracking: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Tool Tracking report.
Include Depth V Days: When selected, an additional tab will be included in the generated DDR which includes the Depth V Days chart.
Set Default Activity Code / Description: If the user uses the Get DDR from Run Sheet button to populate the Daily Activity Section, Well Seeker will fill in any time gaps with a default activity code and description. The code and description can be edited here.
Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity: With this option selected the Slide Drill Run, Slide Hours Run, Rotary Hours Run, Circulating Hours Run and BRT Hrs will be automatically calculated in the drilling summary section on the main user interface, based upon the Activity selection in the Daily Activity section of the Daily Reports Dialog. The only exception to this is the BRT Hrs, which use the date and time entered in the Drill String Editor and the Performance report as the point which the assembly goes below rotary table. With this option unselected these details can be input manually by the user.
Auto Update Motor Report Params: The Motor Report has a Get Data from DDR function that will pull in the DDR Drilling Parameters from relevant DDRs. Once a Motor Report has been populated this way, turning on the Auto Update Motor Report Params option will keep the Motor Report updated if any of the DDR Drilling Parameters are changed. Note: For this function to work, Auto Update BHA Hours on save must also be toggled on.
Auto Update BHA Hours on save: When selected, this option automatically updates the BRT Hrs, Drlg/Circ Hrs, Rotary and Slide Hrs in the motor Performance Report.
Morning Report Package:
Open email with morning report package: When selected, if the user chooses to Create a morning report package via the file menu, instead of the option to save the zipped folder, Well Seeker will open an email with the zipped folder attached.
Include EOWR as part of ZIP file: Toggling this option on will include an EOWR in excel format in the morning report package zip file.
Include database in package: Toggling this option on will include the currently selected Well Seeker database as part of the morning report package zip file.
Include day gaps in grouped cost report: By default, the Grouped Invoice groups each cost starting from the first day to the last day it is included in the Daily Costs, and ignores any days in between where the cost is not included. Toggling on this option will split costs up to show where a cost has missing days.
Include phase gaps in footage per day: If there is a time gap in the daily reports – for example there is a break in operations so there are a few dates without reports assigned – then by default the Footage Per Day KPI chart will cut the missing days out. If this option is toggled on, the tap gap will be preserved in the chart.
Toolbar Prints PDF Reports: Changes the Print Report, Print Daily Cost, Print Well Cost, Tool Utilization Report, Print Shipping Ticket, Print Slide Sheet and Print EOWR functions on the toolbar to print their reports in PDF format instead of Excel. This also changes their matching functions in the File menu.
Use dropdown list for personnel: If this option is toggled on, the Name fields in the Well Data & Personnel window can be populated using a dropdown box instead of manually entering names into the fields. The dropdown box is populated using the Personnel Details tool. See Section 6.4.18 – Personnel Names and Details for more information.
Use dropdown list for Rig: If this option is toggled on, the Rig field in the Well Data & Personnel window can be populated using a dropdown box instead of manually entering a rig name into the field. The dropdown box is populated using the Rig Names tool. See Section 6.4.20 – Rig Names for more information.
Show company man report options: Toggling this option on will add extra fields to the Fluids section, Drilling Parameters section and the Well Data and Personnel window, which are included in the Company Man’s Report.
Group cost reports by BHA: When this option is toggled on, the Field Invoiced Grouped report will group costs by BHA and date rather than just by date.
Include all BHA’s for 24hr summary: If this option is toggled off, the 24-hour Drilling Summary section in the DDR only shows stats for the most recent BHA. If it is toggled on the 24-hour Drilling Summary section will show all BHAs used that day.
Circ hours includes drilling hours: This option relates to the Total Circulating/BRT hours statistic in the Run Data section of the PDF BHA Performance Report, which is accessed by opening the File menu and selecting Print PDF Reports > Print BHA Performance Report. If this option is toggled on, the statistic shows the Total Circulating and Drilling Hours/BRT hours.
Well Data and personnel: Opens the Well Data & Personnel window. See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel.
MWD Parameters: Opens the MWD Parameters window. See Section 13.4.9 – MWD Parameters.
Drill String Editor: Opens the Drill String Editor. See Section 13.5 – Drill String Editor.
Phase Codes: Opens the Phase Codes window. See Section 13.3 - Phase Codes.
Cost Codes: Opens the Cost Codes window. See Section 13.2 - Cost Codes.
Activity Codes: Opens the Activity Codes window. See Section 13.1 - Activity Codes.
Shipping Addresses: Opens the Shipping Addresses window. See Section 13.7 – Shipping Addresses.
Pipe Tally: Opens the Pipe Tally window. See Section 13.9 – Pipe Tally.
Tool Inventory: Opens the Tool Inventory window. See Section 13.6 – Tool Inventory.
RT Data Exchange: Opens the Real Time Data Exchange window. See Section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange.
Clear Personnel Names: This option will delete all names from the Personnel section in the Well Data and Personnel window for every day in the current Daily Reports window.
Update activity descriptions from slide sheet all reports: Performs the below Update activity descriptions from slide sheet function but for every report in the Daily Reports window.
Update activity descriptions from slide sheet: Updates the description for slide drilling and rotary drilling activities in the current report. Well Seeker will use drilling parameters recorded in the slide sheet to generate a generic description for each row. Note that a BHA must be selected for each row for this function to work.
Check activity against slide sheet all reports: Performs the below Check activity against slide sheet function but for every report in the Daily Reports window.
Check activity against slide sheet: Selecting this option compares the daily activity grid on the selected report with the associated slide sheet. Well Seeker will highlight any discrepancies between the two and the user can then decide if any adjustments need to be made.
Get drilling params from slide sheet all reports: Performs the below Get drilling params from slide sheet function but for every report in the Daily Reports window.
Get drilling params from slide sheet: This option will populate the Drilling Parameters section using drilling parameters recorded in the slide sheet. For this function to work, there must be at least one row in the report that has a BHA selected and the date for the report must be inside the date range of the slide sheet for that BHA.
Highlight Activity Lines: When selected the following lines will be automatically highlighted in the Daily Activity Grid:
Any rotary drilling activity will be highlighted Blue
Any slide drilling activity will be highlighted Green
Picking up or Laying down BHA will be highlighted Yellow
Any repair activity will be highlighted Red
Zero RPM for all slides on slide sheet: This option will set the RPM value to zero for slide records in the slide sheet. Note that this will affect ALL slide sheets that are associated with the same actual well as the daily report, and cannot be undone.
Round Depths: This option will round all Start Depth and End Depth records in the current report to the nearest whole number.
The main user interface is where the user records all the relevant information relating to the day’s activities. It is split into 5 different sections which are discussed in detail in the below sections.
This section can be used to navigate through existing reports. The dropdown box on the left can be used to select the desired report from a list in chronological order. The calendar to the right is used to assign a date to the report. Only one report can be assigned to each date.
Selecting the Calculate button recalculates BRT hours and slide rotate distances from the daily activity entered.
Selecting the Get DDR from Run Sheet radio button will update the Daily Activity section with data which has already been populated in the Slide Sheet for the selected day.
Prior to selecting Get DDR from Run Sheet button select the BHA and Phase in the Daily Activity grid and set the Default Activity Code via the Report Options Menu. Then select the Get DDR from Run Sheet button. This will ensure all imported entries will have the same BHA and Phase as the start row initially, which saves the user manually selecting these for each row. Data will only be populated from the slide sheet that has the same date and legitimate time stamps as the daily report in question.
Any gaps between the end and start time on adjacent rows in the slide sheet will be added in the daily activity section as a separate row, with the activity and description that the user set for the Default Activity Code. For example, in the below slide sheet, Row 1 has an end time of 17:10, and row 2 has a start time of 17:15. This 5 minute gap will be populated in the daily activity section as start time 17:10, end time 17:15, activity 5A: Circulating (in this example this is the activity set as the default). The activity can be edited if required and the time can be further subdivided by right clicking on the row and selecting insert row, if more than one thing happened over this time period e.g. rig repair etc.
This function allows the user to update the daily report from the Run sheet incrementally. For example, the user selects Get DDR from Run Sheet when the run sheet has data populated up to 08:00 on the same day as the daily report in question. From 00:00 – 08:00 the Daily Activity section will populate with the data from the run sheet. The user may wish to make some small changes to the details if they so wish and save these changes in the Daily Reports dialog. The user then updates the slide sheet with data up to 15:00. The user selects Get DDR from Run Sheet and only the additional data from the end of the existing time stamp in Daily Activity to the end of the time stamp in the slide sheet is added to the Daily Activity section. The data previously input from 00:00-08:00 is not overwritten. This allows the user to update their report from the slide sheet throughout the workday and edit any additional data within the Daily Reports dialog. For more information on Slide Sheets see Section 13.10 – Slide Sheet.
Selecting the Get Params radio button will automatically populate the Drilling Parameters section of the main user interface with the relevant data taken from the slide sheet. Well Seeker will use the last selected BHA in the day to draw drilling parameters from.
The Well Status dropdown allows the user to assign one of the following options to the well: N/A, Active, Standby, TD, Complete. These options are searchable in the search database dialog and allow the user to quickly find the relevant wells in the database. This is also a searchable option in the well analytics.
The DD Coordinator and MWD Coordinator dropdown boxes allow the user to assign coordinators to the well, which can then be used in KPI and activity tracking. The available names are taken from the Personnel Details tool. See Section 6.4.18 – Personnel Names and Details for more information.
The Drive Type and MWD Type dropdown boxes allow the user to assign type of BHA/MWD used for that days drilling activity, which can then be used in KPI and Activity tracking.
The DDR Fluids Section can be used to record drilling fluids information for the day, which can then be included in reports.
Type – The type of drilling mud currently in the wellbore e.g. Water based, oil based, fresh water etc.
600, 300, 200, 100, 6, 3 – The Fann dial readings of the drilling mud.
PV – The mud plastic viscosity.
YP – The mud yield point.
Weight – The mud density.
Viscosity – Viscosity of the mud.
Temp – Temperature of the mud
10s Gel – The 10 second Gel strength of the mud.
Solids % - The % volume of the mud made up of solids.
Sand % - The % volume of the mud made up of sand.
Chlorides – The chloride content of the mud.
API Fluid Loss – Filtrate rate of the mud according to the API filtrate test.
PH – The acidity of the mud.
Oil/Water – The % proportions of oil and water in the mud.
The following fields are only available if show company man report options is toggled on in the Report Options menu:
Weight Out: The density of the mud after circulation.
Viscosity Out: The viscosity of the mud after circulation.
WPS: The water phase salinity of the mud.
HTHP: Filtrate rate of the mud according to the HTHP filtrate test.
10m Gel: The 10 minute Gel strength of the mud.
LCM: The lost circulation material of the mud, if present.
LGS: The low gravity solid content of the mud.
MBT: The amount of clay-like material in WBM as measured by an MBT test.
Oil: The proportion of oil in the drilling fluid as a percentage.
Water: The proportion of water in the drilling fluid as a percentage.
ES: The electrical stability of the mud.
Lime: The lime content of the mud.
Calcium: The calcium content of the mud.
PM: The phenolphthalein end point of the mud as measured by a PM test; the amount of acid required to reduce the mud pH to 8.3.
PF: The phenolphthalein alkalinity of the mud filtrate.
MF: The methyl orange alkalinity end point of the mud filtrate. The amount of acid required to reduce the mud pH to 4.3
Liquid: The % volume of the mud made up of liquid.
The drilling parameters can be manually entered by the user or pulled directly from the slide sheet by selecting the Get Params radio button in the report section of the main user interface.
ROP – The average Rate of Penetration.
For the 24hr period this value is calculated by subtracting the 00:00 start depth from the end depth and dividing by the sum of the daily slide and rotary hours.
For the period of the run, this value is calculated by subtracting the start depth run from the end depth and dividing by the sum of the run slide and run rotary hours.
WOB – The average Weight on Bit during drilling.
RPM Surface – The average Rotations per Minute recorded at surface during drilling.
RPM Downhole – The average Rotations per Minute at the bit during drilling. This value is calculated by adding the RPM surface value to the product of the flow rate and the rev/gal value of the motor if there is one present. The rev/gal value of the motor is set in the Drill String Editor. This cell is auto populated.
Flow Rate – The average flow rate. This value is used in the RPM downhole calculation.
SPP On Btm – The average standpipe pressure recorded when on bottom and drilling.
SPP Off Btm – The average standpipe pressure recorded when off bottom.
SPM – The average Strokes per Minute of the mud pumps.
Pick Up Wt – The weight measured when picking up.
Rot Wt – The weight measured while rotating off bottom.
Slack Off Wt – The weight measured when slacking off.
Tq On Btm – The torque recorded while rotating on bottom.
Tq Off Btm – The torque recorded while rotating off bottom.
The following fields are only available if show company man report options is toggled on in the Report Options menu:
SPM 1, SPM2 & SPM3: The average Strokes per Minute of the mud pump 1, 2 and 3.
24hr Summary – A brief description of the activities which took place in the 24-hour period covered by the report.
24hr Lookahead – A brief description of the expected activities in the next 24 hours.
Start Depth Run – The depth at the start of the current BHA run. This is set in the Daily Activity section.
Daily Start Depth – The depth at the beginning of the daily report. This is populated with the value entered in the first row of the Start Depth column in the Daily Activity section.
End Depth – The depth at the end of the daily report. This is populated with the value entered in the last row of the End Depth column in the Daily Activity section.
Drilled Day/Run – The distance drilled over the period of the daily report and over the course of the BHA run.
Slide Drill Run – The distance drilled while sliding over the course of the current BHA run. Can be input manually or calculated from the Activity selection when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected in the Report Options.
Rotary Drill Run – The distance drilled in rotary over the course of the current BHA run. Calculated by subtracting the Slide Drill Run from the Drilled Run.
Slide Hours Run – The total number of hours spent sliding during the current BHA run. Can be input manually or calculated from the Activity selection when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected in the Report Options.
Rotary Hours Run – The total hours rotating on bottom for the current BHA run. Can be input manually or calculated from the Activity selection when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected in the Report Options.
Circulating Hrs Run – The total circulating hours of the current BHA run. Can be input manually or calculated from the Activity selection when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected in the Report Options.
BRT Hrs – The total hours of the below the rotary table of the current BHA run. Can be input manually or calculated from the Time In /Out cells in the BHA Performance Report when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected in the Report Options.
Comments – Text in this cell will be printed in the DDR comments section. If left blank, no comments section will be included in the printed DDR.
MWD Comments – Text in this cell will be printed in the DDR MWD comments section. If left blank, no MWD comments section will be included in the printed DDR.
The Drill String section is automatically populated using the latest BHA selected in the BHA column of the Daily Activity section. The information displayed in this section is displayed in the Daily Report when Print Report is selected. Note that if there are 2 BHA’s referenced in a DDR, it will only be the latest one which is displayed here.
Date: The date of the activity. This is set in the calendar in the report selection section.
Start Time: The start time of the activity. Only the time for the activity on the first line can be set manually. The start time for all other activities is set by the end time of the previous activity.
End Time: The end time of the activity.
Hours: The time duration between the start time and the end time of the activity. This is automatically calculated.
Start Depth: The start hole depth of the current activity.
End Depth: The end hole depth of the current activity. Note that end depth will only be available to select when a drilling activity is selected from the drop-down menu in the activity column.
BHA: The BHA run the activity is associated with. Any BHA entered in the Drill String editor will be available to select here from the drop-down menu.
Phase: The phase code and description that the activity falls under. The user can select the relevant Phase code from the drop-down menu. This information is used in the creation of the KPI tracking graphs and the Depth v Time Chart. For more information on Phase Codes see Section 13.3 - Phase Codes.
Activity: The activity code description that the rig site operations fall under. This information is used in the calculation of ROP, Slide Drill Run, Rotary Drill Run, Slide Hours Run, Rotary Hours Run and Circulating Hours Run, when Get Slide Rotate Hours from Activity is selected. Activity is also used in the creation of the KPI tracking graphs. For more information on Activity Codes see Section 13.1 - Activity Codes.
Description: The user should input a description of the activity and any other operationally pertinent events occurring between the start and end time, which will then be included in the daily report.
The well data & personnel section allows the user to enter key details of the well and of the senior rig personnel. This information is displayed in the Daily Report when Print Report is selected. These details only apply to the currently opened Daily Report. Pressing the Update All Reports button will apply the entered Rig, State, County, Job #, Formation and all the various company details to all Daily Reports.
The Get from Oasis button allows the user to import Well & Personnel data from an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Job #: The Job Number of the current operation.
District: The local district of the well.
API Job #: The American Petroleum Institute Job Number of the current operation.
AFE: The Authorization For Expenditure number for the well, if available.
Operator: The name of the operator of the well. This field is auto populated with the name of the Operator in the Database Tree.
Field: The name of the field in which the well is being drilled. This field is auto populated with the name of the Field in the Database Tree.
Well: The name of the well. This field is auto populated with the name of the Well in the Database Tree.
State / Region / Province: The US state or region in which the well is being drilled. The naming convention here will be set by the location selected from the Report Options menu. If the location is set to USA, the state can be selected from the dropdown box at the bottom of the window.
County / Country / AFE: The county or country in which the well is being drilled. The naming convention here will be set by the location selected from the Report Options menu. If the location is set to USA, the county can be selected from the dropdown box at the bottom of the window.
Rig: The name of the rig
Csg Shoe MD: The shoe depth of the deepest casing currently in the hole.
Casing OD: The outer diameter of the deepest casing currently in the hole.
Casing Wt: The weight in lbs/ft of the deepest casing currently in the hole.
Target Formation: The current target formation for the well.
Operator: The operating company for the well.
Mud Co.: The mud company providing drilling fluids for the well.
Directional Co: The directional company drilling the well. This is a searchable feature in the Well Analytics section of the software.
Drilling Co: The rig contractor drilling the well.
Wireline Co: The wireline company providing services on the well.
Casing Co: The casing company providing services on the well.
Cementing Co: The cementing company providing services on the well.
Mud Logging Co: The mud logging company providing services on the well.
MWD Co.: The MWD company providing services on the well.
PO#: The Purchase Order number for the well.
Permit Num: The Permit number for the well.
Permit Survey: The Permit Survey number for the well.
Permit Abstract: The Permit Abstract number for the well.
3rd Party Motor: The owner/operator of any 3rd party motors provided for the well.
3rd Party MWD: The owner/operator of any 3rd party MWD tools provided for the well.
Alt Job #: Alternative job number.
Alt Job # End Date: End date for the alternative job number.
Spud Date: Spud date for the well.
Bid #: Bid number for the well.
Personnel: Details of the senior rig personnel on site.
The MWD Parameters window can be used to record information for any MWD currently in the hole. This information can then be included in daily reports and the EOWR, so long as the option is turned on in the Report Options menu.
The fields for Plug In/Out Date, Plug In/Out Time, Plug In Hrs and Circ Hrs are entered into the Component Properties of the MWD/LWD component for the BHA that is currently in the hole. See section 13.5.7.4 – Component Properties for more details. The Battery Life Remaining, On Btm Pulse Amplitude and Off BTM Pulse Amplitude need to be entered manually.
The Daily Costs tool allows the user to assign items and their costs to the daily reports.
Items must have been previously defined using the Cost Codes tool (See Section 13.2 - Cost Codes). The predefined costs can then be selected from a dropdown menu in the Description column and given a quantity in the Qty column. The well daily cost and the total well cost are automatically calculated at the bottom of the dialog.
The user can manually enter the serial number for any individual component listed in the daily costs; however, checking the SN dropdown option at the bottom left of the dialog, means that when the user selects a cell in the serial number column, a drop-down menu will appear listing all the serial numbers listed in the tool inventory, allowing the user to quickly choose from these options without needing to manually enter the data.
The BHA # column allows the user to assign each cost to a BHA created in the Drill string Editor. Then when the user prints a Grouped Field Invoice, the invoice will be grouped by the cost of each BHA.
Once populated, the user can then print the Daily Cost Report and the Well Cost Report from the menu or toolbar in the main Daily Reporting window.
The pump data dialog allows the user to enter details of the rig pumps. These details can be included in the daily report if selected from the Report Options menu.
The pump output is automatically calculated from the input details.
The KPI tracking tool can be used to display several Key Performance Indicators based on data from the daily reports. Each KPI graph can be customised by right clicking and selecting options from the context menu (see Section 6.8 – Context Menu). The graphs can be exported for use in other documents by right clicking and selecting Export Dialog.
The KPI tracking tool provides the following data: Phase summary, ROP per run, Footage per run, Footage per day, Footage per phase, ROP per phase, NPT per phase, Drilling Hrs per phase, Activity summary, Activity per phase, Cost Breakdown, Footage per phase (bar chart), Drilling Hours per Run and NPT Summary.
The Depth v Time tool will automatically plot a depth v time graph based on the data entered in the daily reports.
The chart can be exported for use in other documents by right clicking and selecting the Export option in the context menu (see Section 6.8 – Context Menu). The chart can also be printed to PDF format by opening the File menu and selecting Print.
The graph can be customised by right clicking and selecting options from the context menu. All labels can be moved by left clicking and dragging. The chart can also be customised using the View menu.
Print: Prints the Depth vs Time chart to PDF.
Exit: Closes the Depth vs Time chart.
Show phases: Displays the well phases, as defined in the daily activities, as vertical lines on the chart.
Show screen reader: Toggles the screen reader function on and off. The screen reader displays the Depth and Days at whichever point the cursor is on the graph.
Show Plan: If the principal plan has an AFE design associated with it, then the predicted Depth v Time chart for the well can be displayed alongside the actual chart. For more information on creating an AFE design, see Section 15.0 – AFE Plan Designer.
.
Colour by Activity/Phase/BHA: Colours the Depth v Time line according to activity, phase or BHA at that point in the well. The chart legend describes the meaning of each colour. The colours and the layout of the legend can be customised using the Context Menu.
Do not Colour: Turns off any colouration by activity, phase or BHA and colours the line red.
Show Casing: Toggles the casings on and off. For more information on adding casing to a well see Section 7.2 - Casing.
Show Lithology: Toggles the lithology lines on and off. For more information on adding lithologies to a well, see Section 7.5 - Lithologies.
White Background: When selected the background of the chart will be white.
The Well Statistics dialog, displays a variety of statistical data, taken from the DDR’s, Slide Sheet’s and BHA’s. It serves as a quick way for the user to view data from different sources side-by-side. The well statistics can be printed as an Excel or PDF format report from the File menu.
The Tortuosity KPI window allows the user to compare wells based on their dogleg. The window displays four charts plotted against measured depth. The depth range displayed on the charts can be altered using the Depth From and Depth To boxes at the top of the window. The four charts displayed show the inclination, dogleg, cumulative dogleg and ROP. They can be removed by unchecking the ‘Chart’ checkboxes in the bottom left. The ‘Phases’ checkboxes in the bottom left will hide results for the selected phase from the charts.
The reference well – the well being viewed when the Tortuosity KPI window was opened – is always displayed on the charts. By default, the principal plan will also be displayed on the charts. It can be toggled off by clicking on the Show/hide principal plan button. The user can add other actual wells to the charts by selecting them in the well selector on the left-hand side of the window. The list can be filtered by typing in the search box at the top of the window.
The user can export the charts as an image and a table for each well by clicking on the Export to Excel button.
As well as the reference data the charts can also display offset well data. In order to select which wells, surveys or plans are classed as offset well data the user must use the Select Offsets dialog using the Tools > Offset Selector or the icon in the main UI toolbar. Once selected some charts may require the user to toggle the offset data on and off by selecting the Offsets On icon in the main UI toolbar. For more information regarding the offset selector see Section 6.4.7 – Offset Selector.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the section view chart can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Section View.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the plan view chart can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Plan View.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the 3D chart can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > 3D View.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open, selected and has at least one offset selected, the travelling cylinder plot can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Travelling Cylinder Plot.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the ladder plot can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Ladder Plot.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the separation factor plot can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Separation Factor Plot.
When an actual wellbore, survey, plan or planned wellbore is open and selected the spider can be accessed via the main UI toolbar icon or Plots > Spider Plot.
This option is only available to select from the Actual Well Level. The user can enter multiple pipe tallies for each well by using the add button. The different tallies are accessed via the dropdown menu at the top left of the dialog.
Description: Add a unique description for each tally
Add: Add a new Tally
Delete: Delete an existing Tally
Print: Print currently selected tally to Excel
BHA Length: Total length of the appropriate BHA. The length will be added to the total length of drill pipe to calculate the bit Depth.
Stickup: The length of pipe below the joint left sticking out above the rotary table when making connections. It is subtracted from the bit depth (along with the Survey Offset) to calculate the Survey Depth.
Survey Offset: Distance from bit to MWD sensor. It is subtracted from the bit Depth (along with the Stick Up) to calculate the Survey Depth.
Gamma Offset: Distance from bit to gamma sensor. This value is just for reference and does not affect the survey depth.
Joints Per Stand: How many joints are in a stand. This will be rig specific and will usually range from 1 to 3.
Survey at Mid Stand – This can be checked if surveys are being taken in the middle of the stand instead of at the bottom. The Survey Depth Column will change to reflect this.
Length: User should enter individual joint lengths here
Stand: This column is populated automatically based on the value entered in the joints per stand cell
Depth: This column is populated automatically and is the cumulative depth of the joints up to that point and the BHA Length.
Svy Depth: This column is populated automatically and shows the survey depth at the bottom of each single. If Survey at Mid Stand is checked, the survey depth for middle single will change to the middle of the single instead of the bottom.
Inc: User can add the survey inclination in the relevant cell
Azi: User can add the survey azimuth in the relevant cell
Comments: User can add an appropriate comment in the relevant cell if required.
This option is only available to select from the Actual Well level. Using the information already input in the Inventory and the Shipping Addresses dialogs, the user can quickly and easily create a Shipping Ticket Report in excel format by selecting the Print radio button.
File Menu
Save: Saves the currently selected shipping ticket
Add New Ticket: Creates a new shipping ticket
Delete Ticket: Deletes the selected shipping ticket
Print Excel: Prints the selected shipping ticket to excel
Print PDF: Prints the selected shipping ticket to pdf
Exit: Closes the shipping ticket dialog
Tools Menu
Select All: Selects ALL the tools in the lower grid
Unselect All: Unselects ALL the tools in the lower grid
Ship Tools: Once the user has selected the relevant tools to ship, from the select tools section, selecting the ship tools radio button will have the following effect: In the tool inventory, the selected tools will have the ‘on location’ box unchecked and the date off location cell will populate
Select Tools Ready for Backload: Selects tools in the lower grid which have been marked for backload in the inventory
This option is only available to select from the Actual Well level. This is where the user can input the inventory for the well.
Any component entered in the inventory will be available for the user to select within the Drill String Editor and Shipping Ticket dialogs.
For ease of identification the inventory will highlight rows based on how the user has set their status in the On Location, Failed, Ready for Backload, In Hole and Dirty Columns:
On location: Designates whether the tool is at the rig site or not. When check on location the tool is not highlighted. If the user unchecks the On Location column, to mark a tool that is not at the rig site but still in the inventory, the tool will be highlighted orange.
Failed: If the tool has failed, the user can check the Failed column and the tool will be highlighted in red. This can then be used as a reference to make sure that the failed tool is not used in another drill string.
Ready For Backload: Tools that are ready to be delivered off site are highlighted in blue.
In Hole: This status is handled automatically, and changes made by the user will not be saved. Well Seeker will check the latest daily activity entered in the Daily Report for the well. If there is a BHA selected for that activity, Well Seeker will highlight all tools in that BHA in green in the inventory.
Dirty: This status does not have a highlight colour, but is also handled automatically, and changes made by the user will not be saved. The Daily Report will record the circulating hours for each BHA, and then apply those hours to tools in the Inventory in the D&C Hrs Well column. If the tool already had circulating hours accumulated when it arrived on the rig site, the user can enter them in the Prev D&C Hrs column. Total D&C Hrs column is simply the sum of the other two columns. Any tools with more than zero hours in the Total D&C Hrs column will be marked as dirty.
At the bottom of the tool inventory window there are some additional functions:
Check Remote Db: Connects to the remote database to see if tools have been shipped to the job and are awaiting receipt into the system. Well Seeker will attempt to connect to the server defined in the ICDS Server section of the Real Time Data Exchange. See Section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange for more information.
Filter by off location: Hides all tools except for ones marked as Off Location.
Filter by on location: Hides all tools except for ones marked as On Location.
Search: Filters the inventory for tools that contain the keyword entered in the Search box, in any of their columns.
The toolbar contains the main functions used when operating the Tool Inventory. Most of these functions can also be accessed from the menus at the top of the Tool Inventory window. However, there are some which can only be accessed from the toolbar. These will be detailed below:
Transfer Tools: Opens the transfer tools dialog, allowing the user to transfer tools from the current well to a different well in the database. It should be noted that only tools which are marked as on location in the main tool inventory dialog will be available to select. If there is a date entered in the date off location cell, the tool will not be available to select, even if the on location check box is selected. Once a tool has been transferred, the date off location cell will automatically populate and the on location cell will be unchecked.
Add Row: Adds a new blank row at the bottom of the table
Receive Tools: Adds the tools which have been marked as shipped on the remote database to the inventory. The Check Remote Db option must be checked for this function to work. If any tools are detected, the Select Tools dialog will open:
The user should enter their name into the Received By box, select the tools they want to receive by checking the Receive Tool checkbox, and then click on the Receive Selected button. This will add the selected tools to the local inventory.
Mark all Ready for Backload: Toggles the Ready for Backload checkbox on or off for all items in the inventory.
Mark all on location: Toggles the On Location checkbox on or off for all items in the inventory.
Save: Saves any changes made to the Tool Inventory.
Print Excel: Prints the Tool Inventory, with any filters currently applied, as an Excel format report.
Print PDF: Prints the Tool Inventory, with any filters currently applied, as a PDF format report.
Import from Oasis: Allows the user to import an inventory from an external Oasis ERP database. The Oasis endpoint credentials need to be set up in section 6.1.5.5 – Oasis Credentials.
Tool Orders: Opens the Tool Orders dialog. See section 13.21 – Tool Orders.
Exit: Close the Tool Inventory.
Select Colours: Allows the user the change the colour used to highlight rows whenever the On Location, Failed, Ready for Backload and In Hole status columns are checked. The user can also disable highlighting for statuses by unchecking the box beside each one.
Highlight Rows: Toggling this option off will disable all highlighting of rows in the Tool Inventory and in reports.
Show All Components: Shows all items in the Inventory.
Show MWD Only: Filters the inventory to show only item types that correspond to MWD operations. E.g., MWD/LWD, Shock Absorber, Pulser, etc.
Show DD Only: Filters the inventory to show only item types that correspond to DD operations. E.g., Motor, Drill Collar, Stabilizer etc.
Show MWD Status Columns: Displays the Field Status and Shop Status columns in the Tool Inventory.
Select from Catalogue: The Component Catalogue contains a list of drill string components with pre-defined properties that can be add to the inventory. The desired component can be searched for using the dropdown menus at the top. Clicking the Insert button will add the selected component to the inventory. Note that this will overwrite the row that was selected at the time of opening the Catalogue.
Custom components can be added, removed, and edited using the Add, Delete and Edit buttons. Components which come with the standard install can also be edited and removed if desired. The Reset button will revert the catalogue back to its originally installed state. Finally, the component catalogue can be imported and exported to and from other users.
This option is available to select from all levels within the database structure. Here the user can enter the addresses of any company or location that are being shipped to/from over the course of a project. These addresses can then be used in the Daily Reporting package to generate a shipping ticket or a bid sheet. The addresses entered in the Shipping Address tool are applied to every operator in the database, so these addresses are available to select for any well within the database.
The slide sheet dialog will only be available to the user when they are in a survey. When in a Plan or Actual Wellbore, the slide sheet option will be greyed out and the user will be unable to open this feature.
The slide sheet is designed to minimize repeated entry of data. Once the slide sheet has been filled in with drilling activity and parameters, the user can use the Get DDR from Run Sheet button in the Daily Reporting interface to automatically fill in their daily activities and drilling parameters sections. See section 13.4– Daily Reporting for more information.
The slide sheet can be set up to automatically fill itself in with sliding, rotation, and drilling parameters data from an incoming WITS or WITSML feed. Both raw and calculated surveys can also be received via WITS and WITSML. This data can be sent to the Directional Drillers Dashboard (see section 13.11 – Directional Drilling Dashboard), allowing the user to monitor drilling operations from one screen. This information can also be uploaded to a server, allowing for remote operation of directional drilling and surveying services.
Each BHA created in the Drill String Editor (see section 13.5 – Drill String Editor) will have a slide sheet associated with it. When in the slide sheet window, the BHA can be selected from the drop-down box at the top of the window. If no BHAs have been created for the actual well, there will be no slide sheets available to edit and the drop-down box will be empty.
The user should fill in the slide sheet by entering data into the Date, Start Time, End Time, Start, End, State and TF (Toolface) Type rows. The Target Toolface (TTF), Effective Toolface (ETF) Motor Yield (MY) and drilling parameters columns are optional. When selecting the state of each row, they will be highlighted as follows:
The Green Lines indicate slides using Magnetic Tool Faces
The Blue Lines indicate slides using Gravity Tool Faces
The White Lines indicate Rotation
The Slide Sheet toolbar contains the main functions used when operating the slide sheet. These functions can also be accessed from the menus at the top of the Slide Sheet.
Save: Saves any changes to the slide sheet.
Print Slide Report Excel/PDF: Prints the currently selected slide sheet in Excel or PDF format, with additional information and in a layout suitable for submission in a report.
Print Slide Report Field PDF: Prints a report similar to the slide report above, but has a few columns removed to make it more compact and easier to read.
Print RVDS Report: Print RVDS Report. This report is not part of the standard slide sheet and requires a separate license to access.
Print all Slide Sheets Excel/PDF: Prints slide reports for all BHAs in a single document in Excel or PDF format.
Print Slide Analysis Excel/PDF: Prints the slide analysis chart for every slide in the currently selected BHA, in a single Excel or PDF format document. For more information on the Slide Analysis tool see section 13.10.6 – Slide Sheet Tools Menu.
Auto Refresh Slide Sheet: If viewing the slide sheet on a remote server and receiving WITS data from a rig site, this option will refresh the slide sheet every few minutes with any new data. When toggled off, the only way to refresh the slide sheet is to close and reopen.
Auto Save Slide Sheet: Toggling this option on will cause the slide sheet to automatically save any changes every few minutes.
Exit: Closes the slide sheet window.
Undo: Undoes that last action.
Redo: Redoes the last undone action.
Slide Sheet Columns: Allows the user to toggle columns in the slide sheet on and off.
Slide Sheet Column Order: Opens the column order dialog, which allows the user to configure which columns appear in the slide sheet and in what order.
The user can enable/disable columns by checking the on/off checkbox beside each column name. The user can also enable and disable all columns by clicking on the check all and un-check all buttons. The order of the columns can be changed by selecting a column and clicking on the move up and move down buttons. The rest button will return the columns to their default configuration.
For a description of the available columns, see Appendix F: Slide Sheet Column Options.
Date Format: Allows the user to set how dates are displayed in the slide sheet. The available choices are DD/MM/YYYY or MM/DD/YYYY.
WITS Survey Options: Contains options that configure how the software handles surveys when receiving survey data over a WITS or WITSML connection.
Survey Type: User should select the type of survey that they want to receive from the WITS feed. Note that the rig may be transmitting only one type of survey, in which case the user must select the correct one for WITS surveys to work.
Inc and Azi (Calculated) – If selected, the user will not be able to run the Short Collar Correction feature of the software as this requires the raw values.
GxGyGzBxByBz (Raw) – If the user chooses to receive the WITS surveys as raw accelerometer (GxGyGz) and magnetometer (BxByBz) values then they will have the ability to run Short Collar Correction on the surveys.
Magnetic Units: If the user is receiving surveys in Raw format, they must specify the units of the magnetometer readings (Bx, By and Bz) that are being transmitted. This is not required if surveys are being received in Calculated format. The available units are:
Geolink / Tensor (mV)
SSP / SUCOP (µT)
nT
nT (no XY inversion)
µT (XY Inversion)
Evo / Applied Physics
Accelerometer Units: If the user is receiving surveys in Raw format, they must specify the units of the accelerometer readings (Gx, Gy and Gz) that are being transmitted. This is not required if surveys are being received in Calculated format. The available units are:
G
mG
Inverted Z axis
Survey QC Limits: Opens the raw survey QC limit dialog. If required, the industry standard default values can be edited here by the user. This only applies to raw surveys.
The tolerances entered here are the amount the calculated field strength (HL), dip and gravity field strength (G) can vary from their reference values before being marked as out of tolerance. The reference values are defined at actual well level (Section 8.6 – Level 6: Actual Well Level).
Auto Send Survey Email: When a WITS survey is received and accepted an email update will automatically be sent to the current distribution list defined in the Survey Email Update Template in the Tools menu. No dialog or outlook window will appear.
Auto Accept Surveys: When a WITS survey is detected at a depth deeper than the last entered survey, it will automatically be accepted and added to the survey listing without prompting the user. Note: this option should be used with caution.
Use Bit Depth as Survey Depth: If a new WITS survey is detected this option forces the survey depth to be set as the current bit depth. This option is useful for unmanned operations.
Include Bit Projection in Survey Email: When toggled on, this option will add a projection to bit in the Survey Email Update Template available from the Tools menu.
Attach Survey Listing to Email: When this option is toggled on, a survey listing in Excel format will be attached to the survey update email. This email can be configured with the Survey Update Email Template tool in the Tools menu.
Check for WITS Surveys: If this option is toggled off, Well Seeker will ignore any surveys transmitted from the rig via WITS.
Slide Record Input – CL: If this option is toggled on, the Course Length (CL) column is used to define the length of each slide and rotate. The End [Depth] column will be greyed out and is automatically calculated from the start depth and the course length.
Copy Drilling Params to New Line: If this option is toggled on, then whenever a new line is created, its drilling parameters columns will be automatically filled in by copying the parameters from the line above. These lines can be edited afterwards if required.
Auto Calculate ROP: If this option is toggled on the ROP column will be automatically calculated using the Start Time, End Time, Start and End columns. The values in the ROP column cannot be edited. ROP is calculated as follows:
Auto Populate Parameters: If this option is toggled on and Auto Populate Slide Sheet is activated, then the slide sheet will automatically fill in the drilling parameters columns with drilling parameter data received over WITS.
Auto Populate Slide Sheet: When WITS data is being received, if this option is selected, then the slide sheet will be automatically populated based on the operation (sliding or rotating). While this option is running, the below message will appear next to the BHA selection box:
While this option is enabled, the user will NOT be able to manually add or adjust anything on the slide sheet. If it is necessary to adjust the slide sheet for any reason, the user can turn off the auto populate option, by toggling the option off or clicking on the red circle in the toolbar. After making the appropriate adjustment the auto population can be turned on again.
NOTE: In order for the slide sheet to auto populate properly, the thresholds in the Rig States dialog must be correctly configured.
Record Connections Data: When receiving WITS data, if this option is toggled on, the Rig States dialog will record In Slips, Off Bottom and Survey times in the Timers section. This is required for the Connection Analysis tool in the Tools menu.
Show surveys on slide report: Adds a survey listing to the slide report when printed from the File menu.
Show phase on slide report: Adds the drilling phase to the Comments column in the slide report when printed from the File menu. The phase is set in the Daily Report activities section. See section 13.4.7.6 – DDR Daily Activity for more information.
Show short survey on slide report: Adds compacted survey listing, which only contains depth, inclination, azimuth and DLS, to the slide report when printed from the File menu. This option is overridden by Show surveys on slide report.
Show reduced drilling params on slide report: Shows only WOB, RPM, flow, torque and ROP in the slide report when printed from the File menu.
Motor Yields: Opens the Motor Yield analysis dialog. This displays every survey taken and the corresponding slide length between the surveys. These can be broken down into Formation / Section Type / BHA. Each section has a detailed analysis of slide and rotation percentages, the High, Low, and average motor yield and the average rotary DLS and TF. The dialog can be printed to an Excel format report via the File menu.
Survey Update Email Template: Opens the Survey Update tool, which allows the user to quickly send an email updating clients or other personnel on the details of the latest survey.
The user can add recipients to the update email by entering their email address (e.g., email1@email.com) to the box at the top of the window and then clicking on the add button. Multiple addresses can be added by delimiting them with a comma (e.g., email1@email.com,email2@email.com) before clicking the add button. Addresses can be removed from the email by selecting them in the list and clicking on the delete button. Well Seeker will save all emails entered into the recipient list after the window is closed.
The email body contains the most recent survey along with the distance from plan, average motor yield and dogleg to land. The user can include a curve projection by clicking on the Include checkbox and then entering the TVD, Inc and Azi of their landing. In the Settings > WITS Survey Options menu there is also an option to include a projection to bit.
If the default email client on the user’s computer is Microsoft Outlook, then they can click on the send mail button to generate an email with the recipients, subject and email body set up as in the template. In the Settings > WITS Survey Options menu there is an option to include a survey listing as an attachment to the email. There I also an option to automatically send the email as soon as a survey is accepted.
RigStates: Opens the Rig States Settings dialog. The Rig States Settings is where the user configures how Well Seeker interprets incoming WITS data to decide what operation the rig is currently performing. It also allows the user to see what drilling parameter data is being sent through from WITS. Rig States will operate when:
The WITS Data Reader is running (and receiving real time data via WITS or WITSML), and
The Auto Populate Slide Sheet Option is selected from the Settings Menu
The Current Rig State section shows what activity Well Seeker thinks the rig is currently performing, based on the latest parameters received from WITS. These parameters can be seen in the Current WITS Data and Drilling Params sections. Well Seeker determines the current rig state by comparing the parameters to the thresholds as set by the user in the Thresholds section. The user will need to set these thresholds to the correct values for the rig they are on to make sure that Well Seeker correctly interprets the rig state.
Rig states logic is defined below.
Is the Bit on Bottom?
Hole depth – Bit Depth < On bottom threshold
If on bottom, are you drilling?
Pump Pressure > Threshold
WOB > Threshold
Hookload > Threshold
On bottom recorded when all 3 of the above are recorded = TRUE
If Drilling = TRUE, the logic is as follows:
If 10% of the values in the RPM buffer are < Rotating threshold then Sliding
If 10% of the values in the RPM buffer are > Rotating threshold then Rotating
The RPM Buffer section is used along with the RPM threshold value to determine if the string is rotating. The RPM buffer size sets how many of the most recent RPM values to keep in the buffer, and the RPM Buffer Threshold sets how many values in the buffer need to be above the RPM threshold before Well Seeker considers the string to be rotating.
The Timers section records the total amount of time that Well Seeker registers the pumps being on, the string being in slips, the string being off bottom, and the time taken surveying. For these last three timers, the option Record Connections Data in the Settings Menu needs to be turned on before they are recorded.
The Sliding TF section will display the latest tool face data if this is being transmitted over WITS.
The Simulator button opens the Rig States simulator. This can be used to generate a fake WITS feed for debugging and demonstration purposes. It should never be used during real drilling operations.
Real Time Gauges: Opens the real time gauges dashboard, where the user can view some of the data being received from the WITS feed. Note that these gauges will only operate when WITS data is being received.
The gauges can be customized by double left clicking on them individually. This opens the gauge settings dialog, and allows the user to select the following:
Minimum: Minimum range the gauge displays
Maximum: Maximum range the gauge displays
Label: The label which appears at the bottom of the gauge
Units: The units which the values on the gauge are referenced to
Mnemonic: The WITS input which is being displayed on the gauge
Note that when the Real Time Gauge dialog is closed, all the settings reset back to default and the user will need to make the necessary changes again.
Directional Drillers Dashboard: Opens the Directional Drillers Dashboard window. See section 13.11 – Directional Drilling Dashboard for more information.
Slide Analysis: Slide Analysis requires the Save Svy and TF Data function to be enabled in the WITS data reader. Before the Slide Analysis dialog can be opened, the user must select a slide by left clicking on one of the cells in the slide row.
The red line through the chart represents the Effective Toolface (ETF) for that slide, while the points represent the individual slide toolfaces recorded by WITS for the duration of that slide. The data can be exported to Excel by opening the File menu and selecting Export Data. The chart can be exported as an image by right clicking and selecting Export Dialog from the context menu. For more information on the context menu see section 6.8 – Context Menu.
Connection Analysis: The Connection Analysis chart requires the Record Connections Data option in the Settings menu to be toggled on whilst recording WITS data.
The Connections Analysis chart will display every connection recorded by WITS as a bar chart. Each connection will be coloured to show how much of the connection was spent reaming, taking a survey and performing the connection itself. The blue line represents the average time to make a connection. This chart can be used as a way of gauging which activities are taking the most time during connections, and therefore where timesaving improvements can be made.
The data can be exported to Excel by opening the File menu and selecting Export Data. The chart can be exported as an image by right clicking and selecting Export Dialog from the context menu. For more information on the context menu see section 6.8 – Context Menu.
Seriel/TCP WITS Comms: Opens the WITS reader. See section 13.10.7 – Serial/TCP WITS Data Reader for more information.
WITSML Comms: Opens the WITSML reader. See section 13.10.8 – WITSML Data Reader for more information.
Wireless WITS Comms: Opens the Wireless WITS reader. See section 13.10.9 – Wireless WITS for more information.
Cross Plot / Heat Map: Displays the Cross Plot window. The cross plot can be used to show how often two drilling parameters are recorded in the slide sheet. Green areas are values that record fewer times or not at all, while red areas are values used more often.
The available parameters are WOB, RPM and flow rate. The axis that these parameters are displayed on can be configured using the X Axis and Y Axis menus. The cross plot can be exported as an image by right clicking on it and selecting Export Dialog from the context menu. For more information on the context menu see section 6.8 – Context Menu.
Select Downlink: This is a legacy feature that has been replaced with the Send Downlink option described below.
Send Downlink: Opens the Downlink Control dialog window. See section 13.10.10 – Downlink Control.
View Downlink History: Opens the Downlink History dialog which displays a record of all downlinks sent using the Downlink Control dialog.
Round Depths: Rounds all start and end depths in the currently opened slide sheet to the nearest whole number.
Enable error logging: Toggling this option will create a file called rigStateLog.txt in the Debug folder in the Setup File directory. The Setup File directory can be opened via the Help menu in the main Well Seeker interface and selecting the option Open Setup File Folder. This file records a log of incoming drilling parameter data and will record any errors in the data feed.
Opens the WITS Reader Dialog. This option is used to configure Well Seeker to receive WITS data via a serial or ethernet cable. This allows the user to automate the slide sheet via the Rig States and Auto-Populate functions in the slide sheet. For this process to work correctly, it is important that the WITS mapping in Well Seeker matches the WITS mapping of the rig. See section 6.4.21 – WITS Mapping for more information on editing Well Seeker’s WITS mapping.
There are three types of connections available:
Serial WITS: If the user is receiving WITS via a serial cable, they should leave the UDP WITS and TCP WITS options in the Ethernet WITS Settings section unchecked. In the Serial WITS Settings section, they should select the comm port from the Comm Port drop-down box. This will not be populated until the serial cable is plugged into the computer via a serial-USB converter. The user also needs to enter the baud rate into the Baud Rate box. This should be provided by the people transmitting the WITS data.
UDP WITS: If the user is receiving UDP WITS via an ethernet cable, they should check the UDP WITS checkbox in the Ethernet WITS Settings. They should then enter the port number into the Port box. The port number should be provided by the people transmitting the WITS data.
TCP WITS: If the user is receiving UDP WITS via an ethernet cable, they should check the TCP WITS checkbox in the Ethernet WITS Settings. They should then enter the port number into the Port box and the IP Address into the IP Address box. The port number and IP address should be provided by the people transmitting the WITS data.
Once the user has configured their connection, they can start receiving data by clicking on the Start Reading button. Whilst the WITS feed is running, the user can see incoming data and any error messages in the WITS Data Stream section. The user can pause the data stream by checking the Pause Messages checkbox – the WITS feed will continue in the background. This allows the user to scroll through and read any messages. Once unchecked, all messages which were received during the paused interval will appear. The Stop Reading button will stop the WITS feed. Whilst the WITS feed is running, the status can be seen in the WITS Status section.
The Save Svy and TF Data checkbox will save the Survey and Toolface data to the database. You need this selected if you want to calculate slide grade and view the slide analysis data. Note that the slide sheet will populate without this option being checked; however, this must be selected if the user wants the data saved. The Well and Survey boxes show the well and slide sheet that this information is being saved to.
The Clear WITS Data button clears ALL WITS data stored in the database. The user may want to do this if they have WITS data from a previous well or the database size is getting too big. It should be noted that if the database reaches 1.5Gb in size, the WITS data will be deleted automatically.
The user can forward WITS data to a remote server, so that RTOC operators can receive slide information from the rig and monitor the well using the Directional Drilling Dashboard. To do this, the user needs to check the Send Data to Server checkbox on the Server Data Sync section. When this is activated, the user will start seeing status messages in the message box below. The IP address and port of the remote server will be displayed in the IP and Port boxes. These are set in the ICDS Server section in the Real Time Data Exchange. The well that the data is assigned to is set in the Select Well section in the Real Time Data Exchange. For more information, see section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange.
The Send Data Handshake option should only be checked if the user is running a Noralis MWD system and is receiving data from a Noralis WITS system.
WITSML is when rig data is uploaded to a server and then downloaded by users wishing to receive WITS data. To receive data this way, Well Seeker users should use the WITSML Data Reader instead of the Serial/TCP WITS Data Reader.
To use the WITSML Reader, the user needs valid login credential for the WITSML server. They should enter these into the Server URL, Username and Password boxes in the WITSML Server section. The user also needs to know the version of the server – either 1.3.1 or 1.4.1 – and select it from the dropdown box.
The Show/Hide checkbox will display or hide the password, while the Save password checkbox will remember the password so that it does not need to be entered every time the WITSML Reader is opened.
The user can check their credentials by cling the Test Connection button. A message will display in the Messages section indicating if the connection was successful or not.
Once the user is happy with their connection, the user can click on the Load Wells button to get a list of wells and logs stored on the data. The user can now select a log and a trajectory that they want to receive by clicking on them in the list. Note: Well Seeker uses time-based logs for its slide data, and trajectory logs for surveys. The user can also click on the Pull to file button to download all stored data from a selected well.
Once the user has selected their desired feeds, they need to map the WITSML mnemonics to the Well Seeker mnemonics in the Curve Mapping section. There is no industry standard set of WITSML mnemonics, so the user must set them manually. The Well Seeker internal mnemonics are listed on the right, with a column for the WITSML mnemonics on the left. Well Seeker will attempt to automatically match mnemonics that have the same name. The user should set the WITSML mnemonic by clicking on a row and selecting from the dropdown box.
Once the user has finished their mapping, they can start receiving data by clicking on the Start Reading button. The Selected Data section will update to display the selected well, wellbore, log, and trajectory. Whilst the WITS feed is running, the user will see values in the new Value column in the Curve Mapping section. They will also receive status and error messages in the Messages section.
The user can pause the data stream by checking the Pause Messages checkbox – the WITS feed will continue in the background. This allows the user to scroll through and read any messages. Once unchecked, all messages which were received during the paused interval will appear. The Stop Reading button will stop the WITS feed.
As with the Serial/TCP WITS Reader, the user can forward WITSML data to a remote server by checking the Send Data to Server checkbox. The server that the data is being sent to is set in the ICDS Server section in the Real Time Data Exchange. The well that the data is assigned to is set in the Select Well section in the Real Time Data Exchange. For more information, see section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange.
The Wireless WITS dialog allows to receive WITS data from a wireless WITS system, if one is available.
Note: All other WITS dialogs must be closed when the Wireless WITS is running.
The user should select a data source type from the Source drop-down box, and then enter the URL of the data source in the Server URL box. The user will be provided with credentials for the server which they should enter into the Username and Password boxes. They can check if their credentials are correct by clicking on the Test Connection button. The message box below will display a response from the server.
When the user clicks on Start Reading, Well Seeker will begin receiving data. Acknowledgement of incoming data packets will be displayed in the message box, and the Rig States dialog will begin populating with drilling parameters. The user can stop receiving data by clicking on the Stop Reading button. The Pause Messages button will prevent the dialog from receiving any new messages, but the data feed will continue in the background. Clear Messages will delete all messages in the message box and Write to File will create a text file containing all messages in the message box.
The user can forward WITS data to a remote server by checking the Send Data to Server checkbox. The server that the data is being sent to is set in the ICDS Server section in the Real Time Data Exchange. The well that the data is assigned to is set in the Select Well section in the Real Time Data Exchange. For more information, see section 6.4.15 – Real Time Data Exchange.
The Downlink Control dialog allows Well Seeker Pro to remotely send and monitor Rotary Steerable System (RSS) downlinks on a specified rig, utilizing the rig’s control system. Currently Well Seeker Pro can communicate with NOV’s DrillLink software and downlink by either the mud pumps, or top drive on rigs utilizing the Amphion and Cyberbase rig control systems.
The Downlink Control can connect to the RSS locally, by being physically connected to the rig network at the rig site. It can also connect remotely, sending commands via the internet. This requires the Innova Remote Client software and access to the Innova Cloud Portal API.
Connection: User should select their connection type from the drop-down box. Local connection should be used when at the rig site and the PC is physically connected to the rig network. Remote connection should be used when the user is connected to the rig network over the internet using the Innova Cloud Portal API and the Innova Remote Client installed on a PC at the rig site.
If local connection is selected the Drill Link section will look like the below screenshot:
IP Address: The IP address of the DrillLink device, or the hardware forwarding commands to DrillLink. This will be provided by the rig.
Port: The port of the DrillLink device, or the hardware forwarding commands to DrillLink. This will always be 8080.
Connect/Disconnect: After entering the IP address and port, the user can connect to the DrillLink device by clicking the Connect button. If successful, the connection status should turn green and change to ‘Connected’. The user can disconnect from the DrillLink device by clicking the Disconnect button.
Connection: Shows the status of the DrillLink connection. If successful, it will be green and display the message ‘Connected’.
Switch: Shows the status of the downlink control switch. This switch is operated by the driller at the rig site and gives them ultimate control over whether remote access to the DrillLink system is granted. The switch status must show ‘Enabled’ before any downlinks can be sent.
If remote connection is selected the Drill Link section will look like the below screenshot
Username/Password: User should enter the username and password for the Innova Cloud Portal API. These will be provided to the user’s company by Innova.
Get rigs: After entering the username and password, the user should click on the Get Rigs to populate the rig listing, displayed below:
Rig: Displays the names of the rigs connected to the Innova Cloud Portal API.
Online: Displays the status of each rig – red for offline, and green for online.
Select: The Downlink Control can only send commands to one rig at a time, so the user needs to select the rig that they want by clicking the checkbox next to their desired rig.
Connect/Disconnect: Once a username and password have been entered, and a rig has been selected in the rig listing, the user can connect to the DrillLink device by clicking the Connect button. If successful, the connection status should turn green and change to ‘Connected’. The user can disconnect from the DrillLink device by clicking the Disconnect button.
Connection: Shows the status of the DrillLink connection. If successful, it will be green and display the message ‘Connected’.
Switch: Shows the status of the downlink control switch. This switch is operated by the driller at the rig site and gives them ultimate control over whether remote access to the DrillLink system is granted. The switch status must show ‘Enabled’ before any downlinks can be sent.
Online: Shows the status of the selected rig in the rig listing. This must read ‘Yes’ before a downlink can be sent.
Channels: Before sending a downlink command, the user needs to map the top drive and each of the mud pumps to the correct channels. These must match up with the channel mapping at the rig site, so if unsure the user should verify with the rig.
Name: The name of the item being mapped to the channel. The user has the choice of Mud Pump (MP) #1 - #4, and the Top Drive.
Active: The user should ensure that all channels that will be used in downlink are selected as active. This is done by clicking in the checkboxes in the Active column.
RPM CH: Any channel mapped to the top drive must have the corresponding checkbox in the RPM CH column checked on.
Tool Type: User should select the model of the Rotary Steerable System (RSS) tool that they are sending the downlink to.
Software Version: User should select the software version installed on the RSS that they are sending the downlink to. The Tool Type needs to be selected before this drop-down is populated.
Tool Mode: User should select the tool mode set for the RSS that they are sending the downlink to. The Tool Type and Software Version need to be selected before this drop-down is populated.
Rotary DL: Certain tool type, software version and tool mode combinations will allow the user to toggle Rotary Downlink (DL) on. This means that the downlink will be sent using the top drive instead of the mud pumps.
Downlink: The drop-down box contains all available downlink commands for the RSS tool. The user should select the action that they wish the RSS to perform. The Downlink Parameters section will populate depending on the command selected.
Pump Strokes/Top Drive RPM Reduction: This drop-down box allows the user to set the percentage difference between the high pump rate and low pump rate when transmitting the downlink. This also applies to the high rpm and low rpm if Rotary DL is turned on.
Preview: Once the user has selected their downlink from the Downlink drop-down box, they can preview it by clicking on the Preview Button. This will display the selected downlink in the Downlink Sequence section.
Send: Once the Drill Link and Downlink Setup sections have been filled in, the user can click the Send button to send the selected downlink to the RSS tool.
Abort: Aborts transmission of the downlink sequence.
Elapsed Time: Records the time elapsed since the user started the downlink sequence by clicking on the Send button.
Average Flow: If Well Seeker is recording WITS or WITSML data from the rig, the current flow rate will be displayed here.
Average RPM: If Well Seeker is recording WITS or WITSML data from the rig, the current RPM will be displayed here.
The Downlink Sequence section consists of two parts – the Downlink Sequence Chart and the Downlink Sequence Table.
The Downlink Sequence Chart displays the elapsed time along the X-Axis and the pump flow rate along the Y-Axis. If Rotary DL is selected in the Downlink Setup section, then the Y-Axis will display the top drive RPM. The red line displays the selected downlink sequence. When the Send button is clicked, a green line will move across the chart, showing the progress of the downlink transmission. The elapsed time in seconds and minutes:seconds will also be displayed.
If Well Seeker is recording WITS or WITSML data from the rig, the rig flow rate will be recorded on the chart as a blue line. If Rotary DL is selected, this will show the top drive RPM.
The Downlink Sequence Table breaks down the selected downlink sequence into its constituent states, either Pumps Up/Pumps Down or RPM Up/RPM Down. The Time columns show the cumulative elapsed time of the sequence in minutes:seconds and seconds. When the Send button is clicked, the rows in the Table will be highlighted green as each part of the sequence is completed.
The Directional Drilling Dashboard collects data from multiple sources within Well Seeker and displays them in one interface, allowing the Directional Driller or a RTOC to monitor drilling operations from a single screen.
To fully utilise all features in the DD Dashboard, the user should have already set up the following:
Created the well trajectory as a well plan and set it as the principal plan for the well.
Created an actual well, with a survey sheet ready to be populated.
Assigned offset wells to the survey sheet. These offsets should be any well that may cause anti-collision concerns.
Created a lease line for the actual well.
Created a BHA in the Drill String Editor for the actual well.
Have the slide sheet open for the well, with the correct BHA selected for the current BHA run.
The user can manually keep the slide sheet up to date, or they can automatically populate the slide sheet using WITS. If the user is using WITS, they must also correctly set up their Rig States thresholds.
Once set up is complete, the user can open the DD Dashboard from the slide sheet. Thy can do so by clicking on the DD Dashboard icon on the toolbar, or by opening it from the Tools menu.
Note: It is possible to have multiple DD Dashboards for the same well open at the same time, but this will cause additional CPU and memory load.
The DD Dashboard interface is split into 6 sections. These sections can be enabled or disabled in the Settings Menu. The remaining displays will be resized to fill the empty space, so the user can get a clearer picture of displays that they want by hiding ones that they do not need.
The Real Time Gauges are a graphical output of drilling parameters received from incoming WITS data via the Rig States dialog.
The user can edit which parameters are displayed, and the ranges shown on each gauge by opening the Settings menu and selecting Gauge Settings.
The Toolface Rose displays the latest toolface updates received over WITS. The centre of the rose represents the principal plan. The rings moving out from the centre represent the distance from the plan, whilst the values around the rose represent the toolface. Whether the toolface is referenced to highside or north depends on the toolfaces being received. If receiving magnetic toolfaces, the most recent toolface displayed in the centre of the rose will end in ‘MAG’ and the rose will be referenced to north. If receiving highside toolfaces, it will end in ‘L’ for Left or ‘R’ for Right and the rose will be referenced to highside. The crossover point between magnetic and highside (gravity) toolfaces is set in the Mag to Grav X/O option in the DD Dashboard Settings Window.
The Toolface Rose contains additional features that aid the DD in staying on track with the well plan. It can be configured to warn the DD if they are straying too far from the plan or tool close to any offset wells. It can also give recommendations on whether the DD should rotate or slide, and by how much, to stay close to the well plan.
The warnings and recommendations are configured in the DD Dashboard Settings Window (13.11.6 – DD Dashboard Settings Window).
The features of the Toolface Rose are described below and reference the numbers in the image above.
Principal Plan: The very centre point of the Toolface Rose represents the principal well plan. If the green bit projection is in the centre, then the wellbore is following the plan exactly.
Graphical Projections: All projections are from the Real Time Projection section and are relative to the principal plan. The green dot represents the bit projection. The yellow diamonds represent the bit projection + 100 and the bit projection +200, or the curve projection depending on the drilling mode. The pink square represents the advisory projection. There may be additional green dots with well names annotated. These represent nearby offset wells.
Real Time Toolfaces: The blue dots represent the most recent real time toolfaces that have been received from WITS. The transparent dark green cone represents the effective toolface (ETF), based on an average of the recent toolfaces. The red number in the centre of the rose is the most recent real time toolface to be received.
Tolerance Window: The red shape around the centre of the Toolface Rose represents the maximum distance that the wellbore is permitted to deviate from the well plan. As the bit projection nears this limit the user will receive a warning and will receive a second warning if the limit is crossed. The size and shape of the tolerance window depends on the drilling mode and user configuration, both of which are set in the Settings dialog (13.11.6 – DD Dashboard Settings Window).
Projections: This section is a trimmed down version of the Real Time Projection section, containing the MD, inclination, and azimuth of all the projections.
Information:
Mode: The current drilling mode. This is set in the Settings dialog.
TF to Plan: The toolface of a line drawn between the wellbore and the nearest point on the principal plan.
Slide (X DLS): The slide length required to achieve the DLS value in brackets, based on the predicted motor yield. DLS value is set with the Max DLS setting in the Settings Dialog. The predicted motor yield is set with the Def Motor Yield setting in the Settings dialog.
Rot DLS (Avg/Last): The dogleg achieved while rotating ahead.
Rot TF (Avg/Last): The toolface of the DLS in the Rot DLS.
Plan (Inc/Azi): The inclination and azimuth of the nearest point on the principal plan.
Delta (Inc/Azi): The different between the inclination and azimuth of the wellbore and the Plan.
Dist to Crit Pt: The distance to drill until the wellbore reaches the MD of the next critical plan point in the principal plan.
Slide Advisory Recommendation: In this section, Well Seeker will give a recommended action – either sliding or rotating - to the DD to help them stay on track with the well plan and stay within the Tolerance Window. If recommending a slide, the recommendation will suggest a toolface and length for the slide.
Recommendation Cone: This is a graphical representation of the advisory recommendation. If the recommendation suggests a slide, the toolface that the DD should follow will be displayed as a green cone on the Toolface Rose.
The Real Time Anti-Collison section monitors the proximity of offset wells and lease lines, and can alert the DD if the wellbore strays too close.
By default, the principal plan and any lease lines assigned to the actual well are listed in the anti-collision table. See section 11.0 – Targets for information on setting up a lease line for a well. Offset wells need to be assigned to the survey sheet using the Offset Selector before they appear in the table (see section 6.4.7 – Offset Selector).
The table consists of the following columns.
Reference Depth: The point on the wellbore that anti-collision calculations are calculated from.
Centre to Centre (C2C): The distance between the wellbore and the closest point on the offset well.
Separation Factor (SF): The separation factor between the wellbore and the offset well. Separation factor compares the C2C distance of two wells against the size of their EOU. A SF of 1 means that the EOU are touching. The SF is calculated using the below formula:
Reference Ellipse: The size of the semi-major ellipse in the EOU of the wellbore.
Offset Ellipse: The size of the semi-major ellipse in the EOU of the offset well.
Ellipse Separation: The distance between the edge of the wellbore ellipse and the offset well ellipse.
For more detailed information on how anti-collision rules are calculate, see section 8.2 - Level 2: Operator. The limits for the anti-collision are set in the DD Dashboard Settings dialog:
Min C2C: The minimum Centre to Centre (C2C) distance between the wellbore and an offset before a warning is issued.
Min C2C Lease Line: The minimum Centre to Centre (C2C) distance between the wellbore and any lease line before a warning is issued.
Min SF: The minimum Separation Factor (SF) between the wellbore and an offset before a warning is issued.
If any these limits are violated, the line will turn red, and a warning will appear in the Warnings column.
The Real Time Projection section contains details of the most recent surveys recorded in the survey sheet. This includes the measured depth, inclination, azimuth, DLS (dogleg section) and TVD. The UD (Up/Down) and LR (Left/Right) columns indicate how far away the surveys are from the principal plan. Also displayed is the length of any sliding recorded in between each survey, and the calculated motor yield for that period.
The green line below the surveys represents the bit projection. The depth of the bit projection is the last recorded depth in the slide sheet. The trajectory of this projection is set by the action recorded in the slide sheet between the last survey point and the deepest depth in the slide sheet. If the drill string has been rotating, the bit projection will be a rotation projection. This will be straight unless include rotary in projection is turned on in the Settings dialog (13.11.6 – DD Dashboard Settings Window). If the drill string has been sliding, the bit projection will be a sliding projection, based on the distance of the slide and the motor yield calculated in the Settings dialog.
The two yellow lines below the bit projection represent the bit projection extended +100ft (30.48m) and +200ft (60.96m) when in Vertical or Lateral Mode. These projections are always rotary with no sliding, and if include rotary in projection is turned on in the Settings dialog then it will use the rotary DLS and rotary TF, also located in the Settings dialog. When in Curve Mode the yellow line represents the target of the curve projection.
The pink line represents the advisory projection. This shows the position of the well if the DD follows the slide recommendation in the Toolface Rose for 100 ft beyond the bit projection.
The projections will be updated in real time using the deepest out of the slide sheet or the survey sheet. If the latest survey plus survey offset is deeper than the latest slide sheet record, then the projections will be based off the survey sheet. If not, they will be based off the slide sheet.
The 3D Plot section operates in a very similar way to the 3D chart (see section 12.3 - 3D Chart). The focus point of the chart is always the reference well being drilled. Actual wells including the reference well and offsets are all coloured red. Plans are coloured blue The user can use the up and down arrow keys to move the focus point up and down the well and the information on the left will update. The user can right click to access the context menu and toggle the closest approach distances between highside and north reference.
The spheres on the plan/survey lines represent surveys or critical points in the plan. The green line represents the bit projection. The yellow line represents the bit projection extended +200ft (or 60.96m), or the curve projection when in Curve Mode. The pink line represents the advisory projection. This shows the direction of the well if the DD follows the slide recommendation in the Toolface Rose. The values for all these projections can be found in the Real Time Projection section.
The projections will be updated in real time using the deepest out of the slide sheet or the survey sheet. If the latest survey plus survey offset is deeper than the latest slide sheet record, then the projections will be based off the survey sheet. If not, they will be based off the slide sheet.
The elements displayed on the 3D Plot can be configured using the 3D Chart Menu (section 13.11.4 – DD Dashboard 3D Chart Menu).
The Drilling Parameters section consists of two parts. On the left all drilling parameters received via WITS are plotted are plotted against time on two trace charts. The RPM, pump pressure, WOB and block position are plotted on the top chart. The Differential pressure, flow rate, hookload and torque are plotted on the bottom chart. The Y axis ranges for all these parameters can be customised by opening the Settings menu and selecting Set Drilling Parameters Ranges.
On the right the Drilling Parameters section displays the most recent update for several parameters that are drawn from different sources:
The drilling parameters from Hole Depth to Block Position are taken directly from the WITS feed.
The Survey Offset and Gamma Offset are taken from the MWD Component Details in the Drill String Editor.
The Rig State is taken from the Rig States dialog.
The Effective Toolface and Slide Grade are calculated using toolface data from the WITS feed.
The Hole Size, Bit Type and Bit Hydraulics values are taken from the Bit Component Details in the Drill String Editor.
The Bottom Hole Temperature is taken from the WITS feed.
Print warnings report: Prints an excel format report that displays a summary of any warnings that have been issued during drilling. Each warning will be listed in the Warning Name column. The threshold set in the DD Dashboard Settings that triggers each warning is listed in the Threshold Value column. The Time Above Threshold shows the total cumulative time that each threshold has been violated. Finally, the Alert Message column displays the message that will have been displayed in the DD Dashboard Settings window.
Exit: Closes the DD Dashboard
Number of toolfaces: Controls how many toolfaces from the WITS feed will be displayed on the toolface rose. For example, if the maximum of 10 is selected, then the 10 most recently received toolfaces will be displayed.
Show offsets on rosebud: Toggles whether offset wells are displayed on the toolface rose. Offsets will be displayed as a green dot with the name of the offset. Offsets are selected in the Offset Selector (section 6.4.7 – Offset Selector)
Set drilling parameter ranges: Opens the Set Curve Ranges dialog, which allows the user to configure the Drilling Parameters display (see 13.11.1.6 – Drilling Parameters below). The name of each curve is listed in the Curve Name column. The user can set the maximum and minimum values displayed on each curve by editing the Max and Min columns.
Settings: Opens the DD Dashboard Settings dialog. See 13.11.6 – DD Dashboard Settings Window below.
Check for warnings: Toggling this option off will disable ALL warning alerts in the DD Dashboard if any of the warning thresholds in the DD Dashboard Settings dialog are violated. This includes anti-collision warnings. It will also disable the automatic opening of the DD Dashboard Settings dialog when a threshold is violated.
Gauge settings: Opens the Gauge Settings dialog, which allows the user to configure the Rig Gauges display (see 13.11.1.1 – Real Time Gauges below). The user can set the WITS mnemonic that each gauge displays in the Mnemonic column. They can then set the minimum and maximum values on the gauge using the Max and Min columns.
Rig messages: Opens the Rig Messages dialog. This dialog can be used to force the Toolface Rose to display a user entered slide recommendation instead of the calculated one. It can also send a message to the DD Dashboard on the Innova Web Portal.
To force a slide recommendation, the user should check the Force slide directive option. They should then enter the toolface and length of the slide advisory they wish to display. If the Specify Depth option is not checked, the advisory will start at the current bit depth. If it is checked, the user can enter the desired start depth and the slide advisory will not appear until the bit reaches that depth. Once the slide advisory is set up, the user can click the Send button to update the Toolface Rose, Slide Recommendation and advisory projections in the 3D Plot and Real Time Projection sections. Note that the toolface in the Slide Recommendation will not change.
The user can clear the forced slide directive by opening the DD Dashboard Settings window and clicking on the Calculate recommendation button.
In the Rig Message section, the user can enter their desired message and then click the Send button. Any users viewing the well through the Innova Web Portal will see the message on the DD Dashboard.
Show gauges/toolface rose/3D view/parameters chart: Toggling these options off will hide their respective displays in the DD Dashboard main user interface. The remaining displays will be resized to fill the empty space, so the user can get a clearer picture of displays that they want by hiding ones that they do not need.
The below options all configure how the 3D Plot (13.11.1.5 – 3D Plot) is displayed.
Show targets: Displays targets on the 3D Plot. For information on creating targets see section 11.0 – Targets.
Show target names: If targets are turned on, this option will display the target name beside each target.
Show lease lines: Displays lease lines on the 3D Plot. Lease lines are created in the Targets dialog (11.0 – Targets).
Show survey points: Actual wellbores and surveys displayed on the 3D Plot will have spheres showing the position of each survey.
Show critical points: Displays the plan points on the principal plan in the 3D Plot.
Show critical point descriptions: Critical points will have annotations attached that display the measured depth, inclination, azimuth, and TVD of each point.
Show worksight: Displays the worksight around the centre point on the 3D Plot. By default, the centre point is at the end of the bit projection.
Show compass ring: Displays the compass ring around the centre point on the 3D Plot. By default, the centre point is at the end of the bit projection.
Show well names: Displays well names on all wells and plans on the 3D Plot. Names are displayed at the deepest point on the well/plan.
Show slide colours: Colours the reference well on the 3D plot to show which parts were drilled while rotating (red) and which were drilled while sliding (green).
Show all closest approaches: User must first turn on Show closest approach by right clicking on the 3D Plot. If this option is toggled on, the 3D Plot will show the closest approach to all offset wells instead of the currently selected offset well.
Show lease line curtain: If a lease line is present and show lease lines is on, the 3D Plot will draw a curtain from the lease line up to surface.
Slide advisory history: Opens the Slide Advisory History dialog, which contains a record of all suggested slides. The dialog can be exported to an Excel report using the Print option in the File menu.
Daily report: Opens the Daily Report window for the actual well currently being viewed in the DD Dashboard. See section 13.4– Daily Reporting.
Slide sheet: Minimizes the DD Dashboard and maximizes the slide sheet for the current well (See section 13.10 – Slide Sheet). Note that closing the slide sheet will also close the DD Dashboard.
Survey sheet: Minimizes the DD Dashboard and the slide sheet and maximizes the survey sheet for the current well (See section 9.0 – Survey View). Note that closing the survey will also close the slide sheet and the DD Dashboard.
The Settings window can be opened from the DD Dashboard Settings menu (see section 13.11.3 – DD Dashboard Settings Menu or by double-clicking anywhere in the DD Dashboard. It will also appear if there are any orange or red warnings active in the Warnings section.
The Settings window allows the user to configure how projections, warnings, anti-collision and the slide recommendations behave in the DD Dashboard. The user customises this behaviour in the Configuration section. The Warnings section will display alerts if the wellbore gets close to limits set by the user in the Configuration section.
The Calculate Recommendation button in the top right will force the slide advisory in the Toolface Rose to recalculate. This can be used to undo a forced slide directive in the Rig Messages tool in the Settings Menu. See the description of Curve Mode below for details on the other options in the top of the window.
The first five options in the Configuration section choose the drilling mode Whenever a mode is selected, the options that are relevant to that mode will be highlighted in blue in the Configuration section.
Vertical Mode: This mode should be selected when drilling the vertical section of the well. When in Vertical Mode the Warnings section will monitor the Vertical Maximum Distance (Dist. from plan) and Max Vertical Inclination (Max Inc) limits set in the Configuration section.
The Toolface Rose will display the tolerance window as a circle around the centre of the rose. The radius of the circle is set by the Vertical Maximum Distance limit and the slide advisory will attempt to stay within this limit.
Curve Mode: This mode should be selected when drilling a curve to land off a lateral or tangent section. When in Curve Mode the Warnings section will monitor the DLS to Land limit set in the Configuration section.
When in curve mode there is no tolerance window and no yellow extended bit projections. Instead, the yellow projection becomes a landing curve projection in the Toolface Rose, 3D Plot and Real Time Projection sections. This curve will project from the bit projection to the landing target, which is set by the Landing TVD, Landing Inclination and Landing Azimuth in the Configuration section.
The slide advisory will give recommendations with the intention of hitting the landing target. On the Toolface Rose, the yellow diamond shows the distance between the landing target and the principal plan. If the yellow diamond is in the centre, this means that Well Seeker projects the wellbore to land exactly with the well plan.
The landing target is chosen in the Landing Target section at the top of the dialog.
Select Critical Point: This dropdown box contains all the plan points from the principal plan. When the user chooses a critical point from the list, it will update the landing target to the selected point. The Landing TVD, Landing Inclination and Landing Azimuth in the Configuration section will update to match the TVD, inclination, and azimuth of the critical point. Auto pick curve target must be turned off for this to work.
Update Critical Points: If the principal plan is updated while the DD Dashboard is open, the user should click on this button to refresh the Select Critical Point dropdown list.
Find Landing: If the user clicks on this button, Well Seeker will inspect the principal plan and attempt to automatically pick the most suitable critical point for the landing from the list. The selection in the Select Critical Point dropdown list will not update but the Landing TVD, Landing Inclination and Landing Azimuth in the Configuration section will.
Lateral Mode: Lateral Mode is designed for drilling the lateral of tangent section of the well. When in Vertical Mode the Warnings section will monitor the Lateral left/right tolerance (Max Left) and Lateral up/down tolerance (Max Down), Max delta inclination (Max Delta Inc), Max delta azimuth (Max Delt Azi) limits set in the Configuration section.
The Toolface Rose will display the tolerance window as a rectangle the centre of the rose. The height and width of the rectangle is set by the Lateral up/down tolerance and Lateral left/right tolerance limits. The slide advisory will attempt to stay within this rectangle.
Nudge Mode: This mode is currently in development and does not perform any function currently.
No Mode: No Mode only provides a projection to the bit. Extended projections, advisory projections, tolerance windows and almost all settings in the Configuration section are disabled. However, the anti-collision settings and warnings do still apply. It is possible to use the slide advisory in this mode, but it is not recommended.
The Warnings section monitors the constraints and limits for the wellbore set by the user in the Configuration section below. When the wellbore approaches one these limits – for example, the well wanders too far off plan and approaches the edge of the tolerance window – the DD Dashboard will issue an orange warning. The DD Dashboard main interface will flash orange, and the Settings window will appear. The warning that is nearing its limit will appear in the Warnings section, highlighted in orange.
If the wellbore crosses a limit completely the DD Dashboard will issue a red warning. The DD Dashboard main interface will flash red, and the Settings window will appear. The warning that is nearing its limit will appear in the Warnings section, highlighted in red.
Warning: Displays the name of the parameter being monitored.
Current value: The current value of the parameter as transmitted by WITS.
Threshold: The limit for the value, set by the user in the Configuration section below.
Active: When an orange or red warning is issued, this column will populate with a brief description of the issue.
Suppress: When a warning appears in the Warnings section, the user can check this option to suppress it. A suppressed warning will not cause the DD Dashboard to flash and will not cause the Settings window to appear. The user can suppress all warnings by toggling the Check for warnings option off in the Settings menu.
Time Exceeded: The Warnings section will record the total amount of time that the parameter has spent above the threshold.
Limits specific to the drilling modes and drilling parameters are shown constantly in the Warnings section regardless of whether they are close to their limit thresholds. The limits specific to drilling mode are described in the Drilling Modes section above. The Max Differential Pressure, Max Flow and Max RPM thresholds relate to the operational limits of the motor. To set them, the user needs to open the Drill String Editor for the BHA that the slide sheet belongs to. Then they should select the motor in the Assembly Details section and edit the limits in the Component Properties section. See section 13.5 – Drill String Editor.
After choosing the drilling mode, the user can then use the relevant options in the Configuration section to define how the slide advisory behaves, how projections are calculated and what tolerances they wish to stay within when drilling the current section of the wellbore
Include rotary in projection: Toggling this option on will include some unintended dogleg achieved while rotating ahead. This dogleg will then be factored in when making projections and slide recommendations. The Rotary DLS and Rotary TF settings define the size and direction of this dogleg. If this option is turned off Well Seeker will assume rotary drilling to be perfectly straight when making projections and slide recommendations.
Slide advisory: Toggles on/off the slide recommendation and advisory projection in the Toolface Rose, Real Time Projection and 3D Plot sections. This option can be used hide the slide advisory of the user does not need it. It can also force the slide advisory on when in No Mode, however this is not recommended.
Limit AC display: Hides any offset wells in the Real Time Anti-Collision section that are too far away to pose any collision risk.
Auto pick curve target: Only relevant in Curve Mode. When this option is toggled on, it will alter the target of the curve projection so that it hits the landing inclination as close to the principal plan as possible. However, it will alter the Landing TVD and Landing azimuth of the curve projection to do so. The landing inclination should be selected first either using select critical point dropdown or entering a value manually into the Landing inclination option.
Auto motor yield: Only functions when in Curve Mode. When this option is toggled on Well Seeker will use the slide sheet and survey sheet to automatically calculate the value in the Motor Yield setting. The survey sheet and slide sheet must cover the same part of the well for Well Seeker to be able to calculate the Motor Yield. Well Seeker will automatically keep the Motor Yield up to date as new slides and surveys are added.
Auto rotary: Like the Auto Motor Yield option above, when this option is toggled on it will use the survey sheet and the slide sheet to automatically calculate the Rotary DLS and Rotary TF settings. Does not function in No Mode.
Landing TVD: Only relevant in Curve Mode. Sets the TVD of the end point of the curve projection. This can be set by selecting the landing point from the select critical point dropdown list or using the auto pick curve target option. If auto pick curve target is off, this value can be edited manually.
Landing inclination: Only relevant in Curve Mode. Sets the inclination of the end point of the curve projection. This can be set by selecting the landing point from the select critical point dropdown list. If auto pick curve target is off, this value can be edited manually.
Landing azimuth: Only relevant in Curve Mode. Sets the azimuth of the end point of the curve projection. This can be set by selecting the landing point from the select critical point dropdown list or using the auto pick curve target option. If auto pick curve target is off, this value can be edited manually.
Rotary DLS: Sets the unintended dogleg of the wellbore while rotating ahead. Well Seeker will use the slide and survey records to automatically calculate this if Auto Rotary is turned on. If Include Rotary in Projection is turned on, Well Seeker will then factor this into the bit projection and the slide advisory.
Rotary TF: Sets the toolface for the Rotary DLS option above. Well Seeker will use the slide and survey records to automatically calculate this if Auto Rotary is turned on. If Include Rotary in Projection is turned on, Well Seeker will then factor this into the bit projection and the slide advisory.
Motor yield: The motor yield of the drill string while sliding. This will be used to calculate the slide recommendation and the bit projection. Well Seeker will automatically calculate this if Auto Motor Yield is turned on.
Default motor yield: If Well Seeker is unable to calculate a motor yield for the Motor Yield option above, it will use the value entered here by the user. Does not function in No Mode.
Max vertical inclination: This setting is only utilized when in Vertical Mode. Allows the user to set the maximum inclination that the wellbore is allowed to reach. A warning will be issued as this limit is approached. The slide advisory will take this setting into account and will suggest a slide if the inclination starts to get close the limit.
Max delta inclination: This setting is utilized in Lateral Mode. It represents the maximum allowed difference between the wellbore inclination and the principal plan inclination. The user will receive a warning if this limit is approached, and the slide advisory will recommend a slide back towards the plan.
Max delta azimuth: This setting is utilized in Curve Mode and Lateral Mode. In Curve Mode it sets how much the Auto Pick Curve Target is allowed to alter the azimuth of the landing point. For example, if the selected critical point has an azimuth of 140 and the Max Delta Azi is 2, then turning on Auto Pick Curve Target will result in a Landing Azi value of 138 – 142. Increasing the Max Delta Azi will allow Auto Pick Curve Target to land closer to the plan but at the cost of azimuth accuracy.
In Lateral Mode the Max Delta Azi represents the maximum allowed difference between the wellbore azimuth and the principal plan azimuth. The user will receive a warning if this limit is approached, and the slide advisory will recommend a slide back towards the plan.
Vertical maximum distance: This setting is only utilized when in Vertical Mode. Sets the maximum distance that the wellbore is allowed to deviate from the well plan. A warning will be issued as this limit is approached. The slide advisory will take this setting into account and will suggest a slide if the distance starts to get close the limit. When in Vertical Mode this distance is illustrated on the Toolface Rose as the radius of the tolerance window around the centre of the rose.
Lateral up/down tolerance: This setting is only utilized when in Lateral Mode. Sets the maximum distance above or below that the wellbore is allowed to deviate from the principal plan. This value is represented on the Toolface Rose as the height of the red tolerance window. The slide advisory will attempt to keep the wellbore within the tolerance window, and the user will receive a warning if the bit projection nears the edges.
Lateral left/right tolerance: This setting is only utilized when in Lateral Mode. Sets the maximum distance to the left or right that the wellbore is allowed to deviate from the principal plan. This value is represented on the Toolface Rose as the width of the red tolerance window. The slide advisory will attempt to keep the wellbore within the tolerance window, and the user will receive a warning if the bit projection nears the edges.
Lateral tolerance offset up/down: This setting is only utilized when in Lateral Mode. Allows the user to shift the lateral tolerance window in the Toolface Rose up or down. Negative values will shift the window up, while positive values will shift the window down.
Lateral tolerance offset left/right: This setting is only utilized when in Lateral Mode. Allows the user to shift the lateral tolerance window in the Toolface Rose left or right. Negative values will shift the window left, while positive values will shift the window down.
Maximum DLS: Sets the maximum dogleg severity that the slide advisory in the Toolface Rose is allowed to suggest for a slide. Does not function in No Mode.
Minimum slide length: Sets the minimum slide distance that the slide advisory in the Toolface Rose is allowed to suggest for a slide. This is to stop the slide advisory suggesting many tiny nudge slides. If the recommended slide is less than this minimum, the slide advisory will suggest rotating ahead instead. Does not function in No Mode.
Magnetic to gravity X/O: Sets the inclination crossover point between magnetic and gravity toolfaces. For wellbore inclinations below the value set here, toolfaces received over WITS will be interpreted as magnetic toolfaces. Inclinations above the value will be interpreted as gravity/highside toolfaces.
Aggressiveness: Aggressiveness is a coefficient that tells the slide advisory how strictly it should enforce limits and monitor the wellbores proximity to the plan. Value should be between 0 and 100. At high aggressiveness the slide advisory will react sooner, while at low aggressiveness it will allow the wellbore to stray closer to limits before it suggests a slide. Default value is 50. Does not function in Curve Mode or No Mode.
Projection distance 1: Sets the size of the first yellow extended bit projection in the Real Time Projection section. By default, this is +100ft beyond the bit projection, but the user can change the distance here. Does not function in Curve Mode or No Mode.
Projection distance 2: Sets the size of the second yellow extended bit projection in the Real Time Projection section. By default, this is +200ft beyond the bit projection, but the user can change the distance here. Does not function in Curve Mode or No Mode.
Stand length: Sets the length of a stand. This is to help the slide advisory work out how much distance it has to work with when suggesting a slide. Default value is 100 ft. Does not function in Curve Mode or No Mode.
Stand length curve: This setting is only utilized when in Curve Mode. This works the same as the Stand Length setting above but allows the user to set a different stand length for the curve section. This is in case the user wishes to take multiple surveys in a stand rather than at just stand down. Default value is 30ft.
Minimum C2C: Sets the minimum centre-to-centre distance allowed in the Real Time Anti-Collision section. A warning will be issued as this limit is approached.
Minimum C2C lease line: Sets the minimum centre-to-centre distance for lease lines allowed in the Real Time Anti-Collision section. A warning will be issued as this limit is approached.
Minimum separation factor: Sets the minimum separation factor (SF) allowed in the Real Time Anti-Collision section. A warning will be issued as this limit is approached.
Only available at Actual Well level. The Daily Activity Editor allows the user to view all the daily activities for an actual well in one chronological table. The user can make edits to the activities in the table the same way they would in the Daily Reporting window.
The Daily Activity Editor can be used to check for mistakes in the daily activities. Cells will be highlighted in red if the end time/depth do not match with the start time/depth of row below. Cells in the BHA and Phase columns will also be highlighted in red if the BHA/phase is different to the ones above and below. This is usually an indicator that the user has filled in the wrong BHA/phase by mistake.
Once the user is happy with their edits, they can save them by clicking on the Apply button.
The AFE Designer can only be accessed via a plan, by right clicking on a planned well in the database tree and selecting AFE designer via the reporting submenu. This option will be greyed out when accessed from any other level in the database tree. See Section 15.0 – AFE Plan Designer.
Only available at actual well level. This option exports all the reporting data for the actual well to a .mdb file. This allows the user to import the reporting data into a different database or another actual well, using the Import Reporting Data option.
Only available at actual well level. Imports a .mdb reporting file containing daily reporting data, created by the Export Reporting Data option. Note that this will overwrite all reporting data currently in the actual well.
This option is available at any level in the database tree by right clicking on an item and selecting Reporting > Well Analytics. Alternatively, it can be opened by clicking on the Well Analytics icon ( ) on the Daily Reporting Toolbar. See Section 14.0 – Well Analytics.
Only accessible at Operator level. The Bid Sheet tool allows the user to generate a quote for services to a client. If the bid is approved, the Bid Sheet tool can be used to quickly convert the quote into cost codes for an actual well.
The user can create a new bid sheet by clicking on the New Bid Sheet icon in the toolbar or selecting the Add option in the File menu. In the top section of the Bid Sheet dialog the user can select existing bids from the dropdown box. The box beside the dropdown box contains the date that the bid sheet was created. This can be edited if the user wishes. In the Description box the user should give the bid sheet a name. On the far right of the top section, the user can enter an expiry date for the bid.
In the Bid Categories section, the user can enter prices for the quote. In the Description field they should enter a name for each item. In the Cost Code field, they should give each item a unique code. The Cost field should contain the price for one unit of the item. In the Schedule field the user should choose how the item is charged from the dropdown box. For example, if the item is a day rate for DD services, the user should choose the DAY schedule. The items will appear as a price listing in the quote.
For each item entered in the Bid Categories section, the user can add additional costs or items in the Details section. These costs will be listed beneath each parent item in the price listing in the quote. If the item is included in the list of its parent, the user should select INCLUDED from the Cost Schedule dropdown. If the item has additional costs, the user should give it a Cost Code and a Cost for one unit.
In the Customer and Supplier Details sections, the user should pick the desired customer and supplier from the dropdown boxes. The information in the Customer Details and Supplier Details section is entered in the Shipping Addresses tool (see section 13.7 – Shipping Addresses)
In the Front Page Text section the user should write a cover letter for their quote. The signature for the Front Page Text will be taken from the Supplier Details. In the Notes section the user can add any additional information. This will appear below the price listing in the quote.
Once the above sections have been completed, the user can generate a quote in PDF format by clicking on the Print bid sheet icon on the toolbar or by opening the File menu and selecting Print.
If the bid is approved by the client, the user should enter the date it was approved in the Appr. Date box in the top section. The user approving the bid should also enter their name in the Approved By box. Note that if connected to a remote server database, the user must have Approver user permission set to do this – see section 6.4.12.5 – User Permissions.
If the user has the Approver user permission set, they can also archive bids by clicking on the Archived checkbox. This will make the bid invisible to users on a remote server database that do not have Approver user permission. Archiving bids on a local database has no effect.
Once a bid has been approved by entering a name into the Approved By box, the cost codes in the Bid Categories and Details sections can be sent to a well as cost codes. The user should click on the Copy Bid to Cost Codes button on the toolbar or use the same option in the File menu. Well Seeker will ask the user which well under the current operator they would like to send them to. Any items in the Bid Categories and Details section with a Cost Code and a Cost entered will be added to that wells Cost Code table. See section 13.2 - Cost Codes for more information.
Save: Saves any changes made to the current bid sheet.
Print: Exports the current bid sheet to a PDF format report.
Add: Creates a new bid sheet.
Delete: Deletes the currently selected bid sheet.
Copy: Creates a duplicate of the currently selected bid sheet.
Copy to another operator: Duplicates the currently selected bid sheet to another operator selected by the user.
Copy bid to cost codes: Sends the costs in the Bid Categories and Details sections to the Cost Code table of a well under the current operator. A dialog box will appear that allows the user to select the destination well. This option is only available if a bid has been approved by entering a name into the Approved By box.
Exit: Closes the Bid Sheet dialog.
Archive Bid: Archives the currently selected bid. On a remote server database this makes the bid invisible to anybody that does not have Approver privileges.
Only available at actual well level. This option can be used to move all daily reporting data from one actual well to another. The destination actual well must be under the same well as the origin actual well. All reporting data in the origin actual well will be removed.
Only available at actual well level. This option opens the In Zone % Calculator, which lets the user calculate how much of their surveys lie within a defined tolerance zone around the desired well path.
The user should define the tolerance zone as follows:
Lateral start/end MD: The start and end point of the lateral zone.
TVD: The TVD of the lateral that the user desires to maintain.
Dip: The horizontal dip of the lateral.
Azimuth: The bearing of the lateral referenced to north.
Up/Down/Left/Right Tolerance: The distance above, below and to the left and right of the lateral to the edge of the tolerance zone.
Once the above values have been entered, the user can click on the calculate button to get the In Zone % result. Well Seeker compares the surveys in the wellbore to the tolerance zone and calculates what percentage of them lie inside it.
Only available at actual well level. If a slide sheet is deleted or corrupted, it may be possible to recover it from the daily activities section of the daily report.
The user should select the BHA or BHAs that they wish to recover the slide sheets for, by checking the Recover checkbox beside their name and then clicking OK. Note that this will overwrite any existing data in the slide sheet and cannot be undone.
Well Seeker will look for rotary drilling and slide drilling activities that are assigned to the selected BHA in the daily report. It will then transfer the date, start time, end time, start depth and end depth of these activities to the slide sheet. It will also attempt to read the drilling parameters from the activity description and transfer them to the slide sheet. However, this will only work if the description is written in the below format, as if it had been imported using the Get DDR from Run Sheet button:
This option is available at any level in the database tree by right clicking on an item and selecting Reporting > Well Analytics. Alternatively, it can be opened by clicking on the Well Analytics icon () on the Daily Reporting Toolbar. The Well Analytics tool allows the user to search through their database and select wells based on various search criteria. The user can then plot these wells on google maps or compare them using several KPI metrics.
On the left of the Well Analytics window is the database tree. This tree contains every actual well and well plan in the database. Clicking on the check box beside each well enables them to be included in the Map and KPI tab. The user can select these wells manually or using the filtering tools in the Search tab.
Print current chart Excel/PDF: Prints the last viewed KPI chart as an image in an Excel or PDF document.
Print all charts Excel/PDF: Export all KPI charts as images in a single Excel or PDF document,
Export all chart data: Exports all KPI charts as data tables in an Excel document.
Exit: Close the Well Analytics window.
Expand All: Expands the Database Tree to show every well in the database.
Collapse All: Collapses the Database Tree so that no wells are visible.
Hide Tree: Removes the Database Tree section from the Analytics window so that the user can view the map and the KPI charts easier. Click on Hide Tree again to bring the Database Tree back.
Select Wells: All wells currently in the Wells section, and set as included, will be selected in the Database Tree, allowing them to be used in the Maps and KPI tab.
Deselect Wells: Clears the selections made in the Database Tree.
Search: Any well that matches all the filters will appear in the Wells section.
Clear Results: Clears all wells from the Wells section.
Reset Filters: Clears all search filters.
Motor KPI: Once a search has been completed this button may be selected. Creates an excel motor KPI report, containing statistics for all motors used in the filtered wells that appear in the Wells section.
Motor KPI Summary: Once a search has been completed this button may be selected. Creates an excel motor KPI report for the filtered wells that appear in the Wells section. This is like the Motor KPI report but instead of listing individual motors is summarises them by manufacturer, size and state.
MWD KPI: Once a search has been completed this button may be selected. Creates an excel MWD KPI report, containing statistics for all MWD tools used in the filtered wells that appear in the Wells section.
Section KPI: Once a search has been completed this button may be selected. Creates an excel report containing statistics for each drilling phase in the filtered wells that appear in the Wells section.
Revenue Report: Only functions when a Date Range filter has been applied in the Search tab. This report lists every job running on each day inside the date range, along with the total revenue and number of rigs for each day.
Rig Days Report: Only functions when a Date Range filter has been applied in the Search tab. This report lists every job running on each day inside the date range, along with the number of rigs, the 30-day average rigs and the 10-day average rigs for each day.
Personnel Report: Only functions when a Date Range filter has been applied in the Search tab. Creates an excel personnel report for all wells within the date range. This lists all personnel in the database and shows the days that they worked within the set date range.
Rig Days Chart: Displays a chart generated using data from the Rig Days Report.
Revenue Chart: Displays a chart generated using data from the Revenue Report.
Well Ranking: Generates a Well Ranking report from the filtered wells that appear in the Wells section. This report shows which out of the selected wells performed the best in several different categories, as well as an overall score between 0 and 1 based on the performance of each well over all categories.
Well Ranking Weights: Allows the user to set how much each category affects the overall score of a well in the Well Ranking report. The user should enter a value between 0 and 1 in the Weight column. The user can also exclude a category from affecting the overall score entirely by unchecking the checkbox in the Included column.
Drill Records: This option is only available when connected to a remote server database. Opens the Drilling Records dialog, which allows the user to create a report containing rankings of the wells that have performed best in selected KPIs.
The user should choose the report format (Excel or PDF) from the Report Type drop-down. The number in the # Results box sets how many results are in each ranking – for example a value of 5 will mean each ranking lists the top 5 wells.
The user should select the KPIs that they want to create rankings for in the KPI column. Currently there are four KPIs to choose from – fastest section, fastest ROP, longest section, and max footage per day. The user can optionally limit each ranking to a single phase and/or hole size if they wish, by choosing a value from the dropdowns in the Phase and Hole Size columns.
Checking the Inc Non Drlg Hrs checkbox will factor non-drilling hours into the rankings. The Active column can be toggled off to disable a ranking and remove it from the report.
Once the user is happy with their setup, they can generate the report by clicking on the Create button.
Get well list from search grid: If this option is toggled on, reports generated from the KPI Reports Menu will be populated with wells in the Wells section. If it is toggled off, the reports will be populated by the wells that have been selected in the Database Tree.
Remove Flat Time at Start: Removes any time when there is no change in depth at the start of the Depth V Days KPI chart. The Generate KPI button on the KPI Tab needs to be clicked before any changes are applied.
Remove all flat time: Removes any time when there is no change in depth at any point in the Depth V Days KPI chart. The Generate KPI button on the KPI Tab needs to be clicked before any changes are applied.
Print tabular Depth V Days: Exports the data in the Depth V Days chart as a table in Excel format. The Generate KPI button on the KPI Tab needs to be clicked before this function will work.
The search tab contains several options which can be used to quickly filter through the data in the database tree to find the relevant information. Each field must be activated using the checkbox to its right.
Operator: Allows the user to filter their search for a given operator.
Date Range: Allows the user to filter their search based on start and end dates. The start and end dates which Well Seeker searches for are the ones associated with the daily reports for each individual well (See Section 13.4– Daily Reporting).
Distance from Well: Enter a decimal latitude and longitude into the Lat and Long boxes, and then a radius into the Dist box. Well Seeker will include any wells in the database which are the radius entered. The user can also select a well from the dropdown boxes – this will populate the Lat and Long boxes with the surface location of the selected well.
Drilling Parameters: Allows the user to search for wells that contain the entered drilling parameter. Currently only RPM is available.
Formation: Allows the user to filter their search for wells that are targeting a selected formation. The formation which Well Seeker searches for is the one entered in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report. (See 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel)
Assembly Type: Allows the user to filter their search for wells with the selected BHA type. Options available from the drop-down menu are Motor, RSS and Rotary. A BHA is defined as a Motor or RSS BHA if there is a motor or RSS present for the BHA in the Drill String Editor (Section 13.5 – Drill String Editor). A BHA can then be assigned to a well in the Daily Activity section of the Daily Report (Section 13.4.7.6 – DDR Daily Activity).
Failure: Allows the user to filter their search for wells which had a BHA failure. The failure type can be MWD, Motor or Any. Whether or not a BHA failed is defined in the Performance Report (Section 13.5.6 – Performance Report Menu).
State: Allows the user to filter their search for wells in the selected US state. The state is assigned in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report. (See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel)
Job Number: Filter the search using job number. The job number is assigned in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report. (See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel)
Directional Company: Filter the search using the directional company. The directional company is assigned in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report. (See Section 13.4.8 – Well Data & Personnel)
Well Status: Filter the search using the well status. The well status is assigned on the main userinterface in the Daily Reports window.
Rig: Filter the search using the rig used to drill the well. The rig for a well is defined by the selection in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report.
Motor SN: Filter the search for a particular mud motor serial number. The mud motor serial number is defined by the SN of the motor in the Drill String Editor.
County: Filter the search using the county. The county that a well is in is defined by the selection in the Well Data & Personnel dialog in the daily report.
Motor Make: Filter the search using the motor make. The motor make is taken from the motor component details in the Drill String Editor.
Bit Make: Filter the search using the bit make. The bit make is taken from the motor component details in the Drill String Editor.
LIH (Lost in Hole): Allows the user to filter their search for failures that resulted in a BHA being lost in hole. For a BHA to be flagged as LIH, the LIH checkbox must be checked in the Failure Information section of the Performance Report.
Hole Size: Allows the user to filter their search for wells that drilled a section with the selected hole size. The hole size is set by the OD of the bit in the Drill String Editor.
MWD Type: Allows the user to search by the selected MWD type. This is set on the main user interface in the Daily Reports window.
Drive Type: Allows the user to search by the selected drive type. This is set on the main user interface in the Daily Reports window.
Motor Config: Allows the user to search by the selected motor lobes and stages. These are set in the Component Properties section for the motor in the Drill String Editor.
Serial Number: Allows the user to search for wells containing tools with the matching serial number. The serial number is set in the Component Properties section for any tool in the Drill String Editor. Serial numbers entered in the Tool Inventory do not count.
Incidents/Failures: Searches for wells that have the Failed option checked in the Performance Report in the Drill String Editor. If CLOSED is selected in the drop-down box, then the results will only show wells where the Closed option has been checked in the Performance Report. If OPEN is selected then the results will only show wells where the Closed option has NOT been checked.
Chargeback: Searches for wells that have any text entered in the Chargeback section in the Performance Report in the Drill String Editor.
Once the desired filters have been selected, the user can then choose from one of the following options:
Search: Any well that matches all the filters will appear in the Wells section below.
Clear Results: Clears all wells from the Wells section.
Reset Filters: Clears all search filters.
Select Wells: All wells currently in the Wells section, and set as included, will be selected in the Database Tree, allowing them to be used in the Maps and KPI tab.
Deselect Wells: Clears the selections made in the Database Tree.
Check All: Toggles the Include column on for all wells in the Wells section. Wells with Include toggled off will not be selected when the Select Wells button is clicked.
Uncheck all: Toggles the Include column off for all wells in the Wells section. Wells with Include toggled off will not be selected when the Select Wells button is clicked.
Open Job: Selecting a well in the Wells section and then clicking Open Job will close the Analytics window and open the well in the main database tree.
Map Options:
Well Paths: Displays the well path of selected wells on the map tab. Note that this will always show the surveys but will only show the plans if the Show planned well paths option is selected as well.
Lease Lines: If any of the selected wells have lease lines associated with them, selecting this option will display them on the map.
Well Names: Displays the well names of selected wells on the map. Note, the names will display at the wellhead.
Planned wells: Displays the well paths of selected plans on the map, so long as Show well paths on map is selected.
Colour by Op: Selecting this option will colour wells and plans on the map according to their Operator.
Database QC Report
Clicking on the Print button in the Database QC Report section will generate an Excel spreadsheet that contains statistics for all wells selected in the Database Tree. The QC report contains the following information:
The Map tab displays the selected wells on Google Maps. Surveys are displayed in Blue and Well Plans are displayed in Green. Note that Google Maps references the WGS 84 Mercator projection, so any wells referenced to a CRS which does not use this projection, may be offset slightly on the map.
How the wells are displayed on the map can be customised using options found on the Search tab (see previous section).
The KPI tab allows the user to quickly generate a variety of KPI charts for the selected wells. The data used to generate these charts is taken from the daily reports and BHA’s associated with each of these wells.
Generate KPI: Generates all the KPI charts for the selected wells.
Export: Creates an excel document containing the data used to generate the currently selected chart
White Chart: Changes the background of the charts from black to white.
Sanitised: Instantly sanitises the names displayed along the X axis of the charts.
Short Names: Shortens names in the X axis be removing the rig name.
Sort Data: Sorts the data in the chart so that the smallest value is on the left and the largest on the right.
Select KPI: This dropdown menu allows the user to select from the following list of KPI charts:
Phase: When in the appropriate KPI chart, the user can select to either view the Well data or any one of the available Phases from this dropdown menu.
ISCWSA – Collision Avoidance Calculations – Current Common Practice
ISCWSA – Error Model Revisions – Steve Grindrod – 08/10/09
ISCWSA – Standards – Hugh Williamson – 28/02/01
MWD TOOLFACE INDEPENDANT ERROR TERMS – Copesgrove Developments Ltd – 04/11/09
SPE9223 – BOREHOLE POSITON UNCERTAINTY, ANALYSIS OF MEASURING METHODS AND DERIVATION OF SYSTEMATIC ERROR MODEL – C.J.M Wolff, J.P. de Wardt
SPE11382 – CALCULATION OF NMDC LENGTH REQUIRED FOR VARIOUS LATITUEDS DEVELOPED FROM FIELD MEASUREMENTS OF DRILL STRING MAGNETISATION – S.J. Grindrod, J.M. Wolff – 20/02/83
SPE18051 – INSTRUMENT PERFORMANCE MODELS AND THIER APPLICATION TO DIRECTIONAL SURVEYING OPERATIONS –John L. Thorogood – 1990
SPE21261 – SIMPLIFIED EQUATIONS FOR PLANNING DIRECTIONAL AND HORIZONTAL WELLS –M.L. Wiggins, H.C. Juvkam Wold – 02/11/90
SPE36863 – AN IMPROVED METHOD FOR COMPUTING WELLBORE POSITION UNCERTAINTY AND ITS APPLICATION TO COLLISION AND TARGET INTERSECTION PROBABILITY ANALYSIS – Andrew G. Brooks, Harry Wilson – 22/10/96
SPE67616 – ACCURACY PREDICTION FOR DIRECTIONAL MEASUREMENT WHILE DRILLING – H.S. Williamson – 01/12/00
SPE84246 – A COMPENDIUM OF DIRECTIONAL CALCULATIONS BASED ON THE MINIMUM CURVATURE METHOD – S.J. Sawaryn, J.L. Thorogood – 01/03/05
SPE90408 – PREDICTION OF WELLBORE POSITION ACCURACY WHEN SURVEYED WITH GYROSCOPIC TOOLS – Torgeir Torkildsen, Stein T. Havardstein, John Weston, Roger Ekseth – 01/03/08
SPE110014 - A COMPENDIUM OF DIRECTIONAL CALCULATIONS BASED ON THE MINIMUM CURVATURE METHOD: PART 2 – S.J. Sawaryn – 11/11/07
Start Depth: Start depth of the operation
End Depth: End Depth of the operation
State: Choose Slide or Rotate from the drop-down menu
TTF: The Target Toolface the directional driller is aiming to slide on.
ETF: Effective Toolface calculated over a slide interval. This will be populated automatically under the following conditions:
WITS data is being received and the WITS data reader is on
Auto populate slide sheet is selected
Rig States parameters for a slide are being fulfilled
Well Seeker calculates the ETF by taking each recorded toolface and calculating the distance drilled on this toolface. If survey and toolface data is being saved (option via the WITS Reader), then this data will be available to view by double left clicking on the line in the slide sheet which will open the Slide Analysis dialog.
TF Type: Magnetic (MAG) or Gravity (GRAV) Toolface
MY: Motor Yield average used for Bit Projection
MY Avg: Motor Yield Average – Average calculated using the previous 4 motor yields
Rot DLS: Dogleg seen while rotating
Rot TF: Toolface seen while rotating
Proj Inc: Projected Inc at the bit. Projected from the previous survey – data used by Criterion to determine directive
Proj Azi: Projected Azimuth at the bit. Projected from the previous survey – data used by Criterion to determine directive
Proj UD: Projected distance (at the bit) Up / Down from plan – data used by Criterion to determine directive
Proj LR: Projected distance (at the bit) Left / Right of plan – data used by Criterion to determine directive
Proj Delta Inc: Projected difference in inc from plan – data used by Criterion to determine directive
Proj Delta Azi: Projected difference in azi from plan – data used by Criterion to determine directive
DLS to Land: Criterion’s calculated dogleg required to land
Slide Length: Criterion’s recommended Slide Length directive for the next interval
Slide DLS: Dogleg achieved over the slide interval
Convergence: Amount of maximum degrees, whether inclination or azimuth, that Criterion will use to converge back towards the plan
CL: Course Length – The course Length between the Start and End depths displayed in the slide sheet.
WOB: Weight on bit - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
Flow Rate: Pump flow rate - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
RPM: Drill string rpm - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
Tq: Off bottom torque - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
ROP: ROP for the interval - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed if Rig States are recorded
PU Wt: Pick up weight – Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
Rot Wt: Free Rotating Weight - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
SO Wt: Slack off weight - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
Off Btm Press: Off bottom pump pressure - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
On Btm Press: On bottom pump pressure - Manually entered or taken from WITS feed
RSS Force: The steer force used by the RSS over the interval
Comments: Comments relating to the interval
Start Time: Start time
End Time: End time.
Slide Grade: Displays the grade of the slide. This is related to the ETF and will populate automatically after a slide if survey and toolface data is being saved (option via the WITS Reader). If the slide is perfectly on one tool face for the entire slide this would give an output of 100 as the slide went in exactly the same direction the whole time. If the slide was not consistently on a steady tool face, then this value will be less than 100. The lower the value, the worse the slide.
Date: Date
Temperature: Temperature
Inc X: Specific input for RVDS Report
Inc Y: Specific input for RVDS Report
Svy Time: Specific input for RVDS Report
Dat File: Specific input for RVDS Report
U: Specific input for RVDS Report
PLS: Specific input for RVDS Report
Circ Hrs: Hours circulated during the slide or rotation interval
Tool Orders allows an organization to create, update and maintain oversight of all the tool requirements for upcoming and existing jobs. The Tool Orders will be managed from the server database, but local database users at the rig site can also create tool orders and push these back to the server for approval, should the requirement for more tools occur during an ongoing job.
The tool order dialog can be opened from two different locations within Well Seeker depending on whether the user is accessing a server or local database, and while the dialog layout is identical in both cases, the functionality varies slightly depending on how it is accessed.
This feature is designed to be primarily accessed via the server database as it allows coordinators to plan and monitor upcoming tool requirements.
When the user is logged onto a server database, from the main user interface, select Tools – Dashboards – Tool Orders Dashboard.
It is important to note that when accessing a local database, the Tool Orders Dashboard option will not be available in the dashboards list. This will only be an option when accessing a server database.
Accessing the tool order dialog from a local database is something that should only ever happen in the field, as this is where the field engineer will go to order additional tools.
In a local database, the tool order dialog is accessed via the tool inventory dialog. Tool inventories are associated with actual wells, so the user must first have a database structure in place with everything from Operator to Actual Well level.
The tool inventory is accessed by right clicking at actual well level in the database tree and selecting Reporting – Tool Inventory (below Left). Once the tool inventory dialog is open, the tool orders dialog can be accessed either via the file menu (File – Tool Orders) or via the shortcut toolbar button (below Right).
Unlike the tool order dashboard, the dialog can be accessed in this way on both the local and the server.
The tool order dialog is split into 4 main sections which are described below.
Save: Save the active document
Print Report Excel: Prints an excel report of the selected tool order which includes all the associated order details which have the print option selected
Print Report PDF: Prints a pdf report of the selected tool order which includes all the associated order details which have the print option selected
Email Report: Opens a Microsoft Outlook email with the tool order report attached
Exit: Closes the tool orders dialog
Create new Tool Order: Creates a new tool order in the tool orders section
Delete Selected Tool Order: Deletes the selected tool order
Duplicate selected Tool Order: Duplicates the selected tool order
Refresh Grid: Refreshes the data in the tool orders and orders details sections
Update Job Data: Updates the job data in the tool orders section
Select all Tools: Selects all the tools in the orders details section for any given tool order
Un-select Tools: Unselects all the tools in the orders details section for any given tool order
Approve Order: This option can only be used when a tool order has a status selected as Request from Rig. Once approved, the status automatically changes to Submitted.
Edit Dropdown Menus: Opens the Edit Drop Down Menu dialog. The options available in the menu relate to columns in the orders details section This dialog allows the user to select an option and then enter the required items that they want to be available when the user selects the appropriate cell in the orders details section. The user can enter as many items as required. It should be noted that this option is only relevant when accessing a server database and should not be used in a local database.
The filters section allows the user to search and filter the data in the tool orders section of the dialog.
In addition to the search cell, there are 6 dropdown options which filter the following columns (left to right):
Status Column
Rig Column
Operator Column
Needed In Column
DD Coordinator Column
MWD Coordinator Column
The tools orders section is where the user enters the top-level order information. Each tool order can have multiple tools associated with it, which are all listed in the orders details section.
Operator: The name of the Operator. This can initially be filled in manually by the user; however, once the job number has been added to the well data and personnel section of a daily report, Well Seeker will automatically pull the Operator’s name into this cell, over writing anything that has been previously entered.
Job#: The job number. This is a very important cell as the job number is what links the tools orders to the jobs in the database tree. When the same job number is entered in the well data and personnel section of a daily report, several of the cells in this section will populate automatically.
Hole Size: The hole size
Well: The well name. This can initially be filled in manually by the user; however, once the job number has been added to the well data and personnel section of a daily report, Well Seeker will automatically pull the well name into this cell, over writing anything that has been previously entered.
State: The State. This cell should initially be left blank and will automatically populate once the job number has been added to the well data and personnel section of a daily report. Note: No manually typed data will save in this cell.
County: The County. This cell should initially be left blank and will automatically populate once the job number has been added to the well data and personnel section of a daily report. Note: No manually typed data will save in this cell.
Rig: The Rig. This cell should initially be left blank and will automatically populate once the job number has been added to the well data and personnel section of a daily report. Note: No manually typed data will save in this cell.
Mud Type: The Mud Type.
Mud Weight: The Mud Weight.
Min Temp: The expected minimum downhole temperature
Max Temp: The expected maximum downhole temperature
Status: A drop down menu offers the following options: Draft, Submitted, In Progress, Complete, Shipped & Requested from Rig. When Request from Rig is selected, the line will be highlighted in blue, and the dropdown menu will no longer be available to select from. At this point, the only way to change the status is to select Approve Order from the Tools Menu.
Date Needed: The date the tools are required.
Needed In: This cell populates automatically and displays the number of days until the tools are required. For 0-6 days the cell will be highlighted red, 7-30 days the cell will be highlighted orange and >30days the cell will be highlighted green.
Created By: The name of the person who created the tool order. This will be automatically populated based on the user credentials used when logging onto the server database.
Created Date: Automatically populated with the date the tool order was created.
Modified By: The name of the last person who modified the tool order. This will be automatically populated based on the user credentials used when logging onto the server database.
Modified Date: Automatically populated with the date the tool order was last modified.
Comments: General Comments
Motor Comments: Comments related to any motors on order
Tool Comments: Comments related to any tool that is not a motor.
DP CNX: Drill pipe connection. This is a drop-down menu which lists the menu items entered in the Connections section of the edit drop down menus dialog.
DD Coordinator: The DD Coordinator. This is a drop-down menu which lists all the DD Coordinators entered in the Personnel Details dialog.
MWD Coordinator: The MWD Coordinator. This is a drop-down menu which lists all the MWD Coordinators entered in the Personnel Details dialog.
The orders details section is where the user can enter all the tools required for any given tool order.
Description: Description of the tool
Tool Type: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list.
Quantity: Number of tools
OD: Outside Diameter of tool
ID: Inside Diameter of tool
Length: Length of tool
Top Cnx: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list.
Btm Cnx: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list.
Vendor: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list.
Lobe: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Stage: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Housing: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Rubber: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Rotor: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Bearing: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Bend Angle: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Bit 2 Bend: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list.
Stab OD: Outside Diameter of the stabilizer
BF Float: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Fit: Motor fit. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Temp Range: Tool Operating temperature range. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Serial#: Tool Serial Number. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
TH Hill: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Dyno: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Alt Vendor: Selected via a dropdown menu. Available options are taken from the Edit Dropdown Menus list. Only available when the Tool Type selected is Motor.
Comments: Relevant comments
Print: This selection determines which order details will be included in the report when it is printed.
The Tool Orders dialog works differently depending on whether it is accessed on a remote server database or on a local database. When accessed on a remote server database, the Tool Orders dialog is designed to be used by a coordinator to monitor and update tool requirements for multiple jobs. When accessed on a local database, the Tool Orders dialog is designed for an operator in the field to make requests for tools and push them back to the server for approval.
The procedure for creating and modifying tool orders differs slightly between a server and a local database, and is described in the sections below.
The below steps assume that the user already has a Well Seeker Pro remote server database:
The user should log on to their remote database and access the Tool Order dialog as described in section 13.21.1.1 – Server Database Access.
3. Input details for each of the tool order detail types in the Select menu option dropdown list. This will form the basis of what tool configurations the user can specifically ask for when using the Tool Orders dialog. This can be edited later if required. When the user has filled in all the relevant options, select Apply and then close the dialog.
5. Fill in the relevant details in the Tool Orders table:
If the tool order is for a job that has no daily reporting data yet, such as an upcoming job, then the user would input the Operator, Job # and Well information and leave the Hole Size, State, County, Rig, Mud Type, Mud Weight, Min Temp and Max Temp inputs blank.
If the tool order is for an existing job which has daily reporting data input within the database, the user would enter the Job # only and the rest of the cells will populate based upon the daily reporting data.
Update the Date Needed cell. This defaults to the date the tool order was created.
Input any additional information in the remaining cells.
At any stage a tool order can be printed or attached to an email. Firstly select the tool order from the Tool Order table. In the Order Details table, check the Print cell for any row that you wish to be included in the printed report.
A tool orders status can be updated from the Status dropdown menu as the tool order progresses through its work cycle.
6. Fill in the relevant details in the Order Details table. Some cells will be manually input, others will be selectable from the dropdown menu, the choices of which the user has set up previously. More than one row for multiple tools may be input in this section.
7. The Tool Order has been completed. By default, the tool order status is Draft. This should be changed to Submitted when the details are finalized. The status can be updated sequentially as the tool order is In Progress, Shipped and Complete.
8. At any stage a tool order can be printed or attached to an email. Firstly select the tool order from the Tool Order table. In the Order Details table, check the Print cell for any row that you wish to be included in the printed report.
10. A tool orders status can be updated from the Status dropdown menu as the tool order progresses through its work cycle.
The below steps assume that the user already has a Well Seeker Pro local database, populated with an actual wellbore:
In a local database, the user should access the Tool Order dialog via the Tool Inventory of the desired actual well, as described in section 13.21.1.2 – Local Database Access.
When the dialog opens it checks the IP and Port values entered in the Real Time Data Exchange dialog. If these are correct, then the dropdown menu options for the Order Details cells will be populated from the information on the server database.
3. Create the tool order and order details as described above for the server database procedure. Any tool orders created on the local database will automatically be given the status of Request from rig.
The AFE (Authorisation For Expenditure) Designer is a budgeting and approval tool used during the planning process for a well about to be drilled. Once completed the AFE provides, amongst other things, a budget for the project against which actual expenditure can be compared, along with a detailed breakdown of projected timings for each phase of the proposed scope of work.
The AFE Designer can only be accessed via a plan, by right clicking on a planned well in the database tree and selecting AFE designer via the reporting submenu. This option will be greyed out when accessed from any other level in the database tree.
Export AFE: Exports the AFE, which allows the user to quickly copy the data from one plan to another.
Import AFE: Imports an AFE export file. It is important to note that if the cost codes used in the original export are not available as options in the well which the AFE is being imported into, then the cost section for each activity will remain unpopulated.
Calculate: Runs the AFE calculation and opens the AFE Designer Results dialog.
Apply: Saves any changes made
Close: Closes the well AFE designer dialog
The AFE activity tree is where the user can detail all the relevant activities which make up the scope of work. These can be further broken down to incorporate as much detail as the user requires.
New activities are added by either right clicking on the tree itself and choosing from the available options, or from the radio buttons at the bottom of the window.
Once created, activities can be move around the tree to allow them to be positioned appropriately by using the Move Up / Down options. It is also possible to copy activities and paste them into other areas of the tree, where there is a requirement for a duplicate activity.
Note that it is only possible to copy activities which have properties assigned, and that once an activity has a property assigned to it, it is no longer possible to add a new activity below it in the tree.
The user has the option to choose from two different probability types when running the AFE calculation, Probabilistic and Deterministic.
Probabilistic: Uses a Monte Carlo simulation to determine the probability of various outcomes for the well. It will produce the minimum and maximum expected duration of the well along with the probability it will occur.
Deterministic: The length of time taken for an operation is fixed and cannot be changed. The cost and duration of the well is fixed and only a single output will be produced
Correlation Coefficient: The user can enter a value here between 0 and 1. This determines how closely correlated (matched) certain parameters are to one another. A high correlation coefficient (1) means directly correlated. This is where a change in one parameter has a direct impact on another parameter. A correlation coefficient of 0 means that parameters are not correlated at all and will be calculated independently of one another
Outputs: Allows the user to select which P values are displayed in the calculated outputs. The user can choose 3 outputs with P90, P50 and P10 as the defaults.
Monte Carlo Analysis: This option, allows the user to adjust the number of iterations that are used in the probabilistic calculations. 5000 is the default.
DP Jnt Length: DP joint length used by the program when Tripping DP (jnt/hr) is selected in the activity properties
DP Stand Length: DP stand length used by the program when Tripping DP (std/hr) is selected in the activity properties
Casing Jnt Length: Casing joint length used by the program when Tripping CSG (Jnt/hr) is selected in the activity properties
Activity Name: The name of the specific activity. This is the name that will appear in the activity tree.
Activity has Properties: When checked, this option allows the user to enter data in the activity properties, costs and risks sections. It is important to note that when this option is selected, it is no longer possible to add a new activity below this in the activity tree.
Activity Properties: This section allows the user to enter the relevant properties for a given activity. The properties available to enter will vary slightly depending on the probability type selected.
Start Depth: Start Depth for the given activity
End Depth: End Depth for a given activity. This depth can be shallower than the start depth for activities such as tripping out of hole etc.
Time: This dropdown menu gives the user the following choices: ROP, Tripping DP (std/hr), Time, Tripping DP (jnt/hr), Tripping Csg (jnt/hr). The user should select the most appropriate option for the activity.
Variable: This dropdown menu allows the user to choose between Variable and Fixed. This option is only available when Probabilistic is selected as the probability type. Variable will allow the user to enter a min, avg and max value; while fixed will only allow the user to enter an avg value.
Min: The minimum value associated with the selected time option. This forms part of the Probabilistic calculation and will not be available when Deterministic is selected.
Avg: The average value associated with the selected time option. This input is required for both the Probabilistic and Deterministic calculations.
Max: The maximum value associated with the selected time option. This forms part of the Probabilistic calculation and will not be available when Deterministic is selected.
When a selected activity has properties, the AFE cost section will be available to populate. Selecting the description or cost code cells will open a dropdown menu where the user can select the appropriate cost. This dropdown list is populated directly from the Cost Codes section associated with the well (Section 13.3). New costs can only be added in the cost code section.
When a selected activity has properties, the AFE risks section will be available to populate. Risks are events which could impact the overall time for the selected activity. Risks are only available in the probabilistic model and the time will be calculated based on the probability entered using a distribution based on the min max and avg times.
The AFE designer results window gives the user access to all the calculated results data in Chart and Excel format. All the chart outputs and data are available to view and print via the various menu options.
File Menu: Allows the user to exit the results window.
Charts Menu: Allows the user to switch between all the available chart outputs. The selected chart will be displayed in the window. The user can choose from the following options.
Time Probability Density Function
Cost Probability Density Function
Time Cumulative Density Function
Cost Cumulative Density Function
Depth v Time
Cost v Time
Time - Interval
Time - Cumulative
Cost - Interval
Cost - Cumulative
The final option available on this list allows the user to show annotations on the depth v time chart.
Excel Documents Menu: Allows the user to print an excel report for any one of the following options.
Event Model
Detailed Event Breakdown w/Costs
Cost Model
Time v Depth
Time v Cost
Time Histogram
Cost Histogram
Full Report
Chart Settings Menu: From here the user can change the background colour of the charts from black to white.
Report Settings Menu: Allows the user to select which charts and excel documents are included in the full report.
Well Seeker PRO is by default shipped with a 2 day trial license which enables all software features.
After this period has expired a full license must be purchased. Each software license is issued for a specific PC and to do this a computer code must be provided to Innova so the license can be issued. If your trial period has not expired open Innova engineering and click on the help menu-> License info option to display the license info dialog.
If your trial copy Well Seeker PRO has expired or your license is invalid the computer code will be displayed on the start-up screen. The code can be copied to the clipboard by highlighting the code and pressing Ctrl + C. This can then be pasted into a text document or email.
Send the computer code string to sales@innova-drilling.com and you will receive your license in the form of a LICENSE.txt file. Place this file in the same directory as WellSeeker.exe. usually C:\Program Files (x86)\Innova Drilling & Intervention\Well Seeker. And run the software.
License Deactivation
If you wish to deactivate a license (to move it to another machine), click on the deactivate license button in the license info dialog. Note the deactivation code and send a copy along with the computer code of the new PC to sales@inova-drilling.com. Once the deactivation code has been verified a license for the new machine will be issued.
The error model implemented in Well Seeker is the ISCWSA MWD error model as described in SPE paper 67616 by H. Williamson. This paper contains a full explanation of the ISCWSA work. The error model used within this program uses the error terms and one sigma magnitudes described below.
The model does not use any bias terms and it implements the latest misalignment and tool face independent terms as listed below.
Misalignment terms taken from SPE90408 by Torkildsen, Ekseth, Weston, Havardstein and TF independent terms from “Borehole survey error model documentation” – CDR-SM-03 – by Copsegrove Developments.
The Tool Orders dialog will open. Prior to the first use of the Tool Orders, it is recommended that the user input all the of the available tool order options that users will be able to select when creating a tool order in future. Select either Tools > Edit drop down menus or the icon from the toolbar.
4. To add a new Tool Order, select Tools > Create new tool order or select the icon from the toolbar. This will create a new row in the Tool Orders table.
Any tool orders with the status of Request from rig are a tool order that has been pushed from a local database to the server database. A user on the server can the approve this request for tools by selecting the tool order in question and selecting Tools > Approve order, or select the icon on the toolbar. This will change the status from Request from rig to Submitted.
9. Any tool orders with the status of Request from rig are a tool order that has been pushed from a local database to the server database. A user on the server can the approve this request for tools by selecting the tool order in question and selecting Tools > Approve order, or select the icon on the toolbar. This will change the status from Request from rig to Submitted.
4. To send this tool order request back to the server database, select the icon, or select Tools > Send order to server. The tool order can then be approved by the administrators from the server database and acted upon.
If a bit is selected it MUST always be the first component and cannot be moved from the first row.
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculations
Connection Top – plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Bit Type - Drop down menu (PDC or Tricone) - plays no part in any calculations
Grade In – Bit grade prior to running in hole plays no part in any calculations
Grade Out - Bit grade post run plays no part in any calculations
Gauge OD – Gauge OD plays no part in any calculations
TFA – Click on the cell to bring up the jets dialog. The details of the bit jets and / or the TFA can be entered by typing in the jet details in to the grid or the fixed TFA in to the edit box. Additional bit hydraulics values can be calculated by entering the flow rate, mud weight and bit size in the Parameters section
Formation Index (0-1) - Models the tendency of the bit to walk. 0 will model no walk, while 1 models a very aggressive bit with high walk tendencies. Used in BHA analysis calculations. For tri-cone bits, a BFI range of 0 to 0.3 is typical, while for more aggressive PDC bits 0.2 to 0.5 (or higher) can be modelled
Build Up Rate (BUR) = DLS * Cos (BFI)
Walk Rate (WR) = DLS * Sin (BFI)
Bit # - Bit number for the well plays no part in any calculations
Drilling Hours – Drilling hours for the run. This is not auto-populated from the DDR and should be input by the user. This cell plays no part in any calculations
Make - Bit make plays no part in any calculations
Model – Bit model plays no part in any calculations
Circ Hours – Circulating hours for the run. This is not auto-populated from the DDR and should be input by the user. This cell plays no part in any calculations
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculations
Connection Top – plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Grade In – Bit grade prior to running in hole plays no part in any calculations
Grade Out - Bit grade post run plays no part in any calculations
Gauge OD – Gauge OD plays no part in any calculations
TFA – Click on the cell to bring up the jets dialog. The details of the bit jets and / or the TFA can be entered by typing in the jet details in to the grid or the fixed TFA in to the edit box. Additional bit hydraulics values can be calculated by entering the flow rate, mud weight and bit size in the Parameters section
Drilling Hours – Drilling hours for the run. This is not auto-populated from the DDR and should be input by the user. This cell plays no part in any calculations
Make - Bit make plays no part in any calculations
Model – Bit model plays no part in any calculations
Circ Hours – Circulating hours for the run. This is not auto-populated from the DDR and should be input by the user. This cell plays no part in any calculations
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Same properties as a hole opener excluding Grade In, Grade Out, Gauge OD, Drilling Hours and Circ Hours – see above
SN – Serial Number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – not used in any calculation
Connection Bottom – not used in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Pressure drop – enter the pressure drop across the tool if any, used in hydraulics and T&D calculations
Arm OD – if the tool has a stabiliser enter its OD, used in Engineering
Arm Blade Width - if the tool has a stabiliser enter its blade width, used in Engineering
Arm Blade Length (in) - if the tool has a stabiliser enter its blade length, used in Engineering
Arm Distance From Bottom – If the tool has a stabiliser enter the distance from the bottom of the tool to the start of the stabiliser blade section. Used in Engineering
Stab Blade Count – The number of blades on the stabiliser. Not used in any calculation
Motor Yield – The theoretical maximum dls capability of the tool. This is used in the BHA analysis BUR calculation
RSS Force Setting – This is used in the BHA analysis BUR calculation. This will give an effective BUR based on the max dogleg capability entered above
NB Inc Offset – Near bit inclination offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
NB Azi Offset – Near bit azimuth offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
NB Gamma Offset – Near bit gamma ray offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Make – Make plays no part in any calculations
Model – Model plays no part in any calculations
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Same properties as RSS, excluding the Motor Yield and RSS Force Setting, with additional:
Survey Offset:
Gamma Offset:
PWD Offset – Pressure whilst drilling offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Res Offset – Resistivity offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Density Offset - Density offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Neutron Offset – Neutron offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Sonic Offset – Sonic offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Gyro Offset - Gyro offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Formation Tester Offset – Formation tester offset when entered is included in the printed BHA report
NB Gamma Offset:
MWD Type:
Pulser Type:
Pulser SN:
Pulser Driver Probe SN:
Battery #1 Probe SN:
Battery #2 Probe SN:
Battery #3 Probe SN:
Gamma Probe SN:
Directional Probe SN:
EM Probe SN:
Poppet:
Orifice:
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – not used in any calculation
Connection Bottom – not used in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Pressure drop – enter the pressure drop across the tool if any, used in hydraulics and T&D calculations
Stab OD – if the tool has a stabiliser enter its OD, used in Engineering
Stab Blade Width - if the tool has a stabiliser enter its blade width, used in Engineering
Stab Blade Length (in) - if the tool has a stabiliser enter its blade length, used in Engineering
Stab Distance From Bottom – If the tool has a stabiliser enter the distance from the bottom of the tool to the start of the stabiliser blade section. Used in Engineering
Stab Blade Count – The number of blades on the stabiliser. Not used in any calculation
Motor Yield – The theoretical maximum dls capability of the tool. This is used in the BHA analysis BUR calculation
Bit to Bend – This is used in the BHA analysis BUR calculation. This will give an effective BUR based on the bend angle entered above
Bend Angle – The bend setting on the motor. Used to calculate the theoretical maximum dls capability of the tool. This is used in the BHA analysis BUR calculation
Has Float – Yes or no. Float type can be input here if installed
Avg Differential Pressure – The expected differential pressure to be run across the motor. Used in hydraulics and T&D calculations
Rev/l – Revolutions of the bit per litre of fluid pumped through the tool. Used in the RPM Downhole calculation in Daily Reporting
Make - Make plays no part in any calculations
Model – Model plays no part in any calculations
Housing Type – Housing type plays no part in any calculations
Lobes – Lobes plays no part in any calculations
Stages – Stages plays no part in any calculations
Max Torque – Max torque limit
Max Diff Pressure – Maximum differential pressure limit
Max Flow – Maximum flow rate limit
Kickpad OD – Kickpad outer diameter
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Bearing Gap – Measured bearing gap of the motor plays no part in any calculations
Same properties as Motor, excluding Has Float, Housing Type, Lobes, Stages, Max Torque, Max Differential Pressure, Max Flow, Kickpad OD and Bearing Gap.
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – not used in any calculation
Connection Bottom – not used in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Stab OD – OD of the stabiliser blades, used in Engineering
Stab Blade Width - Blade width in inches, used in Engineering
Stab Blade Length (in) - Blade length in inches, used in Engineering
Stab Dist From Btm –Distance from the bottom of the tool to the start of the stabiliser blade section. used in Engineering
Stab Blade Count – The number of blades on the stabiliser. Not used in any calculation
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Same properties as a X/O
SN – Serial number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – not used in any calculation
Connection Bottom – not used in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Burst Pressure – The Burst pressure of the pipe
Collapse Pressure – The collapse pressure of the pipe
Material Name – Steel or Aluminium, chosen from a dropdown menu. This selection changes the Youngs Modulus of the pipe and effects buckling
Material Strength – Strength of material in units of pressure. Automatically populated from the Material Grades Catalogue entry when the Grade is selected
Pipe Class – Choose from the dropdown menu in the cell – New, Premium, Class 1 & Class 2 – This adjusts the wall thickness for T&D calculations and has an effect on hookloads and buckling calculations in Engineering
Internal Fluid Weight – This is the weight of fluid inside the pipe and is used for floating casing. If no value is entered the program assumes the pipe is filled with mud as per the fluid properties. If zero is entered, the program assumes there is NO fluid. If the fluid inside is a different weight from the mud weight in the fluid properties, enter the weight in ppg
FF Reduction (%) - if friction reduction subs are run in this interval then enter the % reduction in torque and drag (from manufacturers spec). Note if torque reduction subs are only run over a set interval the drill pipe must be entered in separate sections and the section with the friction reduction subs specified
Grade – Material grade selected from drop-down menu. All grades present in the drop-down menu are entries in the Material Grades Catalogue
Drill Pipe Range – Select from Range 2 or 3. Indicative or approximate single length
SN – Serial Number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Latch Up – The latch up setting for Mechanical or Hydro-mechanical Jars – Plays no part in any calculation
Latch Down – The latch down setting for Mechanical or Hydro-mechanical Jars – Plays no part in any calculation
Impulse – the change in momentum during the impact phase, measured by the area under the load versus time curve – Plays no part in any calculation
Make - Make plays no part in any calculations
Model – Model plays no part in any calculations
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Same properties as Jar, excluding Latch Up, Latch Down and Impulse
SN – Serial Number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Has float – YES / NO not used in any calculation
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Burst Pressure – The Burst pressure of the pipe in psi.
Collapse Pressure – The collapse pressure of the pipe in psi.
Material Strength – Strength of material in units of pressure. Automatically populated from the Material Grades Catalogue entry when the Grade is selected
Cent OD – the OD of the centralisers, if bow spring type simply enter the ID of the hole
Cent Blade Width – width of 1 blade of the centraliser in inches
Cent Blade Length – the length of a single centraliser in inches
Cent Blade Count – number of blades on centraliser
Internal Fluid Wt – This is the weight of fluid inside the liner, and is used for floating casing. If no value is entered the program assumes the pipe is filled with mud as per the fluid properties. If zero is entered, the program assumes there is NO fluid. If the fluid inside is a different weight from the mud weight in the fluid properties, enter the weight in ppg.
Float TFA – enter the TFA of the float or shoe, this is used for surge and swab calculations. Clicking on the cell brings up the jets dialog
Cent Spacing – number of centralisers over the interval – note if centralisers are only run across a certain interval then the liner should be entered as separate sections in the string. This is used for hydraulics and torque and drag calculations
Bow Spring Restore Force - Force exerted by a centralizer against the casing to keep it away from the wellbore wall
Grade – Material grade selected from drop-down menu. All grades present in the drop-down menu are entries in the Material Grades Catalogue
Same properties as liner
SN – Serial Number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Pressure Drop – enter the pressure drop across the tool if any, used in hydraulics and T&D calculations
FF Reduction (%) – The percentage reduction in the slack off friction factor because of the agitator’s inclusion in the string. This is factored into the T&D calculations for Tripping In, Slide Drilling and Rotating on Bottom operations.
Make – Plays no part in any calculation
Model – Plays no part in any calculation
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report
SN – Serial Number plays no part in any calculation
Connection Top – Plays no part in any calculation
Connection Bottom – Plays no part in any calculation
Tensile Yield – The tensile yield of the component. This value is displayed on the charts if selected
Torsional Yield – The torsional yield of the component. This value can be displayed on the charts if selected
Arm OD - OD of the Reamer Arm, used for SAG calculations and hydraulics
Arm Blade Width - Arm width in inches, used for hydraulics calculations
Arm Blade Length - Arm length in inches, used for SAG calculations and hydraulics
Arm Distance from Bottom - Distance from the bottom of the tool to the start of the Reamer Arm section. Enter in the depth units selected from the units menu. Used for SAG calculations
Arm Blade Count - The number of arms on the reamer. Not used in any calculation
Make – Plays no part in any calculation
Model – Plays no part in any calculation
Fish Neck – Fish neck length when entered is included in the printed BHA report
Fish Neck OD – Fish neck OD when entered is included in the printed BHA report